Circa’ External Environment And Industry Analysis Essay College Essay Help

Introduction Strategic assessment requires the business to get to know its external environment, internal resources and the business culture. In getting a market niche in a given market, the organization in question has to get their strategy right in order to cope with other competitors in the field.

Carrying out external analysis helps in understanding what might affect the business in the future from outside. External analysis is useful at three important levels. First level is the changes meant for the business environment, the next level is changes inside the business and the last level includes the activities of competitors known to the business.

The competitive forces in business reveal the drivers that bring about change in an industry. Business managers and investors need to understand the structure of an industry in performing external analysis (Tutor2u, 2011).

General Environmental Analysis (STEEP) Implications of the STEEP analysis to circa

This determines how circa’s external analysis affects its business environment. Circa’s issues in STEEP analysis in terms of social environment should talk about; what ideologies does circa have for the market. This can be explained through the market prices that circa offers for its products.

An example is the ZMF specialty chemical, which is selling at 2750 Australian dollars. This price is inclusive of a given margin which caters for situations where circa has to buy back the ZMF from third party converters. Another implication can be highlighted is, what pace is the technological change? To answer this, circa has a vision of having several plants with an estimated fabrication cost of 2 million Australian dollars for each.

The next implication lies on the ecological factor. This asks questions as what recycling capabilities does circa have. This focuses on the feedstock that is used by circa if there is a capability of recycling them for use. This will enable unconstrained feedstock availability. An example to this is the availability of 0.75 – 1.5 million tonnes straw in the Malle/ Wimmera region. Another implication is how the income is distributed.

This will depend on the consumption by the process. As an example circa’s production process may consume 50 percent of the char produced as energy, hence the need to use more economical means such as to use grid electricity. The last implication is how does circa processes influence decision making?

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is possible since it can enable decision on feedstock costs. Circa approximate cost for a farmer is about 23 dollars per tonne delivered. This gives a selling price of char to be 3.6 time the price given by the government on carbon dioxide (Circa, 2009).

Circa have several top issues that affect the analysis of its general environmental which include among the following five issues. The first issue is the type of feedstock used for the processes. Circa has a design capacity of 37.5 tonne per day of wet straw feedstock for each modular plant.

The second issue is the yield produced by the processes. Circa’s main aim is to increase the yields through establishing more plants to be built while it addresses process bottlenecks. Thirdly, there is the issue that circa faces in the general environmental analysis is the availability of unconstrained feedstock.

Subsequently circa face the issue of percentage of available plants for production. The question that circa should be objective on is the need for an option of co-locating on a site with larger number of manufacturers. Lastly, there is the assumption that the entire liquid chemical can be sold.

Importance of each environmental factor

Analysis of the environments that circa has to interact with takes into consideration several factors in environmental analysis. This is because they have to interact with several players in the market including their competitors. The first factor is the social factor whereby circa partner with other companies to commercially develop levoglucosenone and an agricultural equipment supplier to maintain the plants that circa owns.

The social factor also determines how circa relates to the other competitors in the market. Secondly, is the technological factor whereby circa uses a technology that is able to yield three products in form of a C6 liquid chemical that takes up 15%, agri char, which takes up 40% and water that takes 45% of the total yield. This technology helps circa to get the market niche that circa requires for marketing its products.

Thirdly, is the economic factor that considers using technologies that are inexpensive like furacell and a market price, which is in excess of 2500 Australian dollars per tonne. Another factor is environmental whereby circa locates multiple reactors in locations where large quantities of feedstock are available.

We will write a custom Essay on Circa’ External Environment and Industry Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Lastly is the political factor whereby circa considers governments recommendations in comparisons to industry initiatives. This helps circa to mitigate the costs they use in transferring to new technological opportunities to commercial reality (Albert, 1994).

Porter’s Five Forces Model

This model is vital when assessing the competition strategy in an industry. According to Porter, in order to determine industries profitability and its attractiveness, five forces add to the competitive advantage of the business. The forces in consideration in this model include new entrants to the market, threats of substitute products, and the power of buyers, the power of suppliers and rivalry that exists between competitors (Porter, 2008).

Threat posed by new market entrants

New companies that enter the Australian industry market affect the industry by raising the level of competition. The entrants of more manufacturing industries will affect the already existing ones since there will be competition for raw materials.

In countering these factors, CIRCA needs to take note of what scales of economies exists in the market. Another issue to consider is investment requirements in order to thrive in the industry. Then there is the issue of the costs that are involved in switching of customers. Circa gets to account for the expenses in switching of customers between their competitors.

Threats posed by substitute products

Substitute products in the Australian industry make the industry less attractive. This brings about limits in the price of products since customers have substitute products.

Bargaining power of suppliers

The cost of buying items for production is significant to the company’s profitability. For the Australian industry, the bargaining power of the suppliers is limited since most of the raw materials in use are recycled. The industry becomes less attractive if the suppliers have a higher bargaining power. When the bargaining power of suppliers is high then

Availability of many buyers with less suppliers

The available goods are highly valued and are undifferentiated

Buyers do not integrate backwards into supply (Porter, 2008).

Bargaining power of buyers

In order to create demand in an industry, buyers have to be present. The bargaining power of buyers is greater when the number of dominant buyers is less as compared to the number of sellers in the industry. Australia boosts of a wide market for its products, which includes other companies, hence this makes the market attractive. This is because there is the ready market for the products produced.

Intensity of rivalry

This depends mainly on the competition structure of the market. In the Australian industry, rivalry is minimal since the market is a leader in the products it provides. Another benefit to the Australian industry is that the products customers can clearly differentiate their products from other competitors. This makes the industry attractive since it is profitable, as most customers will prefer products from the industry.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Circa’ External Environment and Industry Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More From the above reasons, it is practical that the Australian industry is attractive, as most of the customers prefer their products hence making it profitable (Grove, 1996).

Who are CIRCA’s main competitors? How do they measure up against these competitors?

CIRCA’s main competitor is Biota Holdings Limited. This company deals mainly with the development of drugs and has a market capitalization in excess of 390 million Australian dollars.

In this regard, CIRCA needs to produce more products for the market. Another measure towards competitors is the use of mobile plants in the location of raw materials. This gives CIRCA an opportunity to reduce cost in some services, which would be available on site. CIRCA is employing a pricing technique depending on the number of units purchased (Circa, 2009).

External analysis General environment

This environment has a broad scope with long-term implications for the organization and the strategies for the environment. Circa achieves this through establishing of more plants and then identifies and addresses process bottlenecks. This environment helps CIRCA to know the boundaries of its market segment.

Circa intends to put up a number of projects that will improve their yields while driving down production cost. Circa’s strategy is to carry out the projects in two stages. Circa will run and own the first two plants of the first stage. The second stage in the projects implementation will target the performance capabilities of future plants.

Industry environment

This environment determines how attractive an industry is. Analysis of the external environment in regards to industry environment helps circa determine what profits the company most. Circa has set the market price for the ZMF specialty chemical at 2750 Australian dollars.

This pricing includes a certain a given pricing margin for circa that helps in situations where circa is buying back the ZMF from the third party converters. This environment helps CIRCA to know its economic strengths. It also gives CIRCA a leeway on how to go about marketing of the products in order to increase the profit margin.

Competitor environment

This environment considers competitors who can be individuals or groups. The competitors’ environment is split into strategic groups, which are subsets that compete close to one another and exhibit same characteristics.

Circa plans to build, two plants next year in august and December with a fabrication cost of 2 million dollars for each. These will be based on mobile plants equivalents. This will later on provide reduction in the availability of low-grade heat on site thus making circa more competitive as compared to other companies (Circa, 2009).

Direct and indirect competitors for CIRCA in Australia

[supanova_question]

Limitations of GDP as a Measure of Economic Welfare Essay essay help site:edu

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) is an economic parameter that measures economic activity of a nation. Conventionally, GDP measures the market value of goods and services that a nation produces in a given time in terms of per capita. Per capita indicates economic welfare of people.

According to the World Bank, GDP is parameter that compares economic capacities of nations and economic welfare of their respective citizens (Para. 1). GDP is applicable as an indicator of economic welfare because it correlates with amounts of goods and services that people consume. However, GDP is not a sufficient parameter to indicate economic welfare of a nation because it measures activities that have monetary values only.

Wenzel (2009) posits that, the use of GDP as a normative indicator of economic capacity of a nation does not give quality measure of economic growth because it gives a distorted view economic welfare (p. 7). Fundamentally, GDP has several limitations because it does not consider intricate factors that determine economic status of a nation and economic welfare of populations.

The first limitation of GDP as an economic welfare indicator is that it measures overall economic activity of a nation, which indirectly indicate welfare of the population. Although a nation may have so many economic activities, it may also have low welfare status of its citizens.

Rationale of using GDP as a welfare indicator has it basis on the assumption that economic activities directly indicate economic welfare of citizens. Kahneman and Krueger (2006) argue that, economic activities of a nation and economic welfare of individuals are technically different entities that coincidentally correlate (p.6). Thus, it is assumptive to believe that GDP correlates with economic welfare of populations.

The second limitation of DGP is that it does not consider the distribution of wealth in a nation because it gives average production of goods and services in markets. Rogers, Jalal, and Boyd (2008) assert that, GDP does not take into consideration leisure facilities, depletion of natural resources, volunteer labour, household production and other underground economic activities that do not feature in markets (p. 302).

Since many goods and services are not present in markets, use of GDP as an indicator of economic welfare of the population gives an underestimated value of welfare status.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The fact that GDP indicates net production rather than gross production is a third limitation of GDP as an indicator of economic welfare. Riesman (2006) argues that, GDP examines the value of final products and thus exclude value of intermediate products or raw materials that are economically significant (p. 611).

Production of raw materials and intermediate products involve a substantial deal of economic activities that reflect economic welfare of the population, but does not appear in GPD. Therefore, GDP overlooks significant factors of production that deals with raw materials and intermediate products, hence does not reflect economic welfare of a nation or its population.

Fourthly, GDP limitation is that it does not differentiate beneficial production from detrimental production for it just measures overall economic activities.

Smith (2011) contends that, the value of GDP increases even in detrimental activities such as oil spill, pollution, road accidents, outbreak of diseases, and increase in crimes yet welfare status drops (Para. 3). GDP increases in the presence of detrimental activities because government spend a lot of resources in mitigating detrimental effects of varied activities but welfare of the population remains the same or degenerate. Thus, GDP does not sufficiently indicate welfare status of nations and their population.

References Kahneman, D.,

[supanova_question]

What Would You Do With 90 A380s? Report essay help online: essay help online

Introduction The Emirates Group boasts of the fastest growing and one of the most profitable airlines in the global aviation industry. The Dubai-based airline has doubled its fleet in the last decade. Besides, the number of passengers travelling by the airline doubled over the same period. In the 2010/2011 financial year, the firm reported a net profit of 1.5 billion US dollars.

It also employees 55,000 workers and continues to fly one of youngest fleets. Despite the intense competition and difficult trading conditions in the industry, the firm continues to be profitable. This is reflected in its aggressive expansion plan. In order to meet its current and future demand, the firm has ordered about 200 new aircrafts of which 90 are A380s.

Due to its rapid expansion, Emirates’ competitors especially, European airlines are considering it a major threat in the industry. This paper analyzes the competitive environment of Emirates Airline and how it can survive the competition. It also sheds light on the strategies adopted by European Airlines to outperform Emirates in the industry.

Porter’s Five Forces Analysis Threat of New Entrants

New entrants are the new firms which are likely to join the industry thereby posing the threat of reducing the market shares of the incumbent firms. In Dubai’s aviation industry and the greater global aviation industry, most airlines enjoy economies of scale by expanding their operations.

For example, Emirates is able to reduce its unit costs by flying new large aircrafts. Besides, it enjoys access to low cost high quality infrastructure at Dubai International Airport. Product differentiation is also very high as major airlines like Emirates provide tailor made services to retain their customers.

The capital requirement for joining the industry is very high. This is attributed to the fact that aviation industry is capital intensive and requires significant investments in modern technology and infrastructure. The incumbent firms have great control over the distribution channel. Since most airlines are co-owned by their respective governments, legislations are used to restrict competition by limiting air access rights of foreign firms.

Similarly, most airlines are normally supported by their governments through capital injections or subsidies. In Dubai, the Emirates Airline has formed a partnership with the government to facilitate efficiency and reduction in costs. In conclusion, these trends indicate that the threat of new entrants is low in the industry. This means that it is difficult for new firms to join the industry and thus the incumbent firms can retain their market shares.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Power of the Buyers

The power of the buyers refers to the effect that customers have on the industry. The aviation industry is characterized by a low concentration of buyers as compared to the sellers. This means that there are very many travelers as compared to airlines. The travelers’ switching costs are low due to the fact that they can easily move from one airline to another at low costs. The level of product differentiation is high as airlines try to meet their customers’ expectations.

The threat of backward integration is very low since it is very rare to find travelers buying their own private jets from aircraft manufacturers. With the exception of low concentration of buyers, the other trends indicate that buyers have a low bargaining power in the industry. We can thus conclude that the competitiveness of Emirates and other airlines can not be compromised by the travelers’ bargaining power.

Threat of Substitute Products

Threat of substitutes is the competition a product faces as a result of the existence of alternative products in another industry. At the domestic level, the Emirates and European airlines face competition from buses, trains and personal cars. However, the differentiation of these alternative modes of transportation is not differentiated.

Besides, cars and buses are relatively slow thus being more expensive in the long run. At the international level, there is no alternative for air transportation. This leads to the conclusion that the threat of substitute products is low in the industry. Thus airlines can increase their services at the international level thereby increasing their earnings due to lack of alternative transportation services.

Power of Suppliers

The power of the suppliers refers to the influence of the manufacturers of aircrafts and the suppliers of key inputs such as fuel. There are many buyers (airlines) as compared to suppliers (aircraft manufacturers). The availability of substitutes is also low since there are no alternative means of air transport other than aircrafts. The suppliers’ products are highly differentiated since most aircrafts are built according to the needs of the buyer.

The airlines’ switching costs are also very high. This based on the fact that the supply of aircrafts involves long-term contracts with financial penalties. Besides, benefits such as export financing are limited to airlines who order their aircrafts from specific countries.

However, the buyers (airlines) remain very important to the manufacturers since they are the main customers of the later. In conclusion, the power of the suppliers remains high in the industry. This means that the suppliers can possibly exploit the airlines through high prices or delays in deliveries.

We will write a custom Report on What Would You Do With 90 A380s? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Competitive Rivalry

This refers to the intensity of competition among airlines. The industry is characterized by a very large number of competitors. For instance, over 150 airlines operate from Dubai International Airport thereby increasing competition in Dubai’s aviation industry. The fixed costs are very high since most firms have to employ thousands of workers to sustain their operations. The aviation industry at the global level is mature and thus its growth rate is slow.

Every firm focuses on high level of product differentiation in order to improve its competitiveness. The exit barriers are very high in the industry. This is attributed to the high regulation on acquisitions and mergers of airlines especially in Europe. The strategic stakes remain high as some European airlines like British Airways lose their market positions due to inefficiencies while the Emirates’ potential of gaining a greater market share through rapid expansion increases.

These trends lead to the conclusion that the “intensity of competitive rivalry” is very high in the industry. The high intensity of competition is likely to have a negative impact on firms which are not able to maintain their competitiveness through cost efficiency, innovation and expansion.

Ways in which Emirates Airline can add Value

Given the threat posed to European airlines by the rapid expansion of the Emirates Airline, the former have launched pressures to reduce the influence of the later in the industry. In order to survive the pressure from European airlines, the Emirates can continue to add value through the following ways.

First, the Emirates should maintain its current rapid expansion rate. Most network airlines from Europe are currently experiencing a slow growth rate due to challenges such as high fuel costs, increased capacity and unstable macroeconomic environment in Europe. Thus the Emirates can take advantage of the European airlines’ slow growth rate and increase its profitability by serving the markets that can not be served by the network airlines.

Second, the Emirates can add value by deploying its capacity in routes in which it enjoys maximum competitive advantage. It should particularly take advantage of the strategic geographical location of Dubai which is just eight hours of flight from most parts of the world.

Since Dubai is a major connection point for most international flights, the Emirates can “focus its growth in traffic flow linking India, China, Africa and Mid East”. Dubai plays an important role as a connection hub in these routes. Due to the high traffic flow associated with these routes, the Emirates will enjoy economies of scale by serving them.

Third, the Emirates should focus in offering competitive prices. Due to the difficult economic situation in most parts of the world, most customers are price sensitive. Thus low prices will enable it to attract more customers. The firm should also maintain its low operating costs in order to sustain the low prices. Finally, the firm should distinguish itself in the market as the best provider of customer services.

Not sure if you can write a paper on What Would You Do With 90 A380s? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Pressure from European Airlines in Terms of International Laws and Policies

In the context of international law and policies, the European airlines can increase the pressure on Emirates by limiting its air access rights. This means that the European airlines are likely to lobby their governments to limit Emirates’ access to their domestic markets.

Some European analysts consider the Emirates’ rapid expansion a “genuine business plan that will limit growth in businesses and jobs in Europe”. Some analysts however, consider the expansion to be excess and is thus meant to dump excess capacity in Europe. Consequently, the airlines are likely to put pressure on their governments and industry regulators to limit Emirates access to their markets.

The Current and Future Strategy for European Airlines Current Strategies

The European airlines have attacked some aspects of the cost advantages enjoyed by Gulf airlines. In particular, they are opposed to the provision of export financing facilities to the Gulf airlines. The European airlines believe that they should also be allowed to access credit facilities from Export Credit Agency. Second, they are also opposed to the low cost of using Gulf airports “despite the high investments undertaken at these airports”. Finally, some carriers such as Lufthansa are focusing on restricting Emirates’ access to their markets.

Future Strategy

The European airlines are focusing on forming alliances around the Gulf hub in order to boost their competitiveness. This includes forming partnerships with Kenya’s Skyteam and Ethiopia’s Star alliance.

Some European airlines are also considering forming partnerships with other Gulf airlines such as Qatar in order to realize the network strengths enjoyed by Emirates. Finally, the European airlines are considering strengthening their positions in the markets in which they have competitive advantages over the Gulf airlines such as Emirates.

Fleet and Network Review

Currently, the Emirates’ fleet is characterized by wide bodied aircrafts since it mainly serves the long-haul routes. The company has a policy of replacing its aircrafts at the age of 12 years. Thus in the next decade most of its aircrafts will be retired. This means that the aircrafts currently on order will be used to replace the old ones by 2020. Due the increase in average aircraft size, Emirates’ seat capacity is expected to increase by 6.6% CAGR by 2020.

This would allow the company to meet the increasing demand for its services. The total number of aircrafts owned by the firm is expected to increase from 155 to 249 by 2020. Such an increase will enable the firm to serve more routes and customers. Even though the delivery of the aircrafts on order is expected to end by 2020, it is also possible that the firm could order more aircrafts to meet its expansion needs in the next decade.

Strategy for Operating the 90 A380s

First, since the A380s are very large aircrafts, it would be in the interest of the firm to deploy them on long-haul routes. This would enable the firm to enjoy economies of scale and reduced unit costs. Second, due to the large size of the order, Emirates should focus on introducing new routes in its network. Increasing the number of routes will enable it to fully utilize its capacity thereby reducing costs and increasing profits.

Finally, some of the A380s should be used to replace the old aircrafts. The new aircrafts are more efficient in fuel consumption, are safer and equipped with modern technologies such as broadband internet connection. Hence their use will enable the firm to improve customers’ travel experiences and satisfaction. These strategies should be implemented within the framework of a cost leadership strategy. This means that the firm should focus on maintaining the lowest cost in the industry as it launches the use of the 90 A380s.

Conclusion The Emirates is one of the fastest growing airlines in the global aviation industry. Currently, the airline has an ambitious expansion plan in which it intends to acquire 90 A380s among other smaller aircrafts by 2020. The expansion plan is expected to help the airline gain a significant market share in the industry.

Consequently, most European airlines consider Emirates a threat to their competitiveness. In response to Emirates’ expansion plan, the European airlines are considering adopting protectionist policies and forming alliances with the competitors of Emirates. In order to survive the continued lobbing by the European airlines, the Emirates should focus on a cost leadership strategy as it launches its new aircrafts.

Works Cited Daraban, Benard and George Fournier. “Incumbent Responses to Low-Cost Airline Entry and Exit: A Special Autoregressive Panel Data Analysis.” Reserach in Transport Economics 34.6(2008): 15-24. Print.

Dess, Gregory. Strategic Management. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2010. Print.

Emirates and Dubai Airports. Explaining Dubai’s Aviation Model. Business. Dubai: Oxford Economics, 2011. Print.

Feiler, George and Timothy Goodoritch. “Decline and Growth, Privatization in Middle East Airline Industry.” Journal of Transport Geography 10.3(2009): 55-64. Print.

Forsyth, Peter. “Environment and Financial Sustainability of Air Transport.” Journal of Air Transport Management 11.3(2010): 204-255. Print.

Franke, Michael and Frank John. “What Comes Next After Recession? Airline Industry Scenarios and Potential End Games.” Journal of Air Transport Management 3.1(2010): 19-26. Print.

Graham, Mick. “Diffrent Models in Diffrent Space or Liberalization Optimization? Comparative Strategies among Low-Cost Carriers.” Journal of Transport Geography 12.5(2009): 306-316. Print.

Harvey, George. “Cleared for Take-Off? Management Labor Partnership in the European Civil Aviation Industry.” Journal of Industrial Relations 23.6(2004): 287-307. Print.

Hazeldine, Tom. “Legacy Carriers Fight Back: Pricing and Product Differentiation in Modern Airline Marketing.” Journal of Air Transport Management 32.4(2010): 40-43. Print.

Joyce, Paul and Adrian Woods. Strategic Management. New York: Kogan Page, 2001. Print.

Lobbenberg, Andrew, Julia Winarso and Joe Spooner. Airlines: What would you do with 90 A380s? Business. Scotland: Royal Bank of Scotland, 2011. Print.

Morrell, Paul. “Can Long-Cost Airlines be Successful?” Research in Transport Economics 5.3(2008): 61-67. Print.

Nicolau, John. “Testing Prospect Theory in Airline Demand.” Journal of Air Transport 4.2(2010): 254-260. Print.

Sadler, Philip and James Craig. Strategic Management. New York: Kogan Page, 2003. Print.

Trethway, Mick. “Distortions of Airline Revenues: Why the Network Airline Business Model is Broken.” Journal of Transport Management 34.1(2004): 3-14.Print.

[supanova_question]

A Response Paper to H.J McCloskey’s “On Being an Atheist” Essay scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Cosmological Argument

The Teleological Argument

The Problem Of Evil

The Comfort Of Atheism

Conclusion

Bibliography

Footnotes

Introduction The article ‘On Being an Atheist’ is a thoughtful piece that discredits the arguments poised by theists as being inadequate. Written by a great philosopher, McCloskey engages the reader with his intellectual critic approach of theists over atheists. He argues that most people who believe in God either do so blindly or lack adequate information.

He believes that God’s existence have never and will never be proved and therefore refers to the arguments as mere proofs.1 He demands for genuine examples to ascertain the truth and he argues that with the absence of such examples, he is convinced that God does not exist.

Though McCloskey seems to make a solid argument to prove his claims, they are lacking in nature. Providing absolute proof can be challenging in most instances. This is evident from the PointeCast presentation (Lesson 18) argument which states that it is impossible to proof existence of certain things such as the magnetic field.

No human being has proof that magnetic field exists and the scientists themselves do not have experimental data to proof the same. The presentation further argues that the existence of the universe is hard to ascertain and other factors such as naturalism and evolution have been used to argue its existence.

McCloskey argument on ‘proof’ is not convincing to any rational person because the general standard of proof has been set very high for anyone to proof a certain claim. His argument that God does not existence for lack of proof is therefore not justified.

The Cosmological Argument McCloskey base his focus on the cosmological argument where he argues that the universe as the human beings view it is not any proof that God or any other superior being exists.2 He further argues that humans err in believing God’s existence based on cosmological argument.

His claim has been refuted by Evans in his book ‘Philosophy of Religion’ who argues that the universe ought to have had a beginning.3 Cosmological argument seeks to provide answers to human beings about the universe and its existence. The argument implies that the superior being is as a result of the existence of the cosmos.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More What this mean in a nut shell is that all what is entailed in the universe came to being as a result of something and the universe itself is also as a result of something that is based externally. The argument forms a basis that nature is dependent on God’s existence and it is this power that makes God the First Cause.

God’s powers are more powerful than nature itself hence triggering the concept of creation from nature itself. McCloskey claims that the cosmological argument does not proof that God is behind the creation of the universe.

He however seems to support the idea that there is a powerful cause behind the creation but he argues that the particular cause remains unknown. Evans seems to concur that there is an unknown cause based on the cosmological argument. It triggers one’s imagination to seek further knowledge about God.

He concludes his argument by stating that the superior cause behind the universe creation is not perfect as the universe itself is imperfect. This rebuts the claims that an ‘omnipotent all-perfect being’ was involved in the creation process. It is not clear how McCloskey came up with the conclusion that the world is not perfect.

He fails to justify his claim and base his argument on his own personal views with an assumption that everybody understands his point of view. It can be argued by a rational man that the universe appears to be both perfect and imperfect in its creation.

How else can concepts such as night and day, man and woman or even monsoons and droughts be explained? Though this concept of opposites does not form a strong basis of the argument, it does deserve recognition to make support such a claim.

The Teleological Argument The teleological argument is also attacked by McCloskey basing his argument on design and purpose.4 The argument is based on the belief that everything in the universe was designed and that everything designed ought to have a purpose. The argument is an attempt to prove God’s existence.

We will write a custom Essay on A Response Paper to H.J McCloskey’s “On Being an Atheist” specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is argued that if indeed everything seems to have an existence, then it is justifiably correct to claim that the existence has been designed and is meant to serve a particular purpose. In general, teleological argument holds the belief that anything that is designed ought to have been designed by somebody or something else.

McCloskey argues that this argument does not form any basis as the design is not backed by unquestionable examples. He relies on the concept of evolution as his main judgment to support his argument.

Evans, in response interestingly makes an intelligent claim that even though evolution is a mechanical process, it ought to have a designer who is God and in achieving that goal, he ultimately realizes his purpose.

This argument helps to trigger one’s mind on the kind of design visible on everything. It creates a never ending cycle in the minds of those seeking to know if indeed there is anything that can be seen or if it is just an illusion.

Nevertheless, if indeed it is an illusion, who designed that illusion? It therefore becomes human logic to conclude that everything was designed and created for it to come into existence.5

The Problem Of Evil Based on this reasoning, it is evident that most people tend to ignore this part of the argument. Whilst theists base their belief on a good God, atheists try to come up with numerous justifications implicating God’s imperfections.

This creates the problem of evil. McCloskey relies on the problems of evil to justify his claims. One such claim is the idea of a perfect God and yet evil exist. He argues that if indeed God is all-powerful and all-perfect, he does not understand why he would let such a problem exist amongst his people.

Though he makes a strong and significant assessment regarding the problem of evil, Evans critics his approach by arguing that there is no evidence that theism is conflicting due to the presence of evil.

Not sure if you can write a paper on A Response Paper to H.J McCloskey’s “On Being an Atheist” by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More He argues that no one knows the reason behind the problem of evil or even why God allows it but he claims that it is probably better if the situation stays as it is. He argues that a God’s believer has the knowledge that their final resting place is heaven and not earth and there is a reason why God allowed evil to dominate over the earth.

The earth is filled with imperfections while heaven is perfect. He justifies his argument by stating that God gave everybody a free will to choose the kind of life they want to live in.

McCloskey argues that God did not give man a free will to choose what is right. He claims that God, by creating man and choosing what is right for him cannot justify the claim that man has a free will. He further argues that if God designed everything, then he designed it right for man.

McCloskey triggers the question, ‘what is right’? Only God, the creator has the ultimate answer to that particular question. It therefore becomes difficult to uphold the problem of evil to object theism. It is evident that the problem of evil poses a challenge to atheists as opposed to theists.

The problem of evil has not drawn responses from Evans but also from other philosophers like Mackie and Plantinga.6 Plantinga’s argument refutes the problem of evil. He argues that the problem of evil contradicts the belief of the existence of an omniscient and all powerful God.

He argues that it is a possibility that God created a world that is characterized with evil to create a free will. This argument has however been criticized by Mackie who supports McCloskey in his argument.

Mackie argues that theism’s argument on the existence of God and evil is not consistent. He criticizes Plantinga’s premise that if indeed God is ‘omnipotent and wholly’, it contradicts the problem of evil.

However, it can be argued logically that these two grounds are not contradictory as Mackie and McCloskey claims. While God has been defined as an ‘omnipotent’, there is no limit to his actions. Besides, a good and evil deed is opposed to each other as a good deed always out-smarts an evil deed. It is up to human beings to freely choose whether to engage in the evil or the good deed.

This ability makes him an important being in the whole creation process. By exercising his free will on earth, he therefore serves his purpose as God intended him to when he was creating everything in the universe, including man himself.

The Comfort Of Atheism McCloskey finally attempts to argue the simplicity of being an atheist. He states that atheism offers a comfort zone without having to seek any answers to justify his belief. He interestingly argues that atheism do not provide a confused avenue of why a superior being would bring one to the world and end up subjecting him to sufferings in the name of love.

Atheism, he argues, offers a source of comfort to victims who seem not to find any answers to their questions and states that they will find comfort in caring friends. This is indeed a disturbing argument. He seems to put his moral obligations upon his fellow human beings whom he argues are unselfish in their acts.7

His argument is refuted by William Craig who argues that failure to involve God in one’s life, a human being become useless and is doomed.8 He continues to argue that if God is deemed inexistence, then the universe cease to exist and so does man. Craig’s argument seems to be more logical than McCloskey’s.

Conclusion However, it can be concluded that God’s existence is basically based on what one believes in. Faith is the utmost stepping stone to such belief. Faith should be from within and not merely by reading philosophical arguments or science fiction.

To get answers to certain questions such as ‘Who created the universe?’, or ‘Does God exist?’ may be impossible and both Evans and McCloskey fails to have specific answers. It all comes back to personal faith and which philosophical side seems more logical than the other. Only then can man allow God to reveal himself.

Bibliography Craig, William Lane, “The Absurdity of Life without God,” Reasonable faith: Christian Truth and Apologetics, 3rd ed. Wheaton: Crossway Books Publishers, 2008.

Evans, Stephen and Zachary, Manis. Philosophy of Religion: Thinking about faith. Atlanta: IVP Academic, 1985.

Feinberg, John. The many faces of evil: theological systems and the problem of evil. Michigan: Zondervan, 1994.

Hasker,William. Metaphysics: Constructing a World View. Dourners Grove: Inter Varsity Press, 1983.

Holmes, Arthur Frank. Ethics, approaching moral decisions. Dourners Grove: Inter Varsity Press, 1984.

McCloskey, John. “On Being an Atheist.” Question, Issue 1 (1968): 62-69.

Footnotes 1 John McCloskey, “On Being an Atheist.” Question, Issue 1 (1968): 62.

2 John McCloskey, 63.

3 Stephen Evans and Manis Zachary, Philosophy of Religion: Thinking about faith (Atlanta: IVP Academic, 1985), 10.

4 John McCloskey, 64.

5 William Hasker, Metaphysics: Constructing a World View (Dourners Grove: Inter Varsity Press, 1983), 105.

6 John Feinberg, The many faces of evil: theological systems and the problem of evil (Michigan: Zondervan, 1994), 203.

7 Arthur Frank Holmes, Ethics, approaching moral decisions. (Dourners Grove: Inter Varsity Press, 1984), 123.

8 William Craig Lane, “The Absurdity of Life without God,” Reasonable faith: Christian Truth and Apologetics, 3rd ed. (Wheaton: Crossway Books Publishers, 2008), 70.

[supanova_question]

Technological Catastrophe: Titanic in 1912 Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Technology advancement is present in all industrial and commercial applications in the modern world where it has made life easy and improved the efficiency of performing various applications. The industrial revolution has led to the creation of many technological systems which purely rely on technology for their operations.

If these systems are not checked, they can malfunction leading to technological disasters which in turn leads to loss of life and property and at the same time threaten the trust people have in technological systems. A good example of technological catastrophe which has ever happened due to technological failure is the sinking of the famous ocean liner, the Titanic in the year 1912.

The Titanic ocean liner was designed using high technological systems as many people saw it a dream ship which could not sink nor have any malfunction in the course of its voyage. The Titanic ship was an extraordinary ship whose main usage was transportation by carrying passengers across the Atlantic Ocean in New York City to the United Kingdom.

The Titanic voyage was supposed to be luxurious with comfort and style where prominent people were expected to be boarding the ship for their tourist activities or business functions across the two regions. The Titanic ocean liner made her maiden voyage in the year 1912 filled with prominent businessmen and people who were excited to be on the new dream ship.

On its board the ship had more than 2,200 passengers and the crew members who were travelling from Southampton in England to New York in America. On April 4th 1912 on its first voyage, the marvelous titanic ship sank in the cold waters of the Atlantic Ocean after hitting an iceberg which resulted to the worst maritime disaster in the world.

The sinking of titanic ship which was said to have been built using the latest form of technology on its time by its manufactures led to loss of life of many prominent people and others who were aspiring to start a new life in America from Europe (Burgan, 2004).

The Titanic ship sank, despite assurance from its builders in Ireland that the ship had been manufactured using the latest form of technology of its time. The ship sunk after its side could not take the pressure from the iceberg it brushed within the Atlantic Ocean which led to the breaking of its rivet heads and bending of its steel plates.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This resulted into the water flowing in the lower floors of the ship and the ship sank completely in three hours. The interest of the Titanic ship was inspired again in the year 1986 when the remains of the ship were found on the floor of Atlantic Ocean by scientists.

The events leading to the sinking of the ship and the finding of its wreckage in the Atlantic Ocean led to in-depth analysis of technology with a clear line between advantages and disadvantages of technological systems. It also brought out the darker side of technology which can never be perfect with people very familiar to a given technological standards making mistakes which can be avoided.

According to Perrow, (1999), it’s almost impossible to eliminate risks from high-risk systems as we tend to blame the wrong people and wrong factors. The designers of high-risk complex systems should put in place the safety measures when they are designing systems and perform abundant tests before these systems become fully usable by the consumers.

The design and construction of Titanic ship put into consideration safety measures whereby the ship was supposed to withstand even severe climatically conditions in its voyage. The ship had 16 compartments on its lower deck which were separated by watertight doors.

The compartments were designed in such a way that in case water entered in one compartment, the watertight doors could shut down preventing water from spreading into other compartments. The ship had also wireless radio which enabled the operators to send and receive signals in Morse code.

It was also designed to stay afloat even when the two larger watertight compartments were filled with water. The ship, despite having all these security features lacked one major safety item, lifeboats.

Perrow, (1999), blames the society, management, political system and other regulating authorities for the occurrence of most of the technological disasters. In case of the Titanic, the regulating authority in the country of its manufacture didn’t ensure thorough testing of the ship.

We will write a custom Essay on Technological Catastrophe: Titanic in 1912 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The ship made its maiden voyage with so many crew and passengers onboard instead of testing the ship first with only crew members on board with security measures provided. The ship also lacked proper sensory technological equipment which could have enabled the ship to detect and avoid icebergs across the Atlantic Ocean.

According to Mileti, (1999), technological disasters are rapidly increasing as compared to natural disaster. The Titanic Ocean liner accident could have been avoided if necessary measures were put in place to avert the situation in case of an accident.

Many technological developments in the modern world are interrelated where invention of one technology advancement is used in other systems. The sinking of the Titanic ship qualifies to be a technological catastrophe as this accident could be avoided.

This can be proved by modern day ships which have used an advancement of technology used in the manufacture of Titanic ship. Ship manufactures introduced a standard distress signal in all ships and sufficient number of lifeboats which lacked in the Titanic ship.

References Burgan, M. (2004). The Titanic. New York: Compass Point Books

Mileti, S., D. (1999). Disasters by design: a reassessment of natural hazards in the United States. New York: National Academies Press

Perrow, C. (1999). Normal accidents: living with high-risk technologies. Princeton: Princeton University Press

[supanova_question]

Michael Porter’s Approaches Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Introduction The concept of strategic management is increasingly being adopted by companies across the globe. As competition intensify, firms look for the most effective management strategies or models in order to improve their competitiveness.

Strategic management can be defined as “a goals-oriented management in which the mission and planned achievements of an organization are clearly set and all management processes are designed and monitored towards reaching the organization’s overall goals” (Joyce and Woods, 2001, p. 12).

It is concerned with the planned and emergent initiatives that mangers take regarding resource allocation and improving the performance of the firm. Such initiatives entail formulating the firm’s mission, vision and objectives as well as formulating policies that help in achieving the objectives.

The performance of a firm is normally assessed using the balanced scorecard model and the results reflect the effectiveness of strategic management. In order to enhance the process of strategic management, Michael Porter developed several analysis tools which can be used by firms to evaluate their competitiveness in an industry.

Such analyses enable firms to make informed decisions in regard to strategic management. This paper focuses on the contributions of Michael Porter in the filed of management.

Michael Porter’s Contributions Michel Porter developed several analysis and management tools which include Porter’s five forces analysis, value chain analysis, competitive advantage theory, strategic group analysis and generic strategies (Joyce and Woods, 2001, p. 21).

These tools are normally applied to specific management functions. The significance of these tools in the process of strategic management can be explained as follows.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Value Chain Analysis

A value chain refers to the various activities that a firm perform in order to produce the end good or service in a given industry. At each stage “value is added to the product” (Sadler and Craig, 2003, p. 47). In order to deliver value to customers, companies must identify the point at which value is created or lost in their processes.

Thus Michel Porter developed a model for analyzing the value chain in order to help in determining where value is created or lost within a firm. The costs and value associated with the activities of the firm determines whether or not products with the best value are produced by the company (Sadler and Craig, 2003, p. 50).

The value chain framework gives managers the opportunity to identify the activities which generate the greatest value and those that create competitive advantages. Similarly, the framework enables managers to identify the activities that create little value for the firm and its customers. Thus the framework enables managers to determine the activities that are important for competitiveness as well as the achievement of the firm’s overall strategy.

The value chain is characterized by two main categories of activities namely, the primary and the secondary activities. Primary activities are those “directly concerned with the production or delivery of products or services” (Sadler and Craig, 2003, p. 53).

They include transportation, production, sales and marketing services. Secondary activities on the other hand enhance the efficiency as well as effectiveness of primary processes. They include developing human resources, procurement, acquisition of infrastructure and improving production technology.

The firm’s strategic goals must be aligned with its value chain (Sadler and Craig, 2003, p. 53). For example, if the company’s goal is to achieve cost efficiency, then it will focus on activities that reduce costs. In the context of management, the value chain enables the management to evaluate the organization’s design. By identifying the activities that add value and those that do not, the management can make decisions on which activities to outsource or terminate and the ones to strengthen.

Competitive Advantage

Competitive advantages refer to the unique attributes that distinguish a company from the rest and improves its competitiveness within an industry. According to Porter, a firm should pursue policies aimed at producing high-quality products which are then sold at high prices (Dess, 2010, p. 67).

We will write a custom Essay on Michael Porter’s Approaches specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Competitive advantage is attained when the firm develops attributes which enable it to outperform its rivals. Thus achieving competitive advantage implies the ability to realize high performance through attributes and resources. In the context of management, achieving competitive advantage involves successful implementation of strategic goals.

Strategic management aimed at improving the competitive advantage of a firm should thus involve activities which enhance access to raw materials, talented personnel and new technologies (Dess, 2010, p. 68). Strategic Group

Strategic group analysis is a strategic management concept used to group together firms with similar strategies or business models within an industry (Dess, 2010, p. 77). The number and characteristics of groups in a given industry is determined by the attributes used to categorize them.

However, companies normally fall into two broad categories namely, direct and indirect competitors. Michael Porter “explained the concept of strategic group in terms of mobility barriers” (Dess, 2010, p. 77). The mobility barriers in this case represent the entry barriers which prevent potential competitors from entering the industry.

The significance of strategic group analysis in management includes the following. It enables the management to identify who their rivals are, their strength within the industry and the strategy behind their competitiveness. Thus the management will be able to formulate policies that enable the firm to comfortably compete with its rivals (Dess, 2010, p. 78).

Strategic group analysis also helps the management to determine the likelihood of firms moving from one strategic group to another. By knowing the characteristics of firms within a given strategic group, the management will be able to identify opportunities which they can take advantage of within the industry.

Finally, it enables the firm to identify strategic problems that it faces. Consequently, it gives the management an opportunity to take timely precautionary measures in order to maintain or improve its competitiveness.

Generic Strategies

The relative position occupied by a firm within an industry determines whether its profitability will be above or below the average profitability levels of the industry. Sustainable competitive advantage is the main determinant of a firm’s ability to realize above average profits in the long-run.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Michael Porter’s Approaches by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The two main competitive advantages that a company can posses include, low cost and differentiation. When these two types of competitive advantages are aligned with activities for which the company intends to realize them; three generic strategies for achieving above average profitability are formed. The three generic strategies include “cost leadership, differentiation and focus strategy” (Sadler and Craig, 2003, p. 63).

A firm pursuing a cost leadership strategy focuses on being the lowest cost producer in the industry it operates in. The sources of cost advantage are influenced by the industry’s structure. The sources include economies of scale, access to superior production technology and access to raw materials.

In order to achieve cost leadership a firm must explore all avenues of realizing cost advantages (Porter, 1996, pp. 61-78). Achieving cost leadership will enable the firm to realize profits which are higher than the industry average as long as its prices are comparable to the average prices in the industry.

A firm pursing the differentiation strategy aims at being unique within its industry. The firm’s uniqueness is normally built along the dimensions that customers highly value such as superior product quality.

In order to achieve this objective, the firm identifies one or more elements that majority of customers perceive as important (Porter, 1996, pp. 61-78). It then aims at meeting those needs by uniquely positioning itself. The company will be able to charge premium prices if it maintains its unique status in the industry.

According to Porter, a firm pursuing the focus strategy usually identifies a particular segment of the market and concentrates in serving it. Thus the firm’s strategy will be tailored towards serving a particular market while excluding others.

Porter’s Five Forces Analysis

Porter developed a framework for analyzing the level of competition in an industry. His framework identifies five forces which determine the level of competition within an industry. The forces include “threat of new entrants, bargaining power of buyers, threat of substitute products, bargaining power of suppliers and threat of competitive rivalry” (Joyce and Woods, 2001, p. 78).

Thus profitability within a given industry is determined by the strongest force. Profitability will be low if these forces are strong. It will however be relatively high if the forces are weak. Since these forces are external to the firm, they create both threats and opportunities to the firm.

Thus analyzing the relative strength of these forces enables a firm to formulate policies that will help it to take advantage of the opportunities associated with the forces and minimize the threats associated with them.

This objective can be achieved as follows. First, the company should position itself “where the forces are weakest” (Porter, 2000, pp. 1-8). Second, the firm should always explore changes in the forces. The forces normally change over time and can create opportunities for the firm.

Finally, the firm should explore the possibility of reshaping the forces in its favor (Porter, 2000, pp. 1-8). This includes efforts to reduce the threat of substitutes, neutralizing suppliers’ power and countering customer power.

Case Study: Fortescure Metals Group Fortescure Metals Group (FMG) is a new entrant in the iron ore mining industry. The Porter’s Five Forces analysis will be used to analyze its competitiveness in the industry.

Competitive Rivalry

The intensity of competition is very high and this can be explained as follows. Even though there are a few competitors, the dominant firms control the greatest share of the market (78%). There are only three competitors in the industry.

However, the two dominant firms, BHP Billiton and Rio Tinto have the largest market share. The industry growth rate is also slow as demand for iron ore dwindles. The fixed costs are very high since mining is labor intensive. This means that the fixed costs are high due to the large number of employees needed in the industry.

Exit costs are very high due to the high sunk costs associated with mining. Since mining involves specialized equipment and infrastructure, exiting the industry will lead to a loss of the money used to acquire such equipment. The high threat of competitive rivalry is likely to limit FMG’s growth in the industry.

Power of the Buyer

The power of the buyer is very high due to the following reasons. The concentration of buyers relative to suppliers is very high. This means that there are few buyers as compared to suppliers. The buyers’ switching costs are low since they can easily change their suppliers of iron ore at low costs.

The suppliers’ (iron miners) products are not differentiated. The iron ore is normally sold to the buyers as a raw material hence its low level of differentiation. Finally, the threat of backward integration is high as most Chinese steel millers (main buyers) invest in direct mining of iron ore. The high power of the buyers means that iron ore miners are price takers.

Thereat of Substitutes

The threat of substitutes is low in the industry. 99% of the iron is used to manufacture steel. However, there is no substitute for iron in the manufacture of steel. The low threat of substitutes means that the incumbents can increase their profits by increasing the supply of iron ore since there are no substitutes (Sadler and Craig, 2003, p. 80).

Threat of New Entrants

The threat of new entrants in the iron ore mining industry is low due to the following reasons. There is low differentiation of products since all miners produce the same raw iron ore. The capital requirement for joining the industry is very high.

This is because mining is capital intensive and requires heavy investment in infrastructure and technology. The switching costs are very high since moving from one mining site or region to another will require significant investment in plant, equipment and infrastructure.

The incumbents in the industry have a great control over the distribution channel by limiting access to their rail systems. The low threat of new entrants means that new companies can not easily join the industry (Sadler and Craig, 2003, p. 79). Thus the incumbents like FMG can maintain their market shares.

Power of the Supplier

The power of the suppliers is low since the iron ore miners obtain their supply of iron on their own. Thus iron miners such as FMG have the advantage of obtaining their iron ore at the lowest price possible by focusing on cost efficiency in their production.

Conclusion Strategic management involves formulating the mission of an organization and formulating policies which facilitate resource allocation in order to realize the mission. This process involves designing and effectively executing the organization’s strategy (Sadler and Craig, 2003, p. 27).

The essence of strategic management is to enhance the competitiveness of the organization. Michael Porter developed several tools that can be used by organizations to evaluate their competitiveness and to develop the best strategies as discussed above. Organizations should utilize the tools effectively to enhance their competitiveness.

References Dess, G. 2010. Strategic Management. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Joyce, P. and Woods, A. 2001. Strategic Management. New York: Kogan Page.

Porter, M. 2000. The Five Competitive Forces that Shape Strategy. Harvard Business Review, 1(1), pp. 1-8.

Porter, M. 1996. What is Strategy? Harvard Business Review, 1(1), pp.61-78.

Sadler, P. and Craig, J. Strategic Management. New York: Kogan Page.

[supanova_question]

How internal and external forces affect organization behavior Report (Assessment) college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

Reference

Introduction The discipline of organization behavior is concerned with discovering and supervising actions of individuals and group in regard to how such people join or remain in groups, how employee can work effectively, and how to make employees become more productive (Schermerhorn, Hunt and Osborn, 2008).

In a business, there are factors that impact the performance of any organization; these factors are events and situations which contact the business in diverse ways. Such factors are referred as environmental factors or driving factors; driving factors can be subdivided into two categories; internal and external driving factors (Schermerhorn et al, 2008).

Discussion Internal and external factors usually affect employee’s behavior. Just to name a few, internal factors may include leadership, organization’s culture and organization structure while external factors may include family issues or business relationship among other factors (Robbins and Judge, 2009).

Leadership has a role in regard to organization’s activities, if employee are entrusted with leadership position in an organization; it will always motivate them to be more productive and this also improves the output in an organization (Robbins and Judge, 2009).

Organization structure is a system that’s governs, brings together and inspires employees to attain the goals of an organization. Organizations structure includes set policies, organization’s expectations and organization’s procedures (Schermerhorn et al, 2008).

If the organization structure is friendly, then it is very easy for employees to become organized and hence perform better. On the other hand, if the organization structure is not friendly to the employees, then employees can not attain their full potential and this affects production of any organization.

The third internal aspect is the factor of corporate culture. Organization’s norm makes up organization culture. Organization’s culture may include; customer services, flexible working hours, friendly working environment and so forth (Robbins and Judge, 2009).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More If an organization culture is attractive, this encourages more customers and employees become productive. However, if the corporate culture is not appealing, the organization might not attract customers or investors, and employees may not maximize their effort.

Alternatively, external driving factors such as family issues can have direct impact to the organizational behavior. For example, if an employee is having a family crisis; this can affect employee’s behavior at workplace and work performance.

Conversely, if an employee is not having family issues, such a situation can also contribute to improved performance of an employee at work. Moreover, business relationship is also another external aspect that can affect organization behavior.

For instance, if an employee is working for a certain organization that has other partnership companies , the situation may affect employee’s performance due to different levels of expectations (Robbins and Judge, 2009). If the partnership companies have high demands, employees will be engaged to meet the business expectations and this will directly affect the organization behavior.

Internal and external factors affect the organization behavior in diverse ways. As such, when employees become affected, the management system in an organization is also affected. Majorly, there at least four chief functions of a management system in an organization and when they are combined in a balanced ratio, an organization becomes successful in areas of planning, organization, controlling and directing (Schermerhorn et al, 2008).

However, a breach of employee’s behavior especially the manager and his staff may adversely contribute to positive or negative performance and hence increase or reduction in organization’s output.

Conclusion In conclusion, it is evident that, internal and external driving factors can impact an organization behavior positively or negatively. Some factors may contribute to increased production while others may contribute to reduced production. The opinion is that, the company management should at least manage internal factors since it is within its control so as to boost employee’s potential.

We will write a custom Assessment on How internal and external forces affect organization behavior specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Reference Schermerhorn, J., Hunt, J.,

[supanova_question]

Economic policies matters of the Crisis of 1970s Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Rational Expectation Approach verses Modigliani’s Approach

Neoclassical-Keynesian verses Rational Expectation Approach

Neoclassical-Keynesians verses Monetarist

The Differences between Rational expectation approach Monetarist

Works Cited

Introduction A capitalist economy system is comparable to a multifaceted machine that entails numerous capitalists firms and individuals, all making uncoordinated decisions in the economy.

The many devices of this machine do not mechanically fit together. For example, when individuals resort to save a portion of their income, it does not imply that they will find people to borrow and invest it.

The decisions made by individuals in the capitalist economy thus rely on the institutional framework in which they operate. If the institutional framework fail, the devises of the machine do not mesh, resulting in an economic crisis, as one witnessed in the 1970s (Reuss 1).

Some economists in the U.S. have referred to this phenomenon as a social structure of accumulation, where capital accumulation is seen as a process where individuals and capitalist companies reinvest their profits to enlarge their operations in the economy.

If these economic agents (individuals and firms) fail to reinvest, factories will close down, resulting to massive unemployment. This phenomenon is what we call economic crisis (Reuss 2).

During the 1970 crisis, the United States’ economy experienced declining productivity, high energy prices, rising international competition and a high unemployment and inflation rates.

Between 1973 and 1974, the price of fuel increased four-fold, resulting to high energy costs for both businesses and consumers. The annual rate of inflation rose to over 9.9% in 1974 while the annual unemployment rate was over 8.1% in 1975 (Reuss 12).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The economy appeared to be ensnared in stagflation, a phenomenon that is characterized by an amalgamation of low economic growth and soaring unemployment rates, coupled with high rates of inflation (Reuss 13).

The economic downturn of the 1970s added to momentous changes in the institutional structures of the U.S. economic system. During the early stages of the crisis, the government implemented several expansionary fiscal policies to regulate economic activities.

Labour unions were also active during this period. Later on, the economic crisis ushered in the neoliberal capitalism era that was characterized by weakened roles of the government and labour unions (Reuss 3).

The Neoclassical (mainstream) economists often posit that if a capitalist economy is run on the precepts of static universal principles and that any infringement on the principles of the market- expansionary fiscal policies, labour union roles, industrial policies and government macroeconomic interventions- certainly implies disaster.

However, the performance of the United States’ economy from 1940s to mid 1970s, a period called the ‘Golden Age’ contradicts this premise (Reuss 5).

Historical data suggests that the U.S. economic performance was superior during the Golden Age when compared to other periods. Between early 1940 to mid 1970s, the annual economic growth was approximately 3.9%.

The annual inflation rate was less than 1.9% for nearly half of the Golden age epoch and only exceeded the 5.9% mark while unemployment rate was about 5.8%. Moreover, the real pay per hour in many industrial companies was added to up to an average rate of 2.1% per annum.

We will write a custom Essay on Economic policies matters of the Crisis of 1970s specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The economic crisis of 1970s emphasized the need for fiscal policies to stabilize the economy, alleviate recessions and sustain full employment. For example, the U.S. government expenditure on consumption and investments was about 22% of Gross Domestic Product (GDP) in 1970s compared to previous periods (less than 20%).

A number of key business sectors, such as communications, transportation, and banking and insurance were extremely regulated. Furthermore, the unionization rate rose to over 34.9% of the labour force and stabilized at 25.2% in the 1970s (Reuss 6).

Rational Expectation Approach verses Modigliani’s Approach Franco Modigliani was one of the principal inventors of the neoclassical synthesis between the orthodox theory of value and the Keynesian’s principle of effective demand that dominated macroeconomic thoughts until the 1970s (Mongiovi 1).

Many of his works reflected a distinctive sensitivity to the complexities of striking a balance between the roles of the state as an instrument of progressive reform and its capability for repression.

The Modigliani approach for instance queried the conventional proposals concerning the impact of technological change on employment His approach rejected the argument that workers dislodged by technological changes in the economy would be re-employed immediately due to subsequent wage reduction and the growth of the investment goods sector (Mongiovi 3).

Modigliani criticized the problems of capital deficiency that were overlooked in the standard discourses. He also censured the prospect of destructive recursive effects of the rationality theory of wage reductions on employment and aggregate demand (Mongiovi 4).

As a remedial measure, his approach advocated for the theory of marginal productivity that would allow a partial substitution between labour and capital, resulting to the closest approximation to fiscal reality that is possible on the basis of rational expectation theory of a market economy (Mongiovi 4).

On the contrary, the Rational Expectations Model proposes that economic agents employ the best possible economic theory to predict unemployment levels, price and wages.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Economic policies matters of the Crisis of 1970s by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Market prices are expected to have all pertinent information needed to forecast and to make decisions. Each economic agent has his own forecast, which may differ from the actual prices. However, forecasted prices and wages will be spread around the actual prices and wages (Bortis 2).

A significant facet of the Rational Expectations Model and the neoclassical model is that savings are invested. The market for new capital stocks creates equilibrium between savings and investment at full employment level via variation of the interest rate.

The Walrasian model undeniably mirrors an absolutely self-governing economy, suggesting that there exists a strong inclination towards equilibrium. Employment and output are usually given at full employment levels such that a natural rate of unemployment- structural and voluntary-exists.

Equilibrium is thus achieved through a market that functions efficiently. On the macroeconomic echelon, the demand curve depends on the real balance effect while the supply curve mirrors scarcity of resources.

With a given amount of money, the macroeconomic demand rises when prices decline in the event of excess supply and vice versa. The Rational Expectation Approach is thus based on the assumption that a competitive market economy is constantly in equilibrium (Bortis 2).

Neoclassical-Keynesian verses Rational Expectation Approach One of the major developments in economic theory during the economic crisis in 1970s was the emergence of the rational expectations approach to macroeconomic analysis.

This theory is based on two fundamental premises: expectations are formed rationally; and that total supply is inelastic to the anticipated changes in the aggregate price level. The second hypothesis, postulates that a shift in total demand will influence output only and that the ensuing price levels diverges from the expected price.

The implication of the rational expectations theory is that fiscal and monetary policies cannot methodically stimulate expectation errors by the producers (McCallum 418).

Therefore, on the basis of the second hypothesis, authorities are unable to design monetary and fiscal policies that can systematically influence unemployment and output rates.

As a matter of fact, authorities can neither sustain high output permanently nor decrease the magnitude of output fluctuations around capacity levels. Although a rare output inflation trade-off exists due to unanticipated shocks, authorities cannot utilize this trade-off in any constructive manner (McCallum 419).

In spite of the logical rigour and elegance of the Rational Expectations Approach, the Neoclassical-Keynesian school has generally rejected its policy implications.

One of the key reasons relates to the prevalent belief that the pace of price-level changes needed in the rational expectations approach is much greater than one witnessed in real economies. A significant outline of this disapproval focuses on the market-clearing facet of the rational expectations approach.

For example, in the Sargent Wallace model, prices are assumed to be absolutely flexible such that aggregate demand and supply are adjusted to maintain equilibrium in each period.

However, according to Neoclassical-Keynesian theory, prices adjustment is too slow to create equilibrium between demand and supply in each period (McCallum 419). However, some critics (neoclassical-Keynesian school) argue that the assumptions of the rationality approach are highly credible.

The critics of the rationality approach point to the assumption that endows the private economic agents with perfect information about the monetary authority’s policy decisions and the economic structures. However, this account is not necessary to give way to the conclusion that monetary policy cannot be used as a

stabilizing instrument. It is reasonable to make an assumption that expectations are created so that there is no systematic connection between the economic agent’s (firms and individual households) expectations errors and the information required by the authorities to be used to control the money stock (McCallum 432).

Neoclassical-Keynesians verses Monetarist According to Modigliani, there are no apparent differences between the Neoclassical-Keynesians and Monetarists on fundamental macroeconomic issues.

The Neo-Keynesian paradigm is quite consistent with key revolutionary macroeconomics theories developed in the past decades. A number of the main tenets of neoclassical-Keynesian school include: first, inelasticity of prices is a major impediment the major function of monetary policy.

It also brings about the short run non-neutrality of money. Given that some prices are partially elastic, inflationary pressure stimulates relative price changes that have impact on welfare; second, the abrasions that exist in relatively profound monetary economies are second in the order of merit (Williamson

[supanova_question]

Problems associated with large amounts of household waste. Essay writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Problems associated with large amount of household waste

Solutions to reduce large household waste problems

Conclusion

Reference List

Introduction Household waste products lie in the category of the non-hazardous waste, which includes food products, product containers, fruit peels, wrapping papers, plastic shopping bags, and other wastes that can be recycled.

The term non-hazardous refers to the household wastes that do not meet certain set measures and levels of causing harm to the environment, health and life in the surroundings.

However, these household wastes have negative effects on the environment, health, and cause negative impacts to any living organisms in the surrounding.

Since these organic wastes will nevertheless, decay and decompose, the decomposing mass becomes good breeding grounds for most bacteria and fungi, which poses a serious health threat to human life. Environmentally, rotting food products changes the ecosystem by affecting the eating habits of the surrounding animals.

Problems associated with large amount of household waste Large amounts of household wastes pose major problems especially when they have accumulated to high levels and the systems of waste management are poor.

The type of waste disposal adapted for the household waste disposal determines whether the problems occurring from the accumulation of the waste continues or not. According to Lewis, “…poorly designed or poorly managed landfills create a number of adverse environmental impacts including windblown litter and attraction of vermin” (2007, p.36).

This problem is mainly experienced in the urban settings especially in developing countries where plastic shopping bags and wrapping papers are highly used.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Winds blowing normally carry the light papers from the dump pits and litter the surrounding. On the other hand, the attraction of vermin such as mice and rats becomes evident in the dumpsites from where they get food and shelter consequently becoming their breeding grounds.

With organic wastes especially from the kitchen, decaying is inevitable and the decay results from anaerobic breakdown of the organic waste releasing methane and carbon dioxide.

Knox observes that, “…common by-product of landfills is a gas composed of methane and carbon dioxide produced by organic waste break down an aerobically” (2005, p.112).

These gases cause a major odour problem, air pollution, health problems and can destroy surface vegetation. Health wise, these gases cause respiratory problems, which are expensive to treat.

Large amounts of garbage also cause damage to the infrastructure especially roads in areas where heavy trucks are used to collect and transport the waste to the dumpsites.

According to, Vesiland and Worrell, “fatal accidents and infrastructure damage on the access roads leading to the landfill are common in developing countries” (2002, p.234).

The fatal accidents here involve scavengers buried in the waste piles. Damage to these infrastructures together with the landfill operations poses environmental noise pollution to both animals and human beings living in the surroundings. Moreover, due to the decay and decomposition of the organic waste in these landfills there is a problem of contamination of the underground water and aquifer through leeching.

We will write a custom Essay on Problems associated with large amounts of household waste. specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Even though landfill remains the most common and affordable household waste disposal method, it has adverse health implications. Watts observes that, “decaying organic waste harbours bacteria and fungi and other disease causing vectors, e.g. rat, flies and cockroaches…” (1998, p.345).

For people living close to these dumpsites, they frequently suffer from diseases such as cholera due to contamination of both water and food by dirt from the rotting garbage.

Burning of plastics in the dump sites also contribute to health problems in that, smoke causes respiratory problems especially to small children.

Large household waste being a major problem in most developing countries on both the environment and health of the people, proper waste management policies and mitigation procedures have been set in place to curb these problems.

Solutions to reduce large household waste problems Effective household waste management will involve reducing the amount of waste generated in a single house, reusing the reusable materials and recycling. As Karlberg and Norin say, “…the 3R’s, Reduce, Reuse and Recycle refers to waste hierarchy as a strategy in waste minimization” (1999 p.567).

The application of these 3R’s strategy can minimize the amount of waste by half, which on the other hand would reduce the problems significantly. Reusing shopping bags instead of buying new ones every time one goes shopping, item repairing other than buying new ones, and removing food and liquid remaining in cans, are some of the ways to reduce to minimum levels household wastes.

Application of penalties also applies in waste management and as LaGrega and Buckingham puts it, “the polluter pays principle is a principle where the polluting party pays for the impact caused in the environment” (2001, p.69).

Instead of generating waste disposed on the environment to cause problems, every household pays fees equivalent to the waste generated, which caters for proper and descent disposal of that waste. In this case, the fees levied on this waste help to regulate the amount of waste generated per household because the higher the waste the higher the fees.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Problems associated with large amounts of household waste. by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Educational awareness of the waste implication on the environment and the intensive campaign on environmental conservation and proper waste disposal have also helped largely to reduce on garbage generation and consequently reduced the problems caused by large household waste accumulation.

Conclusion Large household wastes involve wastes from the kitchen in most cases package in plastic bags. Accumulation of these waste pose a series of problems to the environment, health, and life of many living organisms in the affected areas.

To the environment, the wastes cause pollution of the air due to emission of gases such as methane, causes pollution of the soil and contamination of the underground water coupled with noise pollution especially the operations in the dumpsites.

Moreover, decomposition of the organic waste generates greenhouse gases like methane, which cause respiratory problems when inhaled on top of being a contributor of global warming. Moreover, dumpsites harbour bacteria and fungi, which cause diseases. Minimizing these problems involves the application of the 3R’s principle, which advocates for reducing garbage generation, reuse and recycling.

Reference List Karlberg, T.,

[supanova_question]

The Importance of Evaluating Human Resource Management Essay essay help free

Table of Contents The Importance of Evaluating Human Resource Management

Managing Occupational Health and Safety

Work Designs

Performance Management

References

The Importance of Evaluating Human Resource Management The effectiveness of human resource management (HRM) needs to be evaluated due to the following reasons. First, it helps the organization to determine if its HRM practices are credible (Gibbs, 2010, pp. 58-75).

This is achieved through internal and external evaluations on the HRM practices. While the internal evaluation concentrates on the costs and benefits of HRM, external evaluation concentrates on the overall contribution of the HRM to an organization.

Second, the effectiveness of HRM is evaluated to enhance the performance of the business (Gibbs, 2010, pp. 58-75). It helps the firm to adjust its human resources accordingly in order to increase its profits, market share and quality of products. Finally, the evaluation helps the firm to ensure that its employees’ skills meet the requirements of the organization (Gibbs, 2010, pp. 58-75).

The effectiveness of HRM is measured by the following criteria. First, the evaluation should measure employees’ commitment. In this case the evaluation will seek to determine the degree to which organizational policies facilitate employees’ commitment to the firm (Mclean, 2006, pp. 143-156).

Second, the competency levels should be measured. Competency measures the ability of HRM policies to attract and retain talented employees. Third, the cost effectiveness of the HRM system should be considered.

This measures the “fiscal proficiency of HRM policies in terms of wages, benefits, turnover and absenteeism” (Mclean, 2006, pp. 143-156). Finally, the evaluation should measure congruence.

This means that the evaluation should analyze the ability of HRM policies to promote and maintain cooperation both within and without the organization (Mclean, 2006, pp. 143-156). The assessment process should also evaluate the efficiency of the HRM system in terms of its ability to reduce the time needed for a give task. The HRM system is considered effective it satisfies these criterions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Managing Occupational Health and Safety Managing occupational health is one of the responsibilities of the human resources department and it focuses on protecting the welfare of the employees and their families.

Most organizations focus on occupational health and safety management since it is a legal requirement (Robson, Clarke and Cullen, 2007, pp. 329-353). The labor laws require all employers to provide a safe and secure work environment.

Failure to observe this requirement can lead to sever consequences such as cancelation of licenses. Organizations also focus on occupational health and safety management in order to prevent injuries or loss of life at the workplace (Robson, Clarke and Cullen, 2007, pp. 329-353).

Even though occupational health and safety management involves a lot of costs, it is associated with the following benefits. It helps companies to avoid losses attributed to injuries at the workplace (Dellve, Skagert and Eklof, 2009, pp. 965-970).

Such injuries can lead to expensive law suites and compensations for damages if the court rules in favor of the injured employee. Research indicates that the physical wellbeing of employees has a direct impact on their productivity (Dellve, Skagert and Eklof, 2009, pp. 965-970).

This means that healthy employees will perform better as compared to those with poor health conditions. Occupational health and safety management practices such as behavior change programs help in improving employees’ health.

This translates into high productivity by preventing reduction in productivity due to cases of sicknesses (Dellve, Skagert and Eklof, 2009, pp. 965-970).

We will write a custom Essay on The Importance of Evaluating Human Resource Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Besides, the employees will be highly motivated if their health and safety is guaranteed at the workplace. For example, workers in a chemical plant will be motivated to work if they are protected from the side effects of the chemicals they manufacture. Protecting the health and safety of workers also helps in improving the image of the firm.

Work Designs Apart from managing occupational health and safety, the human resources department is also responsible for designing work for employees. Work design involves “dividing the roles and responsibilities among the employees or members of various groups in an organization” (Robertson, 2000, pp. 121-146).

Over the last two decades, the process of work design has tremendously changed in response to changes in the roles of human resources department, organizational needs and the business environment.

Job evaluation for instance has become an integral part of work design. It has become the basis for determining pay grades, responsibilities and even working conditions (Robertson, 2000, pp. 121-146).

The roles of the stakeholders in work design have also changed significantly. The managers have since increased their participation in the work design process since they are the main users of the information resulting from the process (Robertson, 2000, pp. 121-146). The role of the human resources officers has changed from dictating what should be done to giving guidance on how to embrace best practice.

The process of designing work in future will be influenced by the following factors or challanges. First, technological advancements will change the methods of production or service provision and this will impact on the roles of employees (Lewig, Xanthopoulou and Bakker, 2007, pp. 429-445).

Thus the challenge in work design will be how to avoid duplication of roles, prevent competition between machines and employees as well as utilizing the full potential of employees. Second, globalization presents the challenge of meeting international standards in work design (Lewig, Xanthopoulou and Bakker, 2007, pp. 429-445).

As globalization increases, firms will need flexible and internationally accepted work designs. Finally, economic factors such as high competition will lead to more mergers and takeovers. Thus the human resources department will face the challenge of designing work that takes into account the skills of employees from diverse backgrounds.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Importance of Evaluating Human Resource Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Performance Management It is the responsibility of the human resources department to manage the performance of employees in order to enhance high productivity.

Performance management is linked to other functions of human resources management and this can be explained as follows. To begin with, performance management is linked to the process of employee recruitment (Nankerris and Stanton, 2010, pp. 136-151).

Based on the performance of existing employees and the needs of the organization, the human resources department will be able to identify and hire the right employees.

Performance evaluation being part of performance management helps in developing the goals and objectives of staff training and development (Nankerris and Stanton, 2010, pp. 136-151).

This is because it helps in identifying the training needs of the employees. It also helps in developing motivational and reward strategies. Performance management can help in assessing the effect of various reward strategies.

Managing the performance of employees is always characterized by the following challenges. Most organizations lack talented employees with sufficient knowledge of labor laws (Mitlacher, 2006, pp. 67-81).

Such organizations are not able to conduct performance management in line with the legal framework. Some human resources officers also lack essential performance management skills especially in performance appraisals (Mitlacher, 2006, pp. 67-81).

Most systems used in performance appraisals are less effective since they do not capture all aspects of the employees’ performance (Mitlacher, 2006, pp. 67-81).

This undermines the integrity of performance management. Effective performance management is also adversely affected by lack of resources to support it which leads to poor outcomes.

References Dellve, L., Skagert, K. and Eklof, M. 2009. The impact of systematic occupational health and safety management for occupational disorders and long-term work attendance. Social Science and Medicine. 67(6), pp. 965-970.

Gibbs, S. 2010. Evaluating HRM effectiveness: the stereotype connection. Employee Relations. 22(1), pp. 58-75.

Lewig, K., Xanthopoulou, D. and Bakker, A. 2007. Burnout and connectedness among Australian volunteers: a test of the job demands. Journal of Vocational Behavior. 71(3), pp. 429-445.

Mclean, M. 2006. Evaluating the importance and performance of the human resources function: an examinations of a medium sized Scottish retailer. Journal of Retailing and Consumer Services. 13(2), pp. 143-156.

Mitlacher, L. 2006. The organization of human resource management in temporary work agencies. Human Resource Management Review. 16(1), pp. 67-81.

Nankerris, A. and Stanton, P. 2010. Managing employee performance in small organizations: challenges and opportunities. International Journal of Human Resource Development and Management. 10(2), pp. 136-151.

Robertson, T. 2000. Building bridges: negotiating the gap between work practice and technology design. International Journal of Human-Computer studies. 53(1), pp. 121-146.

Robson, L., Clarke, J. and Cullen, K. 2007. The effectiveness of occupational health and safety management system interventions: a systematic review. Safety Science. 45(3), pp.329-353.

[supanova_question]

Visual Art: Ownership and Copyright Essay best essay help: best essay help

Art has been there since history. In the past, it was preserved as sacred but physical and could only be made by painting. Later on, it became social and could describe one’s class and was mostly meant for the rich.

Today, visual art has become easy to make, available and cheaper because of the invention of a camera. This has raised the issue of ownership and copyright.

Education level has been seen to have an influence on the people interested in arts. Advancement in education has an effect of increasing arts interest. Perception of an idea from an image may differ from one person to another as well as from time to time.

What people see is determined by what they believe in. Eyes are a powerful instrument of a human being. Sight is incomparable to anything else and it is a unique gift from God. Their complexity allows them to do what nothing else can do.

Eyes have no limit and never get tired of seeing. Image is therefore quicker to communicate than words. In the past images were only made of non-existent things. Later on the idea of image changed to existing things.

After this, an image could be explained and expressed by how another person had seen it. This has been the development in art and design. Images therefore form a great part of communication.

Creativity of an artist enables him to communicate a lot on his imagination. People’s perception on an image is affected by several factors that the viewers know and think about art. This includes the magnificence, the reality, and development of the viewers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Past knowledge helps us to improve creativity in the present. That is why history is always related to the present. Present art and design will help the future generation to have easier work while studying their history.

Hals was the earliest painter who specialized in portraits expressing people’s characters which came as a result of capitalism. Hals lived as a very poor man who was always in debts.

He benefited from charity. The criticism of his paintings was that he did so with sullenness but the author of his publications disagreed by saying that his work was excellently creative and the appearance of a painting could not judge one’s mood at the time of painting.

The rhythm and the harmony of art work contribute greatly to the supremacy of an image. Qualities such harmony, brightness and contrast can bring out an idea so clearly if used appropriately.

Hal’s paintings of his sisters could lead one to conclude about their characters. Why? Because from the facial expressions one could relate them to how he saw people behave while in different situations e.g., happy or sad.

The suggestions of the author on Hal’s paintings went further explaining that the people at that time had a fashion of wearing hats. The paintings could have many conclusions from one image as one idea leads to another.

The perception of the past is different from what we see today. Invention of a camera changed people’s thoughts. The images became subject to time and space. The cubists also came with the idea of describing an image from all views taken around it.

We will write a custom Essay on Visual Art: Ownership and Copyright specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The camera’s uniqueness was that the image was transferable to many places. Television views became available to millions of people around the world who could watch one image.

Each person or family received it and interpreted it in a different way. This was not the case for paintings. Paintings were unique in that they were only found at one place with no other copy completely similar to them.

The present view of originality of images is perhaps led by the issue of its scarcity. Paintings can be changed to the painter’s interest while a film is accurate with succession.

Paintings, however, cannot have a succession of events and most information is not usually included. Words included in a picture determine how a person interprets and bring out an argument.

The national gallery was believed to have original paintings. Virgins of Rocks by Leonardo da Vinci were one of the famous paintings in the gallery. The greatest sales of Leonard’s cartoon were made because of their fame which came as a result of one American who wanted to buy them for two and a half million pounds.

Art is an interesting subject to all age groups. People hang and pin paintings, letters, and snapshots has a way of appreciating art. Art gives the artist room and freedom of creativity.

[supanova_question]

What are the implications of multiple roles for women and men? Essay cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

Work Cited

Introduction Research is an integral element in any science subject where psychology is part. It entails an array of activities which must be carried out adeptly for it to be a success.

However, since its inception, gender bias has been a contentious issue as science and research are considered to be innately associated with maleness. Gender bias in research and science is associated with various implications that affect women more as compared with men.

Discussion Gender bias in research arose from the perception that science grew from activities of man. As a result, this perception is associated with the continued gender bias in the contemporary world.

Harvard president Lawrence summers indicated that women, as opposed to men are less capable of being scientists and Steinke

[supanova_question]

Australian open policy towards North Korea Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Introduction The policy previously adopted by Australia towards North Korea (Democratic People’s Republic of Korea or DPRK) has more or less been the same one the US has in place (McCormack 39-50).

The results aimed at convincing the DPRK to adopt the trends the rest of the world adheres to, have not been forthcoming. The Koreas (both North and South) have been in existence as separate states since 1948.

The conflict that sparked between the two nations arising from ideological confrontation and manifest as the civil war has continued, even up to this day, to influence inter-Korean politics.

Whereas the South is seen as being a more democratic state, hence liberal, the north is projected as being communistic and therefore more closed.

Australia has been actively involved in the politics on the Korean Peninsula and has cultivated a very close relationship between it and South Korea and even fought on its side during the Korean War that occurred between 1950 to1953.

Today, South Korea is the third largest trading partner with Australia. On the contrary, Australia and the DPRK have had a very odd relationship. In 1947, when the UN formed a temporary commission for Korea that oversaw the successful creation of the two states, Australia was actively involved. Relationships were cozy for the two countries around mid-1970s but eventually broke off.

There was another brief stint of cooperation in 2000, however, the nuclear crisis took place and relationships continued to sour, further strained by a drug-smuggling incident in Victoria.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Australia continues to have formal diplomatic relationships with the DPRK, albeit very minimal, evidenced when it refused to open its embassy in Pyongyang and opted to having its ambassador to China double up as the North Korean envoy.

The DPRK is associated with its insistence on having a nuclear program that manufactures weapons which is against the treaties and agreements contained in the UN charter.

Due to this reason therefore, the country is continually in strained relationships with many other nation around the world. Australia in particular has had numerous trade barriers imposed on it that have halted trade and denied the countries the benefits that accrue from it. Trade has been at a minimum however with Australia ranking the DPRK at number 125 among its trade partners.

In this debate, we are going to discuss how the relationship between the two countries can be beneficial to both of them and also analyze what negative impacts arise from this open policy that Australia has adopted towards the DPRK.

In order to do this, we are going to analyze the cultural gains and losses expected from this relationship and also analyze the political and economic implications associated with an alliance between them.

What influence will cultural interchange between Australia and DPRK have? The two countries are richly endowed with diverse cultures and would greatly benefit from an interchange of these cultures. For other countries to understand the DPRK, there must be a complete shift in policy that dictates their relationships.

The DPRK has one of the most unique systems of government in the world and its role in influencing the rest of the world cannot be overlooked.

We will write a custom Essay on Australian open policy towards North Korea specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There are a number of pros and cons that are associated with this cultural exchange that will reflect on both the political and economic systems of these countries.

Pros

Both countries will gain knowledge about their different cultures and can learn from the positive ones

As a result, there will be increased trade between the two countries dealing with the exchange of cultural artifacts and related materials

Korea will gain since its citizens will acquire Australian visas and can be exposed to conditions outside their own country

Australia will gain in that it will exercise a greater impetus over the DPRK in a bid to improving its image

Both countries will have to learn the each other’s language and with it their attitudes, beliefs and morals. These will assist in building a trust between them and creating an interchange which will involve the movement of people from either country in a bid to being exposed to the other’s culture firsthand.

There is a lot of good that can come from this and if this exchange is cultivated, it will tighten the relationships, placing the countries in a better position to further their interests with each other.

With increased cultural exchange comes the movement of those aspects that define culture and make it unique. For starters, movement of teachers of either language into the other country will be accompanied by the movement of teaching aides and books which will increase the trade between the two.

There is also the fact that increased cultural exchange will lead to holding of cultural events that may include exhibitions (Brain 354) and other joint initiatives thus increasing trade.

Magazines, newspapers, fashion and other arts that compose culture will also be interchanged. This will cause the growth of associated industries and increases trade in them.

North Koreans have over time been more or less stationed in their own country; as there have been numerous travel advisories against them. The political landscape of the world has secluded the DPRK, straining its development as it does not relate to the rest of the world hence does not learn from it.

However, the open policy developed by Australia opens a new avenue for Koreans to be exposed to a world outside of their own and can thus further their knowledge and in turn their ambitions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Australian open policy towards North Korea by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More For Australia opening its policy towards the DPRK, it will exercise more power resulting from the trust they build. The exchange of culture would mean a building of a stronger relationship based on mutual understanding of each others background.

This kind of mutual understanding has a greater chance of finding a long lasting solution to the crisis in the DPRK as it would have been solved out of trust and from the perspective of the DPRK. Understanding the north would also go a long way in persuading it to soften its stand on the south and attempt to make amends.

This new policy, adopted by Australia could have a better chance of success where the rest of the world has failed, putting Australia in a better position in the world and becoming a better trade partner with the DPRK; which has large untapped resources resulting from its seclusion.

Cons

Inter cultural exchange can have some negative effects on both countries and it is paramount to understand the implications of these effects in order to be extensively involved while having all the facts at hand.

Interchange of culture will mean the inevitable influence of a culture over the other which may involve the influence by more negative aspects of culture

Australians are at threat of being isolated by the rest of the world if seen to be supporting what has constantly been opposed

Earlier, we discussed why both these countries have had an on and off relationship. One of the reasons was because there was a drug trafficking case in Victoria that involved the DPRK.

There have been numerous accusations brought against it by its opponents, that there are gross human rights abuses in the DPRK and a whole hoard of other negative trends. If the allegations were true, it would mean that drugs are readily available in the DPRK which would thus open a supply source for those people looking to profit from drugs in Australia. All the negative aspects of the Korean culture would ultimately find themselves engrained in the Australian culture.

Australian culture also greatly resembles that which is called the western culture. This culture is liberal and it gives the individual great autonomy to exercise his rights.

It is a capitalistic culture and considered inappropriate in most of the other closed cultures. The DPRK being a communist country is composed of a culture that is more controlled along the doctrines of communism.

There is therefore going to be a crisis if the cultural interchange is successful. It will mean that the negative aspects of a capitalistic culture will find themselves engrained into that of a communistic culture which could be a major source of confrontation.

With the continued development and testing of nuclear weapons, the DPRK remains a threat to the stability of the world. The United Nations has already expressed its opposition to the DPRK’s continued insistence on having a nuclear program specifically aimed at manufacturing weapons.

A problem arises since the weapons could find themselves into Australia which is a gateway of the rest of the world. Continued relations with the DPRK could be detrimental to the relationships Australia enjoys with the rest of the world.

What are the ramifications of improved political involvements between the DPRK and Australia? In the past, Australian policy towards the DPRK has been more of what America’s policy was. However, Australia has always had an interest in improving the relationships as was evident in the numerous number of attempts made.

Every time the government of Australia seemed to be taking a step towards the improvement of relations with the DPRK, American policy would be seen to step in and thwart the effort.

The Australian policy has been three fold. First, there is the tendency to have warm relations with America, believing this to be in its best interest.

Second, is the internationalism ideal which considers the ideals brought forth by the international organizations and third is a more liberal policy that advocates for close relations with Asia, their closest neighbours in an attempt to forming an Asia-Pacific alliance.

A close political alliance could have numerous opportunities associated with it as well as threats. It is therefore in the best interests of both countries to be aware of these factors in order to avoid a crisis.

Opportunities

Improved infrastructure and systems in North Korea with help from Australia

A chance of peace between the north and south assisted by Australia’s presence

Increased trade between the countries

A chance at forming a beneficial union

The DPRK is impoverished. Their industries have been hard hit in the past years due to floods. The worst affected was the agricultural sector where most crops were washed away and land considered uncultivable.

This projects a very desperate picture for the DPRK as its continued isolation does not attract food aid from other countries. In order to deal with the recurring threat by natural disasters, Australia’s open policy towards it will open a political association that will make it possible for the DPRK to receive the assistance it needs.

The relationship stems from a mutual understanding as Australia is itself prone to natural disasters especially fires. Therefore, in a bid at helping the DPRK, Australia may find a solution for its own problems.

A political understanding between Australia and the DPRK would go a long way at attempting to review the crisis between it and the ROK (Republic Of Korea) and making recommendations.

This attempt would be founded on the mutual understanding that in order for Australia to actively and continuously help at rebuilding the DPRK, then the DPRK has to also offer something to Australia in return and this may manifest itself as peace or abandonment of the controversial nuclear program.

This political power that Australia may have over the DPRK will largely be assisted by the cultural exchanges and can not succeed on its own as is evidenced by past failed attempts.

Political alliances usually entail the discussions about interests that countries may harbour in others. The DPRK is aiming at opening up its mines which have great potential and have largely been underutilized due to its isolation.

Australia, which has numerous resources, could benefit enormously from investing in these mines and also in other industries in the country. Australia would also be in a position to increase its exports especially chemicals to the DPRK which are used in its manufacturing industry. Trade in chemicals is already ongoing, however, at a very minimal level.

Already, there are talks between South Korea and Australia about the formation of a free trade area. This would open up markets for each other and presents a very good avenue for increased trade without any tariffs in place. The DPRK would also benefit if it joined this arrangement. It would be a first stage towards regional integration leading to the formation of a larger more sustainable union like the European Union.

Threats

There are a number of threats that may be accompanied by the political relationship between Australia and the DPRK.

Strained relations with the US

Increased crime

Increased number of refugees

The US has for a long time considered the DPRK, Iran and Iraq “as an axis of evil” (Petrov 10). This strong sentiment advanced by President George W. Bush has not been dispelled until today (Mazarr 3) and seems to form the basis of American policy towards these three countries.

Already, there was military action in Iraq that was largely sponsored by the US and this has since been largely condemned by Australians and majority of other nations worldwide.

Continued political relations between the DPRK and Australia may be seen as anti-American hence straining relations (Ayson andTaylor 263-279).

There a number of negative attributes associated with countries that have a large population of poor people in it. Crimes and drug abuse seem as some of the most common and improved relations between the DPRK and Australia could open up an avenue for criminals and drug dealers to cross into either country with negative effects.

The dire living conditions in the DPRK have continued to strain the lives of a large number of its population. If the political environment between the two countries was to improve, the boundaries between both countries will be open to each other and this may cause a massive number of North Koreans migrating into Australia in a bid to searching for better living conditions and jobs.

This may, in the long run, affect the stability of both countries and put a strain on the economy of Australia.

Conclusion For there to be true development in the world, as we look forward to being a global village, all nations must move in one general direction. Australia has the biggest stake in the development and integration of the DPRK into the global village. Obviously, it also has more to gain economically, politically and socially in its relationship with the DPRK.

A lot is pegged on the opening up of diplomatic ties between the two countries boosted by the adoption of an open policy by Australia towards the DPRK.

The continued crisis between the DPRK and the ROK could be solved if the relationship blossomed. The continued isolation of the DPRK could also be addressed if Australia was to successfully convince it to abandon the nuclear program that has been the major reason for the isolation.

In this discussion, its is possible to conclude that this open policy could have both negative and positive outcomes, obviously, the good traits outweigh the bad and the policy should be lauded as it promises to intervene in one of the world’s longest tussles. If the DPRK was to change to a better global citizen, the winners would not only be the Australians but the world in general.

Works Cited Ayson, Robert and Taylor, Brendan, ‘Attacking North Korea: Why War Might be Preferred’, Comparative Strategy, 23 (2004): 263-279.

Brain, Steven. “Peaks and Troughs: Australian-DPRK Relations in the 21st Century”, Korea Observer, Vol.38, No.2 (2007): 354.

Mazarr, Michael. The long Road to Pyongyang. Foreign affairs vol.86, no.5 (2007)- (2008) 29 April, 2011from

McCormack, Gavan. Cold War Hot War. An Australian Perspective on the Korean War. Sydney: Hale

[supanova_question]

Juvenile Delinquency, Treatment, and Interventions Essay essay help: essay help

Juvenile delinquency is a societal problem since it threatens many families and communities in general. Due to the recent trends, there is a need to develop intervention for both the youth and their families.

There are so many causes of delinquency behaviors. It is only after assessing them, that preventive measures can be attained and subsequently, reduction of the already scarily trend which is in existence today.

Family factors are particularly the most important factors that can be helpful in creating intervention for youths. To start with, even some of the individual factors that cause incidences of delinquency behaviors are primarily caused by family problems that are in existence.

Abuses by the parent are the main causes of aggression that exists with the children and in turn, what promotes them to engage in delinquency behaviors. It is usually the failures of the families to instill good morals, which are likely to cause the children to engage in violent activities (Siegel, 2008).

A good relationship between the child and the parent can go a long way in avoiding such incidences as children get to share with their parents what they may be troubled about in their lives. The performance of the child in school is one of the individual factors that are likely to cause the child to get involved in violent behaviors.

This can easily be solved especially when the family is committed since they can even hire a tutor that would help out the child in his/her studies. Children develop aggression qualities from the lack of involvement of the parents in their lives; this is one of the individual factors that are most likely to cause the child to be involved in violent behavior (Rouček, 1970).

A commitment by the parents where they are always in knowledge of the activities that children are involved in, would be a quality solution in ensuring that children are not violent. It is also notable that family may seek help for the child, if they find the child with an urge to get involved in violent behaviors and this would in turn minimize the risk of the child being violent.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The best way to intervene in preventing delinquency behavior among the youths is first accessing the risk factors that cause the youth in the first place to be involved in these behaviors. In this case, the family intervention would be the best way to go about it.

The fact that parenting may not be in its best, calls for the parents to get to be taught on the best way of parenting, for the benefit of their children and how well to provide family support. Having a well-established family setup can be a good way of ensuring that children are well focused on doing what is right and they have a lower risk of not getting involved in violent behaviors.

Other ways that children can get is being enrolled in bad behaviors such as getting involved in drugs. This would also be minimized when the youth are brought up in a family with strong family relations (Headman, 2008).

However, it is notable that this method may not work well if the youth is already incarcerated. In such a scenario, an individual approach would be more favorable since the child is getting minimal contact with the family.

Risk factors are indicators of the path way the youth take that leads to serious violent or chronic juvenile delinquency. Researches that have been carried out in reference to the risk factors are instrumental in ensuring that interventions have been found out.

Study of risk factors are also influential in making of a framework that have approaches that aim at preventing delinquency behaviors among the youth. Some of the risk factors that have been associated with the delinquency behaviors include but not limited to the following.

Prenatal and perennial factors, psychological, behavioral, and mental characteristics as well as the influence by the youth are the main causes of violent behaviors. However, other social factors are also inclusive in development of these behaviors; among them are family factors and community factors.

We will write a custom Essay on Juvenile Delinquency, Treatment, and Interventions specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, protective factors are conditions that counter the risk factors or increase resistance to the risk factors (Howell, 2003). Preventive effort that comes with preventive factors seeks to reduce the risk factors.

In turn, they promote presence of a health development and avert health to encourage good behavior trends. It is also notable that if risk reduction effort addresses risk and protective factors it is more likely to become effective.

Parent and Child Training Series is one of the intervening means of preventing presence of delinquency behaviors among children. The method has a mission statement of taking children as the most important human beings and the only way to ensure they are stable both emotionally and socially is by establishing a caring relationship between the child and the parent.

The approach ensures the children get the necessary social support that relives the stress they may be undergoing. The method succeeds in making sure that the children get encouragement, attain problem solving skills, and a way of handling misbehaviors (Webster, 2008). Development of these skills ensures the children are well equipped to such an extent that they are less likely to engage in delinquency behaviors.

National Institute on Drug Abuse is also can other way of fighting delinquency behavior. By carrying out research, these institutions ensure the parents as well as the community is knowledgeable of the drugs that children use, which have high likelihood of committing crime.

Such information is important in ensuring that the society is successful in fighting the usage of drugs which subsequently may lead to involvement in delinquency behaviors. It is also notable that this organization is instrumental in funding research important for statistic purpose. Multisystem Therapy Programs are programs that are inclusive of families, community, friends, neighbors, schools, and even teachers.

The programs focus on ensuring that all these in stations are incorporated in fighting chronic and violent behaviors among the youth. It is also notable that this program works with the toughest offenders in the society. The program focuses on treating the environmental problems that causes delinquency behavior among the youth.

The program has the goals of minimizing any social behavior among the youth in the society as well as empowering families against any family difficulties (Henggeler, 2002). Through development of other supportive programs, the program incorporates all the affected parties and has shown much success through the years after it was started out.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Juvenile Delinquency, Treatment, and Interventions by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The paper is keen to note that there are so many risk factors that are associated with delinquent behavior. However, the family relation is notably one of the best ways to ensure that the child does not engage in these behaviors as family dictates the character of the youth.

However, other intervening and preventive measures are also required to ensure that children are not affected by this problem. Parent and Child Training Series are some of the programs that have seen much success in preventing these behaviors. However, the entire society has a responsibility of ensuring that it assists in preventing this problem.

References Headman, N. C. (2008). Juvenile Delinquency: Are We Doing the Right Things To Make a Difference? Web.

Henggeler, W.S.. (2002, October 11). Multisystemic Therapy Program. Web.

Howell, J. C. (2003). Preventing

[supanova_question]

Biographical History of Martin Luther King Jr Essay college admissions essay help

Early life It should be known that Martin Luther King Jr was born on January 19th 1929. As a matter of fact, he died on the April 4th 1968 (Clarke 23). Although he was born as Michael he later on changed his name to Martin. The family’s long dominance as pastors was started by his grandfather in Atlanta. Martin Luther King’s father could later on serve as a pastor from 1931 (Reddick 37).

In addition, Martin also served as a co-pastor until his death. It should be known that he attended various segregated schools before graduating from college in 1948. He later on attended a theological school in 1951 (Reddick 29). As a matter of fact, he married his wife in Boston where he had gone for studies.

Coretta Scot- who was his wife- had uncommon attainments as far as intellectual skills are concerned and they together had four children. Martin became a pastor in 1954 while he was just 25 years old. As time went by, he became an important leader and activist as far as the civil rights movement in America is concerned.

Martin Luther King Jr later on established himself as a strong brand name and iconic figure in the US and other parts of the world. Everybody around the world agrees that he was a heroic leader that contributed to the modern America.

He used nonviolent methods in advancing his civil rights ideas. In this case, he can be boldly referred to as one of the best orators that the country has ever had. All in all, King received the Nobel peace price in 1964 becoming the youngest person to get the award (Clarke 45).

This was done to appreciate his work of ending racial discrimination in the country. While doing this, he used nonviolent ways and means thereby being recognized. King was inspired by Gandhi’s success thereby visiting his birthplace in 1959 because he also used nonviolent activism. This is what turned him around thereby enhancing his commitment to the civil rights movement.

His work The most renowned influence on Martins life was Howard Thurman. This is because he was his fathers’ classmate and thereby had a great impact on the future Martin. Another person who had an impact on Martin was Bayard Rustin who mentored the young man on non-violence activism.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As a matter of fact, Rustin was his main advisor and mentor in his activism life. The 1963 Washington march was a great success because of Rustin’s plans and organization skills (Wintle 29). As far as his career is concerned, he spoke frequently and openly because of his experience as a pastor. In 1955, he organized the Montgomery Bus Boycott that lasted for a lot of days (Reddick 41).

The result of this boycott was an end to open racial segregation that had been practiced for years. King is credited for starting the Southern conference that was supposed to promote moral authority.

This conference was also supposed to bring together black churches so that they can conduct nonviolent protests. As a matter of fact, he led the conference and group until his death. He narrowly escaped death in 1958 after being stabbed on the chest by a black woman (Wintle 54).

King was wiretapped by the FBI because they thought that what he was advancing for was likely to cause some civil strife in the country. This was done under the direction of the then attorney general of the country. Throughout his life, King organized various protests that were aimed at increasing the rights of blacks to vote.

In the long run, most of these rights were enacted in the country’s laws. Martin was very strategic when choosing places and methods that could be used to organize protests around the country and that is why he was successful.

The Albany movement is another initiative that later on attracted a lot of national attention through its nonviolent activities. Kings most notable achievement was the march to Washington that was done in 1963 (Clarke 52). As a matter of fact, this march was done to demand for freedom and better jobs in the country.

The organizers wanted to denounce the governments stand on various things and there was no other better place to do this than the country’s capital. As much as there were various tensions prior to this, it was successful. Martins’ speech on that day has become one of the best speeches that the country has ever had. King wanted people to be compensated for the historical wrongs that had been committed on them and this is a stance that he out rightly maintained.

We will write a custom Essay on Biographical History of Martin Luther King Jr specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Sunset years and death In 1968, he went to support black employees who had been on a strike in Tennessee. This is because they were protesting for better treatment and good wages that were being advanced to their white counterparts. As a matter of fact, his flight had to be delayed because of a bomb threat in April 968.

He was assassinated while at the Lorraine Motel and this is where he loved going. It has been documented that he was shot and assassinated while on the balcony of the motel on April 4th at around 6.01pm. Martin Luther King Jr was then later on pronounced dead at 7.05 pm. This was at the St Josephs hospital after undergoing a chest operation (Clarke 66).

His assassination led to a lot of riots that were witnessed throughout the country. As a matter of fact, a national day of morning was declared by the president on April 7th. Later on, James Earl Ray who killed Martin Luther King Jr was sentenced to 99 years in prison. There have been a lot of allegations of conspiracy as far as Martins death is concerned, but this is always expected.

What can be learned from the great communicators of today or yesterday? The great communicators of yesterday or today have a lot of things that can be leant by the present generation. This is based on various things that they did but still have a lot of relevance to our daily lives. Great communicators like Martin Luther King Jr and Reagan had a lot of qualities and unique characteristics that made them distinct.

In this case, there is something that made them to be unique in what they were doing and how they were communicating all along (Wintle 92). Great communicators had skills of talking evocatively meaning that they could use anecdotes that common people could not understand.

In this case, one had to dig in deep to understand what they were really saying. This is something that can be learned because an individual has to be good at what he is saying. Great communicators should do things that will ultimately make the whole society great as time goes by.

We can all agree that great communicators had and still have a skills and optimism that enabled them to advance their ideas well. In this case, they will always speak of the future in anticipation of good things to come by. This is very good because we should always anticipate for good things so that we can lay a good ground and foundation that will make such things possible.

Great communicators of yesterday talked generally about the future in the outer space and why everybody should be there. This has also been replicated by today’s great communicators like Barrack Obama who have renewed the hope of people by focusing on a great future.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Biographical History of Martin Luther King Jr by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This is a very important lesson that can be helpful in today’s society that has a lot of challenges that need to be dealt with renewed optimism and hope (Wintle 96). In this case, we need to be optimistic and hopeful in all that we do. This can be enhanced by paying more attention to the people that we are talking to who also happen to be our audience.

Great communicators both of today and yesterday have always talked and revolved around a sense of country. This therefore gives us a sense of belonging. For instance, Charles de Gaulle was a great communicator and instead of him being in France, France as a country was in him.

This tells us that the greatest path towards being a great communicator is to have a sense of belonging and identity. This will therefore enable us to connect well with where we are coming from and where we are going to as a society. You can not be a great communicator unless you stand for something and this is as fact.

Martin Luther King Jr was a great communicator because he stood against racial discrimination in the society and this is what he was advancing and advocating for (Clarke 76). On the other hand, Barrack Obama is a great communicator because he stood for change that Americans were really yearning for.

You can not be a great communicator unless you talk about issues. This is the starting point because there is nobody who will listen to you unless you are talking about what they want to hear. Just as an example, Martin Luther King Jr was talking about a real issue of racial discrimination and inequalities in the society and that is why people were able to listen to him because it was a reality (Clarke 66).

This is a good lesson because we first of all need to identify what is bedeviling us as a society. Good communicators both of today and yesterday should be able to fight for what they believe in without any problem. This should be done passionately because if you believe in something, you will go fort it without any lay back.

As much as you might loose your life fighting for what you believe in, it will not go in vain because somebody will always appreciate what you did. Humility is a very important character as far as being a good communicator is concerned. This will enable people to communicate and connect easily with others thereby advancing your ideas without any problem.

Works Cited Clarke, James. Defining danger: American assassins and the new domestic terrorists. New York: Transaction Publishers, 2005. Print.

Reddick, Lawrence. Crusader without Violence: A Biography of Martin Luther King, Jr. New York: Harper, 1959. Print.

Wintle, Justin. Makers of Modern Culture: Makers of Culture. New York: Routledge, 2001. Print.

[supanova_question]

“Gulliver’s Travels” a Book by Jonathan Swift Essay (Critical Writing) argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Introduction Jonathan Swift wrote “Gulliver’s travels” in order to satirize European and British society and also to satirize human nature. Through the different tales, Gulliver illustrates just how man acts and thinks inconsistently. Sometimes these analyses dwell on different communities while in other instances they focus on his community.

In other instances, it is the social structures that Gulliver objects to while in other scenarios, it is really the individual. Sometimes he attacks humanity and sometimes he attacks himself. What all these contrasts have in common is that they reflect the shortcomings of human beings.

Purpose of the book In the first part of the writing, Swift introduces readers to a petty and pretentious race of humans who happen to be less than six inches tall. He must have chosen such a size in order to eliminate the perception that man is great because of his physical abilities.

One would therefore assume that this small size may have played a part in the Lilliputians wickedness, but this thinking is immediately eroded when one reads about the Brobdingnagians in the next section. They perceive Gulliver in the same way that the Lilliputians because Gulliver is only a fraction of their size.

Although this community does possess some positive attributes, they are also manipulative and selfish because they use Gulliver to get money. By contrasting two completely opposite communities i.e. the Brobdingnagians and the Lilliputians, Swift satirizes the pride that humans derive from their appearances; no form is devoid of vice.

Other aspects of the book keep attacking man’s inadequacies as a species. For instance, Swift selects horses as a representation of the ‘ideal society’. They were rational and free from excesses unlike human counterparts which were the Yahoos.

According to the narrative, the Yahoos were the worst representation of human society yet Gulliver soon realizes that all humans are Yahoos in one way or another. What’s worse is that at least the Yahoos did not disguise their wickedness while humans like Gulliver did this with their clean shaven faces and well kept nails.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Furthermore, when the Master Houyhnhnm hears about the ways of the humans he concludes that human beings are the worst kind. For instance, when Gulliver tells this leader about lawyers who make money by lying, one immediately sees a resemblance with the Yahoos who rarely make honest dealings with each other. Gulliver also says that Ministers of State get elected for development purposes but most will focus on their own ambitions and destroy others’ credibility.

The Yahoos also exhibited this kind of greedy behavior when they fought over a small shiny rock or when they needed to control supplies even when there was enough for all. Human beings often go to war over petty differences in opinion just like the Yahoos fought over the slightest issues. In essence, the author is satirizing human pride by comparing it to such beastly creatures.

He is showing them that despite the pleasant appearances that human posses, there are certain deficiencies that reduce the human species to a beastly and unwanted race as the Yahoos.

At some point, Swift also satirizes British society and its perceptions of progress. For instance, when rescued by Laputa, he soon realizes that sometimes excessive reasoning and rationalities can be of little use. People in this Island were wasting a lot of time and resources on useless experiments such as smelling people’s excretions for proof of political conspiracies.

The author may have been directly satirizing the body of scientists in his community who also focus on several experiments that have minimal uses. He wanted to show that realism and practical use was much more important than these excesses.

British society has many deficiencies in terms of its political environment and this narrative has exposed and criticized a number of them. For instance when Gulliver goes to live with the Lilliputians, he does a lot of things for them as he saves them from an enemy that would have destroyed them without his intervention.

Consequently, they should have treated him with all the dignity and respect that they endorsed. In fact, this community had a law they had written about ingratitude; one could get punished if one did not adhere to those standards. Nonetheless when Gulliver disagrees with the King concerning Blefuscudians, the King immediately accuses him of treason.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on “Gulliver’s Travels” a Book by Jonathan Swift specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is almost as if all the help Gulliver gave them was for nothing because what mattered was that Gulliver sided with the King. This incident illustrates that the Lilliputians appeared to be well meaning theoretically but in practice they did not live to their own expectations.

That scenario also applies to the narrator’s community; in as much as politics is necessary for governance, it is characterized by a lot of pretentions and back stabbing. His society has very novel ideas but was ruining them through these pretensions. In other words, he was satirizing some of the shortcomings in British politics.

Jonathan Swift critiques European societies in general when he talks about guns and cannons with the King of Brobdingnag. At this point, Gulliver actually thinks that he is sharing something so precious with the King. He tells him about gunpowder and its use and expects him to embrace it wholeheartedly.

Gulliver is therefore surprised that the King rejects it and even thinks of the King as a narrow minded person. It is such a pity that Gulliver thinks along these lines because he looks at things from the European perspective and not a human perspective.

He was actually selling to the King a new method of torturing and killing other human beings. Swift was therefore demonstrating that persons in European nations are always quick to wage war and would have jumped at the prospect of learning about gun powder.

The author also satirizes the sense of entitlement that European nations possess especially as they seek to colonize others. Gulliver feels that imperialists are behaving arrogantly and deceptively because they claim to civilize nations by attacking and oppressing native communities who had done nothing to the colonizers in order to warrant such ruthless acts. In the last chapter, the narrator of the story affirms that imperialism actually stems from greed so he voices these complaints.

It should be noted that Gulliver himself happened to be a mouthpiece concerning the evils of human nature. At the beginning, Gulliver is innocent and highly optimistic about life in general.

However, as he continues to interact with many evil, petty, gross and absurd individuals, his naivety slowly gets eroded. He now becomes highly critical of humans and therefore illustrates how other people’s wickedness can actually take away the little good that maybe left in others as was the case with the narrator of the book.

Not sure if you can write a paper on “Gulliver’s Travels” a Book by Jonathan Swift by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion Through the narrative, Jonathan Swift satirizes and exposes human inadequacies. This is illustrated through the weaknesses of the various people that Gulliver meets and also through his own shortcomings. Swift also explains why these inadequacies persist by showing that pride covers those immoralities and causes man to continue living in this state of wickedness.

[supanova_question]

Economic Issues in “Monetary Policy” by Yogesh Ambekar Essay (Article) essay help site:edu

Yogesh Ambekar is the author of the article “Monetary Policy” published on August 15, 2004. He describes monetary policy as a tool to manage the supply of money in an economy to attain price stability, maintain the value of money, dealing with unemployment, etc.

He adds that the money circulation and short term interest rates prevailing in the economy determine whether the monetary policy is tight or loose. Ambekar further argues that short term interest rate is the elementary factor in regulating the monetary policy of an economy.

He says that before applying the monetary policy, money circulating in the economy and the viability of open market operations are considered. According to the author, though monetary policy is used for achieving short term objectives, it also provides means to attain price stability in the longer run by shrinking the fluctuation range in the business cycles. While concluding his article, Ambekar emphasizes that the monetary policy shall be carefully designed as it has a vital part in building a country’s economy.

Critical Reflections In this article, Yogesh Ambekar intends to develop an understanding among the readers the concept of monetary policy and how it is used by the governments and central banks to counter inflation, unemployment, etc. While discussing that the monetary policy may be set tight or loose, Ambekar does not mention how the policy works and what are the objectives of doing so.

As for example, by a tight monetary policy the foremost objective is to obtain increased growth and employment by means of reduction in short term interest rates which improve the borrowing power of people leading to an increased aggregate demand and ultimately results in increased growth and decreased unemployment.

On the other hand, the central bank aims to reduce the inflation prevailing in the economy by a loose monetary policy. In doing so, interest rates are increased and hence money supply is decreased to deter borrowings and attract investments. Both of these processes are shown below.

Moreover, the author does not highlight the risks associated with the use of monetary policy as seen in the diagrams above. The tight monetary policy results in inflation whereas loose policy hampers growth and promotes unemployment.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Another important issue which Ambekar does not discuss is the time lag related to the implementation of this policy. Time lag refers to the time it takes to identify the issues and appropriately design and implement a monetary policy.

By the time this process is completed, the issues no longer remain the same and result in an ineffective monetary policy. Furthermore, Ambekar discusses the role of monetary policy in stabilizing prices. He shows how fundamental monetary policy proves to be in terms of prices stability by relating the monetary policy with business cycles and explains how fluctuations in business cycle are minimized.

At the end, he stresses on the fact that though long-term interest rates are considered in boosting economic growth of a country and monetary policies can only be used in short run but at the same time they should be designed carefully as in the longer run they effect the economic growth (Ambekar).

Work Cited Ambekar, Yogesh. “Monetary Policy.” 2011. Buzzle.com. Web.

[supanova_question]

Impact of National Culture on Entrepreneurial Activity Essay college essay help

While many of us believe that we are in total control of our lives, the culture that we are predisposed to is a determining factor in shaping our personality and even the way we do business. Through culture, we are raised differently, have different languages and solve problems differently and needless to say conduct business differently.

Even the traits that are passed from generation to generation are largely dependent on culture. Also, through culture perpetuation, entrepreneurial concepts are passed from one generation to another and therefore different people in different parts of the world have different entrepreneurial practices (Timmons, Gillin, Burshtein

[supanova_question]

Critical Analysis of Commerce Platforms Amazon and e-Bay Term Paper essay help online: essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Amazon

EBay

Conclusion

Introduction The 2 ecommerce platforms chosen for analysis are Amazon and e-Bay. I selected these two platforms because I was most familiar with them and had made online purchases before.

Amazon I first purchased a motivational book from amazon.com then went ahead to buy a DVD. I decided to return the DVD and first visited the returns centre in order to ensure that I was doing the right thing. I was surprised that it was quite easy to return an item as long as it is open. I was lucky enough not to have opened my package. In the Return center, the company had laid out a pictorial representation of the returning process.

First, a customer needs to go to this returns center and print the label which would be attached on the package; I printed my return label. The second step was to prepare a package in which to place the item and the third step was to seal the box and attach the return label at the top of the package.

The last step was to ship the package through my local courier. When I took the package to DHS, they told me that I needed to pay shipping fees and I realized that there would be a number of other hidden payments in this process. So I went back to the company website under “Amazon Help” to find out all the charges involved.

I found out that since mine was a media item and it had not been opened, I would get a refund of 80% of my purchasing price. However, because I was returning something out of my own liking rather than a mistake made by Amazon, then I needed to pay for the shipping. I also found out that the reason why I was not getting a full refund was that there was a restocking fee which would be deducted from my desired item.

I had returned my package after a period of two days so this was well within the 30 day limit that the company places on returned items. I received my refund through the same method that I had used to pay for the service and this was through my credit card. It came after three days.

All in all, I felt that their return policy was quite fair; it was reasonable for me to pay shipping charges since they had not committed any wrong. Furthermore, refunds came in on time and I liked the fact that they only deducted 20% out of the original purchase price. This was quite fair because all goods lose value as soon as they leave a business’s premises.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The reason why Amazon is doing so well in this highly competitive world of ecommerce is their customer focus. The company has created forums for conducting web reviews in which customers rate items and give their comments about the items. In fact, I bought the self help book and DVD only after looking through customer reviews to find out if it would be worth my while.

Additionally, the website has provided a content search platform in which one can analyze book content. I was therefore able to buy my book only after ascertaining that it contained only the material I was looking for. Amazon also impressed me with the bonuses they give on credit cards and shipping and it was great that the book cost much less here than it did in some other book stores.

I was impressed by their click ordering because I did not have to follow such a long process in order to get my product and I received it on time. The company has such a large inventory of items and it is almost impossible to miss one’s favorite book or item.

For an ecommerce website to do well it must have an air tight marketing strategy. I saw an advertisement for this motivational book on another website I was visiting. In fact, Amazon ads can be found in almost all types of websites so it is quite easy to get external information about the service.

The website is user friendly because payment options and terms of use are clearly written. I thought their customer service was top notch and this was even increased by the fact that I could track my product movement. The company has a ‘contact us’ link on almost all sections of their websites. I did not wait long before someone could attend to me. In fact, it is the personal service that illustrated how professional the company was.

EBay My purchases from E-bay were for a commemorative coin and a watch. I decided to return the coin and found that their return policy was quite different. Since this is a flea market, all sellers had their own return policies. I went back to my seller and read his return policy. He had stated that customers must return items within 7 days of purchase, but this was not inclusive of shipping time.

He specified that a refund would only be possible after the good had arrived back to the seller and that Return of merchandise authorization was needed. I therefore contacted the seller and told him that I changed my mind about the product and wished to return it to him. The customer was expected to pay for shipping and he asserted that this would be done through PayPal.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Critical Analysis of Commerce Platforms Amazon and e-Bay specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More After contacting him for authorization, he first told me that I had already exceeded the 7 day limit so I should not expect a refund but I requested him to be lenient with me since I was going to buy more collectables from him in the future. He told me that he could give me credit for future purchases that was equivalent to 50% of the coin’s value- I received a gift certificate.

I negotiated with him and he agreed to increase it to 70%. I also had to pay for shipping. I am yet to buy more items from him so that I can investigate whether he will stick to his assertion or not. I thought this return policy was more stringent because the duration was only 7 days.

I also felt that he should be willing to send refunds since the items are not breakable or easily spoilt like electronics. There is room for improvement here even though the concerned collectables seller tried to accommodate me as much as possible.

I was impressed by the company’s web design; Products were categorized so that it would be easier to find what I was looking for. I also found that prices, photos and descriptions of the items were well done such that vital information could be found at a glance.

However, sometimes the descriptions can be different from the actual commodity since these are mostly second hand commodities. I found that the customer service was not as powerful as it was at Amazon because most of the work is left to independent sellers in the eBay village. In fact, I got most of my information from blogs and external parties when trying to find out about return policies.

This site is unique in that I could access so many commodities and so many sellers at one place. Everything from clothes, to phones, furniture, electronics and many more were available from this particular online shop. So the convenience was definitely something worthwhile.

I could imagine that many other customers from around the world were buying and bidding just like I was at EBay yet I could carry out my transactions very quickly. The company must have very effective servers to monitor these transactions.

However, I did not like the fact that most items needed to be bided on. It wastes a lot of time because the seller must decide which price is most convenient. Although there were items that had fixed prices, these represented the smaller percentage.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Critical Analysis of Commerce Platforms Amazon and e-Bay by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion Generally, Amazon appeared to be more user friendly because it is owned and run by a single firm. On the other hand, EBay is operated by a series of sellers from around the world; they all have their different offerings, conditions and expectations so synchronization is a challenge here. Both websites have great variety and conduct transactions quickly.

[supanova_question]

Evidence Based Instruction and Intervention Expository Essay essay help site:edu

The definitions and the approach to the instructional practices as their names advocate The use of evidence, research and scientific based instruction and intervention were introduced as an attempt in trying to help out the disabled school going children as well as adults.

This does not however imply that it is only applied to disabled children since in some cases; its main objective of application is to improve a child’s academic performance as well as their development in any learning environment.

This study however focuses on instructional practices that are directed towards certain student groups and individual students as well. In addition it also concentrates on the special needs children (Hall 2003, p. 78).

There are various approaches as mentioned by Reder and Strawn (1999) used in evidence base instruction which includes the consistent measurement of a child’s performance both socially and academically (p.16).

There should be data or information that verifies that the learning interventions are working and in return there should be a feedback which helps us learn about the progress in our performance.

Evidence based instruction insists on the continuous construction of cycles that reflect the improvements in our practices. This means that following the gathering and critical examination of the evidence, we need to act on it again.

Scientific based instruction is one where original data is collected and instructional practices as well as programs’ effectiveness is measured in relation to the data collected. It is however important to note that research base instruction is somehow intertwined with the scientific one.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is because research relies on data from science for more conclusions to be made. The methods used include subject studies and discontinuity designs among others.

Other scholars have defined this as a process through which teachers evaluate and assess performance, they build up personal education plans and take part in action research. Here, teachers assess their students previous knowledge comes up with hypotheses on the best teaching methods.

The lessons learnt on specific evidence based methods of instruction and intervention The most common method according to Groark (2007), which is used in early childhood learning instruction, is that of Response to Intervention, otherwise commonly known as RTI.

This model works in such a way that teachers in partnership with the parents take a multi- step approach that will help them pinpoint and eventually support students who show that they are academically struggling (p.245).

This model in most cases is applied when there is need to improve positive behavioral skills as well as in specific subject areas such as math. When it comes to the content of what the child is to learn, the teachers are expected to tailor it according to the previous progress reports made on that particular child. Therefore, a slow learner will have a lesser content as compared to a normal child.

The application of the evidence-based instruction has taught many early childhood teachers a few lessons. One of them being that, through the implementation of this learning method, many teachers can now pay attention to planning and carrying out classes that are much smaller than they previously did.

This is a teacher; one should pay special attention a child as an individual who really deserves it if at all any academic improvement or development is to be observed.

We will write a custom Essay on Evidence Based Instruction and Intervention specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More I as one of the teachers implementing this learning program have discovered that the learners find it easier to analyze as well as discuss whatever it is they are learning.

It has been proven that a good percentage of children learn well when they discuss with their colleagues. Therefore given the open forum kind of environment students tend to set their mind in an active thinking motion hence developing their analytical skills among others.

The specific uses made of evidence based instruction and intervention In my practicum I have been able to use some or a combination of all the evidence based methods in assessing my students’ needs as well as strengths on each reading section. This has therefore enabled me to identify the problematic areas in the curriculum and hence find way of dealing with the problem.

Teachers have been able to use this method to add to the learners’ opportunities to actively engage in academic and classroom discussion. This type of instruction has created an understanding between the weak children and the teacher.

Therefore, specific students who have difficulty in reading and in expressing themselves are normally given the chance to do so (Modwer 2001, p.29).

I have also been able to implement this in academic instructions so that in partnership with the parents to these children, we can closely keep track of the effectiveness of this instructional method.

This particular method requires constant reviewing and monitoring of its success, it helps spot its weak areas which in most cases are brought out by very little or no improvement in student performance. An additional use of the evidence based instruction was to build on my students’ social skills.

This includes reciprocity and developing the child understanding of each other during the interactive sessions with other children and the teachers as well. It has been of help so far as many children are reaping the fruits of self confidence which in turn has led to very high self esteem.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Evidence Based Instruction and Intervention by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The differences made by my knowledge in using evidence-based methods of instruction There are a few differences that I currently experience as a teacher since the implementation of this mode of teaching. One of these changes has been the reduction of the number of children in my classes by almost half. This is meant to enhance child understanding and grasp if content especially during class discussions.

In addition to this, there is the current emphasis on parent – teacher partnership to ensure the academic improvement and success of the child (Khon 1999, p. 34).This includes keeping a record on the progress of the student which is assessed by both parties.

Reasons as to why methods of instruction and intervention should be evidence-based and what works best for me These evident based methods of instruction are particularly useful to disabled children and the slow learners. Evident based instructions are the best in this day and age when an all round child development is of paramount importance.

Students can learn these skills through the interactive sessions that evidence based learning propose. However, in most instances, it can be costly to not only the parents who will have to top up the tuition fee but also to the learning institution.

It is however discouraging to a teacher when very little or no progress at all is made on the child’s academic performance. Some learning institutions pay the teachers according to the number of children they have in a class.

Therefore, having cut the number of students by almost half, the teacher may earn less which may be made worse by the little or zero improvement by the students. Well, I think the evidence based instruction system works best for me because I want the best for my students.

Looking at the benefits of this method, the children will not only gain leadership skills through the high self esteem and respect for other people’s opinions but they will be very confident as well.

References Groark, C. (2007). Evidence- based practices and programs for early childhood care and and education. California. Corwin Press.

Hall, N., Larson, J.

[supanova_question]

Equal opportunity in the workplace is a myth? Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Why equal opportunity in the workplace is a myth

Conclusion

Reference List

Introduction Equal opportunity in the workplace entails the act of treating employees fairly without prejudice and discrimination. The notion of equal opportunities in the workplace is based on the principle that all employees should be given a level playing field in the workplace irrespective of their gender, race or attribute.

Equal opportunity in the workplace is a myth as many organizations have not fully embraced the concept. The art of managing employees in the organization is mainly about managing their diversity. Each employee is usually different with different ethnic background, gender, age and race.

Whether the employee is disabled or not, he or she has different skills, values, attitudes and expectations and therefore equal opportunity in the workplace is aimed at maximizing the potentials of individuals (McKenzie

[supanova_question]

The Phenomena of Multiculturalism: Cultural and Social Values Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Table of Contents Overview of multiculturalism and media

Dominant cultural trends and media

Conclusion

Reference List

Overview of multiculturalism and media Multiculturalism entails the belief, acceptance, and admiration that different cultures can coexist together in a community, society, or country equitably in terms of expression and presentations.

In this sense, in a multicultural setting or society there is respect for ethnic multifariousness and every culture is significant. Promotion of multiculturalism involves many stakeholders and among them is the media. The media plays a significant role in encouraging peaceful coexistence in multicultural communities or nations.

In the view of the media role in boosting multiculturalism, it campaigns for equitability of ethnic groups, religious groups, and the political class and it advocates for non-promotion of a specific ethnic value as central.

On one hand, the contemporary media encourages interaction of cultures through advertisements and therefore sharing of cultural activities and on the other hand, the media helps to preserve cultural uniqueness of the different communities and hence maintain cultural diversity of the world.

According to Ankerl (2000), “…presentation of isolated cultural activities in the media helps promote and protect the unique features of the local culture of a nation or area and therefore contributes to global cultural diversity” (p.36).

In this case, interaction and isolation of cultures helps in strengthening the phenomena of multiculturalism with regard to other cultural and social values.

Dominant cultural trends and media In a cultural context, cultural dominancy predicates that a particular cultural value, behavior, or ritual occurs as cultural or societal norm respected and honored by all although not all who accept cultural dominancy.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Karotayev (2004) observes that, “…dominant culture is usually but not always in the majority but it achieves it’s dominancy by controlling institutions” (p.68).

Although dominant cultures require all to accord it dominancy, to the contrary not everybody will adhere to the requirement it seeks to control institutions such as the media and communication, learning institutions, and art and construct expression industry.

With media and communication, cultural dominance expresses its impact to many and its campaign for superiority over other cultures and subcultures becomes felt widely. Even with the contemporary media of websites and internet, propagation of dominant cultures persists simply because dominant cultures continue to seek for control in the institutions of media studies.

In addition, contemporary media studies borrow largely from the native cultures of the contemporary society especially the artistic styles in promoting interpersonal communication an important aspect in the media industry and therefore dominant cultures play a central role in the development of the contemporary media.

To the surprise of Beniger (1986), “…people who are able to access the information society are known as digital citizen, a signal that we are entering into another phase of the society” (p. 342).

Acquisition of new technology in the media industry changes then cultural orientation of people to the modern cultural practices especially with the digital technology. The resulting impacts are on the violation of the cultural norms of the society.

In multicultural society citizens feels free to express who they are and what their cultures hold. With the availability and through effective usage of the media and thus establishment and maintenance of the dominant cultures, this is possible.

We will write a custom Essay on The Phenomena of Multiculturalism: Cultural and Social Values specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As Bell (1976) puts it, “Multiculturalism is seen by its supporters as a fairer system that allows all people to truly express who they are within the society” (p. 56).

Multicultural societies provide a rich playground for different cultures to express and present their endowment in terms of cultural wealth and for the purposes of publicity, different media methods including the new digital technology come into use.

Dominant cultures are rich in social and cultural history and therefore the free expression of these cultures in a multicultural society helps to unveil the history underlying their existence.

Dominant cultures apply diverse techniques to spotlight neglected social history especially of the women and minority (Stone 1998, p. 221). Highlighting the abandoned history affecting the society helps to uphold the dignity of human and recognition of others.

The consistent use of media in a multicultural community makes this possible and therefore strengthens establishment of the dominant cultures.

Furthermore, as a major role of multiculturalism to reconstruct the society and restore integrity, awareness of the past becomes of critical importance. For this reason, dominant cultures expression uncovers the dominant values, behaviors and norms of the society and hence suppression of other subcultures. Through the media, this is achievable.

Dominant Culture on another perspective includes not only the majority social group but also the minor social groupings who own the resources, pluses, and ways of controlling the culture of the community or society in which they live.

These social groupings with command over the cultural activities of a community tend to influence all aspects of living, communication, dressing, deportment, and even reasoning. The media in this case only advocates to address those values concerned with dominance simply because the social group controls all aspects of lifestyles in that setting.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Phenomena of Multiculturalism: Cultural and Social Values by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Additionally, these cultural systems bear plans and scripts entailing economical and political concerns, which protect them from any possible disruptions.

Due to the economical and political protection enjoyed by these cultures, there is ease of manipulation of the media to present and publicize their cultures as dominant over the others and thus sustain and maintain they dominance.

For instance, according to Garnham (2004), in western societies the dominant cultures accentuate industriousness and achievement and do not allow for laziness and non-performance (p.34). This signifies that the culture created and dominating the western societies involve consistent hardworking with bountiful achievements.

Personal respect and respect to others and others’ property and responsibility remain important virtues of the western society and even the media portrays these virtues explicitly.

As the norm of hard work and achievement, targets in the western society correlates to salary and wages and therefore, non-performers in the society or those, who get money and wealth through inhumane and undignified ways, feel out casted and unfit in the society hence left to blame themselves.

In socialization processes, the media plays a pivotal role in enforcing the dominant cultures to others in collaboration with teachers and parents. All these factors work together towards a common goal of imposing the dominant cultural norm to either the young deviant children or a new individual in the culture.

Most of the dominant cultures lost control over the societies during the colonial periods where the colonial powers showed neither regard nor respect for any tradition and social groupings with unique characteristic.

Dominant cultures in that era remained suppressed with even people relocated and forced to follow a specific lifestyle hence the loss of cultural dominance and therefore the media in contemporary society helps to restore the lost glory of these cultures.

Through the media systemic portrayal and presentation of these native traditional cultures, recollection and reunion of the lost cultural dominance becomes possible.

On the other hand, media helps to campaign against the then counter cultures, which resist dominant cultures. The resistance is generally in the form of refusal to respect their values, norms, behaviors, scripts and programs but with media politics of dominant cultures the resisting cultures get absorbed by the dominant cultures and therefore the dominant cultures establishes and remain sustained.

In a multicultural society, the resistant to dominant cultures increases significantly as every culture in the society requires equity in dominance and expression. This calls for vigorous media presentation in order to articulate the image and features of the dominant culture to the minds and memories of the people.

Multiculturalism leads to pluralism in the society, which encourages rich multicultural society or community. Through the media, this plays a great role in fostering peaceful societal coexistence to ensure that all citizens get equal opportunity to exploit fully their potentials regardless of ethnic, cultural, or religious background.

In the contemporary society, discrimination of individuals for opportunities in employment, learning institutions and in social setting causes conflicts and disagreement. The media however helps in restoring unity, friendship, and respect for ones culture, beliefs, and human dignity.

Cultural pluralism in political systems helps greatly to foster the image of all the cultures in a country or state. In turn, this helps to reduce chances of cultural marginalization and suppression in many democratic countries.

Political systems thus provide a good platform for the expression of all cultures and therefore seek the equality required in a multiculturalism society because each political movement bears equal expressive authority. In these cases, the dominant cultures are still part of what the political systems express. This largely helps to sustain the politics of dominant cultural and social trends.

Some nations of the world with multiculturalism continue to progress; for instance, Canada with diverse multicultural society, discourages criticism of people based on race or culture.

According to Gottfried (2002), the speech given by the governor general of Canada on his installation ceremony from 1935 onwards stated that all cultures should maintain their identity, individuality, and contribute to the national image (p. 234). The speech favored the propagation of the idea of multicultural society and many radio and television stations aired it.

The print media also printed and published the speech. As a result, citizens from allover the country read the speech and in this way, the information spread to all the people.

The governor in his address maintained that strong and progressive nations contain different racial elements and cultures each contributing positively to the country in economical, political, and social fields.

When the Canadian government adopted the governor’s policy on multiculturalism some years ago, the media played a central role in realizing the full expression of all the cultures including the dominant cultures of the Canadian people.

In the modern society, where defiant to the dominant cultures continue to proliferate due to the incoming technology, goals in society, other beliefs, and freedom of choice and even different social structures, media becomes the only available tool to maintain the dominant culture elements in the society during this transition.

As Fuchs (2008) observes, different cultures are at different levels and stages of evolution in relation to changes in technology and social or cultural system (p. 786). In this view, cultures are therefore changing with time dynamics and over generations.

The native people hold the values, beliefs, behavior, and virtues of the dominant cultures and therefore need to pass them to the new generation. For effective articulation of these dominant cultural elements to the new generation then the media industry of the country plays the central role.

Changes in cultural systems and lifestyles also warrant a shift from traditions to modern lifestyles but this does not justify the loss of the cultural identity.

In most cases, cultural backgrounds of many people determine the lifestyle one chooses or leads and therefore the need for the media to continue propagating the values or norms of the dominant native or indigenous cultures, as they are rich in good values.

Conclusion The media among others systems play a major role in the expressions of the dominant cultures in the contemporary society especially in the multicultural settings where all cultures need equal opportunity and attention in terms of expression and presentation.

Dominant cultures entail good moral values and sustain traditionally respected norms, which helps to sharpen behaviors of the new generations and therefore these values and beliefs need not be lost. This calls for the media to propagate the dominant cultures’ values and social elements.

Multiculturalism on the other hand, brings cultural diversity and appreciation of different cultures in the nation and all the spheres of human life such as education, economy, and politics. With peaceful coexistence, citizens share from different cultures and treasure others based on their cultures. This brings about friendship and togetherness in the society.

Reference List Ankerl, G., 2000. Global communication without universal civilization. Geneva: Inu press.

Bell, D., 1976. The coming of postindustrial society. New York: Basic books press.

Beniger, J. R., 1986. The central revolution, technological and economic origin of Information society. Cambridge: Harvard university press.

Fuchs, C., 2008. Internet and society. New York: Routledge.

Garnham, N., 2004. Information society theory as ideology. London: Routledge.

Gottfried, P. E., 2002. Multiculturalism and the politics of guilt. Ottawa: University of Ottawa press.

Karotayev, A., 2004. World religions and social evolution of the old world civilization, New York: Edwin Mellen press.

Stone, J. B., 1998. Cultural and language diversity and the deaf experience. Cambridge: University press.

[supanova_question]

Wage Disparity across Gender, Race, and Ethnicity Research Paper college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Wage disparity and gender

Wage disparity and race/ethnicity issues

Recommendations

Conclusion

References

Introduction Wage disparity is used to refer to the differences in earning for two different groups of people, working in similar set up or their wages are arbitrarily different in the labour market. Wage disparity is mostly used in relation to describing the uneven spread of income across gender, race, and ethnic groups, which can lead to social inequalities and other problems in the workplace especially when the disparity is much pronounced.

Various research studies have been undertaken on the wage disparities by many researchers to examine various parameters of wage inequalities since they contribute a lot to the labor-market inequalities. Majority of the studies relating to wage disparities are quantitative in nature and involve measurements and comparison of wages and salaries.

These studies are mainly intersectional, trying to explain the wage inequalities using survey data to evaluate the differences based on gender, social status, and racial/ethnic groupings.

Wage disparities exist due to a variety of factors and the leading contributor to these wage gaps is the fact that many women and racial discriminated people are still secluded in the low paying occupations, with more than half of the all women workers holding sales, office administration entry-level jobs, and service jobs.

In addition, most female dominated jobs are low paying compared to male dominated jobs (Howard, 2004). The issue of privileges also appears to affect wage disparity in the work place. Privileges refer favors that are allowed to certain people or a particular person and are not allowed to other people in set up such as a work place.

These privileges are earned through achievement or are allowed to a certain grouping of people within most organizational structures.

In workplace, some organization members are allowed some privileges based not on merit, but on their ascribed status due to their association with certain groupings such as race, gender, sexual orientation, religion, class, and physical ability and this status is mostly influenced by external factors that are beyond the person’s immediate control (Karsten, 2006, P.254).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These unearned privileges have been shown to play a role in contributing to wage gaps among employees of the same level or in work of equivalent magnitude. Wage disparity due to any form of discrimination against certain groups in the workplace are common recipe for hatred, tensions, low level of motivation among workers and reduced productivity of the entire organization.

In this research paper, issues of unearned privileges will only be discussed in the context of race and gender. This research paper seeks to explore the issues of wage disparity across gender, race, and ethnicity in the American workplace set up. In the next sections of this paper, the following two relationships will be explored based on studies carried on them:

Wage disparity and gender

Wage disparity and race/ethnicity issues

Wage disparity and gender Since time in memorial, there have been noticeable salary gaps between the two genders in majority of the existing occupations. Although there have been some level of salary parity between male and female in professional occupations, the level of wages gaps are still high between the two groups.

Studies have clearly revealed that, generally, men earn higher salaries than women even when at the same job group and mostly female dominated jobs are low paying compared to male dominated jobs, which pay better wages and salaries. According to the analysis carried on the Bureau of Labor Statistics data in 1998, it was revealed that gender salary disparities continue to persist.

In this case, “the median weekly pay of full-time working women being 75 percent of the median pay for men in 1996; though women began closing the wage gap in 1980s, the earning for women in salaried full-time year-round positions reached 71 percent of men’s earnings in 1991 after a long stagnation period” (Gibelman, 2003,P.25).

One of the contributing factors to low earning among the women is the occupation choices they make. Generally, women are more tied with family obligations such as looking after the children. Though men are increasing being more involved in child upbringing, this area of family life is still considered female oriented.

In order to cope with family obligations and work necessities, many women tend to work in part time jobs, which mostly pay lowly and lead to low pay increments; with studies showing that in 2002, 32 percent of women compared to 10.8 percent of men worked part-time, thus the income disparity pitied women against the men (Anon, 2003).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Wage Disparity across Gender, Race, and Ethnicity specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Other factors that may limit women’s choice include “lack of affordable child care, a spouse’s unwillingness to share family responsibility, lack of flexible working schedule, and lack of well paying part-time jobs, which cause women to drop out of the workforce for longer periods than men, hence eventually they losing their career momentum and needed experience leading them to end up in jobs that pay less” (Howard, 2004, P.19).

A women choice is just one of the many complex factors that are put forward by scholars in trying to explain the continued wage disparity between men and women.

The position of authority at work is always associated with better pay and room for advancement in ones career path. Research on authority at work place mainly relate to its attainment and returns associated with the authority. Several studies conducted by sociologist and economist have concluded that women are less likely to ascend to positions with much decision-making power and they receive lower authority returns than men.

Thus, women reap little authority returns from education and experience compared to men, even though education produces a lot of positive results for women at lowest levels of authority, while for men education enable them to reap more benefits at highest levels of authority (Romero,

[supanova_question]

Midterm Questions: Interpreting the Role of Artwork with Reference to Bourriaud’s Relational Form Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

It is impossible to think of artistic works as aesthetically driven forms filled with no sense and connection to cultural and social issues. In order to conceive these new dimensions, artists often resort to changing patterns of representation, using different artistic practices.

The truth is that, though being disguised by artistic judgment, artworks have always served as the guardians of important historic, political, and social events and, therefore, ongoing shifts introduced to this sphere are inevitable. Relying heavily on Bourriaud’s vision of culture and contemporary artistic practice, the artist can be perceived as the tenant of culture being always on guard changing patterns in culture and society.

In particular, the author supports the idea that artistic works no longer serve for re-creating fiction and imaginary, but for forming the veritable modes of living within the current realistic model. Indeed, reality presents specific circumstances and conditions an artist should adjust to and understand so as to adapt the existing environment to his worldview.

Bourriaud’s outlook on art and culture can recognized as a paradigmatic one because all artistic forms serve as relational forms to interpret the existing reality. In this case, artistic conception, that was initially understood as a source of aesthetics and inspiration, is now more congruent with ideological spirits aimed at representing historical and social backgrounds.

Even abstractionist forms of representation point out either past outlook on reality or future perspectives, as proposed by Bishop: “Bourriaud seeks to offer new criteria by which to approach these often rather opaque works of art while also claiming that they are no less politicized than their sixties precursors”(53).

The writer particularly refers to Bourriaud’s argument concerning the art of 1990s whose theoretical context is closely associated with social interactions and political underpinnings rather than symbolic and utopian representation of symbolic space.

Interpreting this, the art should be relationally represented and delivered in a wider artistic context; artistic and cultural activities should largely depend on social conditions and audience that is perceived as a community, but not as a set of individuals. Therefore, there should be a strong connection between the relational art and social entity applying to artistic representation to understand the reality.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While analyzing modernist influences, it is not surprising that Berriaud reduces twentieth century art disclosing rational ideology and artists’ desire to improving social conditions in the context of economic crisis. Modernity, therefore, is more committed to experimenting and criticizing the reality to inform the audience about the actual state of affairs.

With regard to this, the modern art cannot be simply considered as a form of interactive art; rather, Bourriaud refers to it as a tool of locating contemporary empirical practice within a larger cultural context. In other words, the audience contemplating modern art can see it a response to the ongoing changes of economic and political infrastructures.

In addition, the existing artistic form can be seen as a reaction to virtual connection between the globalization process and online technologies leading to a people’s growing desire to resort a face-to-face communication. As a result, Bishop’s suggest that relational art can also serve as a precursor of a sequence of events in future; it dictates future actions and makes people understand what problems they may encounter while living in a globalized community.

While discussing the artist’s destination as the tenant of culture, but not as the creator, Bishops interprets it in more socially predetermined way. Specifically, the writer states, instead of “utopian” agenda, today’s artists seek only to find provision solutions in the here and now; instead of trying to change their environment, artist today are simply “learning to inhabit the world in a better way”; instead of looking forward to future utopia, this art set up functioning “microtopias” in the present (54).

In this respect, Bourriaud concludes that today’s relational aesthetics consists in enhancing political and historical significance of certain phenomena, objects and figures. Pragmatism and rationalism, hence, are the main pillars that the Bourriaud makes use of to involve the audience and make it understand the essence of today’s artistic movement.

What is more important, realistic representation can also be viewed from ideological perspective because each form of representation is the artists’ attempt to fight for changes and for promoting modernity. Artists’ aspiration to create is not premised on their desire to propagandize aesthetic concepts, but to involve the audience into their day-to-day practice.

While making the audience understand reality, the artist can be acknowledged as the bearer of existing realistic and practical notes. Therefore, contemporary artists are more attached to functional rather aesthetic representation because the latter does not infuse any pragmatic importance.

We will write a custom Essay on Midterm Questions: Interpreting the Role of Artwork with Reference to Bourriaud’s Relational Form specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They are now more concerned with developing new cultural and social framework and inventing new reality with the audience involved in art creation. Bourriaud, hence, states that elucidating politics and culture from art is absurd because these two spheres have always been interacted with other. Just as modernity relies on the development of new artistic concepts, the art itself relies heavily to social and working conditions under which particular cultural objects are created.

Finally, relational art serves as a reason for and underpinning of immediate discussion, interaction, and debates among the audience involved into contemplation of a particular artistic form. People should themselves as a part of this art so that they should be able to recognize the problem, to discuss the opportunities and introduce possible solutions.

In this respect, Bourriaud perceives artists as cultural dictators, but not as the aesthetic creators that make the viewers encounter the way they imagine reality. Within this arguments in mind, Bishop underscores that relational aesthetic can be evaluated only with the presence of the audience. With no viewers contemplating, the artistic forms created are a bulk of meaningless objects.

In conclusion, it should be stated that Bourriaud’s outlook on art as a cultural determinant and as precursor of social and political changes is quite understandable in the light of changing artistic patterns. Modernity, therefore, seeks to present reality as it is, with no reference to utopian and imaginary representation.

In fact reality reflects particular social and historical situations and the artist’s tasks is make this reality closer to the audience. More importantly, being deprived of aesthetic judgment, they are more inclined to produce objects and concept that can be understood only when interacting with the viewers.

Hence, relational form serves, first of all, as the indicator of changes that need to be introduced. Second, it seeks to involve the audience into solving existing social and political problems. Finally, it establishes new, more realistic forms of representing modernity.

Works Cited Bishop, Claire. Antagonism and Relational Aesthetics, 2004. PDF File. Retrieved from http://courses.washington.edu/

Bourriaud, Nicolas. Relational Form. Relational Aesthetics. Dijon: Les presses du réel, 1998. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Midterm Questions: Interpreting the Role of Artwork with Reference to Bourriaud’s Relational Form by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More

[supanova_question]

First Person Perspective as a Way of Acquiring Knowledge Essay college admissions essay help

Introduction A first person perspective refers to a personal view over a subject, whether in singular or collective consideration. Self knowledge on the other hand is the information that an individual holds over himself or herself. This paper seeks to discuss the acquisition of self knowledge.

The paper will defend the first person acquisition of self knowledge acquisition as opposed to obtaining the knowledge from a third party.

First person perspective as a way of acquisition of self knowledge Development of human beings is characterized with a level of knowledge that each individual acquire in life. Acquisition of knowledge is a continuous process that starts from childhood and develops with an individual throughout his or her life.

Some of the information that is obtained concerns individual personalities with respect to self understanding. A little child, old enough to talk and identify things, will for example be able to understand and distinguish his or her sex. As children grow, they develop the capacity to identify body parts and other features about their bodies.

Most of the lessons that individual learn about themselves at tender ages are majorly taught by third parties such parents, relatives or even peers who might have learnt such from other people. This source of self knowledge however changes as people grow into mature adults when self awareness is developed and an individual develops perception about himself or herself.

Though the development of self knowledge may be thought of as an automatic phenomenon, it is an independent feature of human beings and varies from person to person. Development of self knowledge from a personal perspective is driven by environmental factors that induce self meditation from which a deeper understanding of self is derived.

One of the drivers into self knowledge is interaction with other members of the society that exposes the features of individuals. Discursive forums with other people can for example help an individual to identify how good he or she is. Discussions about personalities can also help an individual to reflect on similarities between the discussed feature and those that the individual experiences in himself or herself.G

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More oals and objectives of an individual is also a tool to self awareness. This is particularly applicable in the identification of an individual’s capacity. Setting targets for one’s self and using them for evaluation is a good example of a way to self knowledge.

Even though self knowledge refers to information about what an individual poses within, such knowledge is driven by external factors which are in most cases associated with an individual’s life experiences.

Scarcity of needs which often bring people into consideration of why they cannot poses one thing and how they can acquire another also forms a basis of self awareness through self evaluation. General interaction with other people that exposes their features also triggers individuals into self awareness with respect to consideration of what other individual poses.

Though every individual is subject to the external factors that drive first person perspective of self knowledge, individual personalities dictate the level of self awareness. Both physical and psychological factors play a role.

Conclusion Personal perspective of self awareness is self driven by what an individual conceive about self. It therefore instills a better level of self confidence as compared to a third person’s perspective.

[supanova_question]

Major in Success: Make College Easier, Fire up Your Dreams, and Get a Great Job Essay college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Summary

Critique

Recommendation

Works Cited

Introduction This book was written by Patrick Combs who also doubles up as an inspirational speaker. This book has been written for students aspiring to join college or those who are already in college.

Grounded in current research in business economics and coupled with appropriate insights from the corporate world, the book is suitable for every college student regardless of age.

Summary The first chapter of this book is “On the Road to Success”. It basically outlines the vitality in students identifying the type of career they would like to undertake in future. The author points out that it is wise for one to choose the career which will offer the greatest happiness and satisfaction. In the second chapter i.e.

“Truly Passionate”, it has been emphasized that for one to be successful in ones choice of career, he/she must possess extra ordinary drive and passion. This passion will eventually propel one to exert the necessary effort towards the achievement of the set goals.

The following chapter; “ Major Excitement” is an elaboration of the previous one. It points out that the passion that generates from achieving success in ones endeavors acts as a morale booster resulting in even greater success.

Students are advised to refrain from choosing a carreer on the basis of such things as prestige and renumeration, instead one should go for what really interests and inspires one. Thus , it is also paramount that a student recognizes his/her weaknesses and strengths in the particular subjects required by his/her career of choice.

This is in order to enable the student to know the type of career that one is most suited for in accordance with his/her strengthes as far as relevant subjects are concerned.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The following chapter which is “Money Matters” offers great advice to students on sound money management practices. It emphasizes that it is important to learn how to manage ones finances prudently regardless of the amounts in question.

In the sixth chapter; “Your Ultimate Life”, the book observes that a student’s stint in college is a time that one should explore as many interests as one can. Most of all, one should strive to graduate with an enthusiasm for learning.

It inferes that one can increase his/her enthusiasm by exploring ones interests. This has been further expounded on in the following chapter; “The Six Big Fears”. Combs observes that such fears for instance the fear of failure and reactions from peers and family members can decrease ones spirit for learning.

In other words, one has to come up with ways of confronting his/her fears and opt to follow ones heart’s desires with less focus on what opinions others might have on a particular subject. He further insinuates that one would be better off exploring his/her own interests in the library than sleeping through a class that is boring (Combs, 2000).

In the ninth chapter, the author highlights the importance of co-curricular activities to the students. He concurs that while it is prudent to work hard in academics, it is equally vital for one to take part in sports and such other activities. Such activities help one to wind up and release accumulated tensions.

Such activities also help one to develop other essential skills such as ledership, team work and interpersonal skills. In the next chapter “Never Mind the Grades’, the book observes that a student should desist from laying too much emphasize on grades since success is a component of various aspects grades being just a fraction of it.

It is pointed out that students can still achieve their goal regardless of poor grades in the majors, a lackluster GPA, and past shortcomings.

We will write a custom Essay on Major in Success: Make College Easier, Fire up Your Dreams, and Get a Great Job specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The author shows further insightfulness in the later stages of the book. For instance, in the fifteenth chapter; “Life Changing Reality Checks”, the author advises student to take the opportunity of learning from the numerous lessons that life is bound to throw at people during their course of life.

The following chapter i.e. Really Get into It”, the book cautions the students on the need to get desicive and immerse themselves in all the activities that have been tailored to help them achieve their goals.

The author cautions against procastination since it is not only time wasting but it can also cause a decrease in motivation.

The sixteenth chapter i.e. Show and Tell, the book emphasizes the need for students to talk about their areas of interests as this is a great source of motivation and confidence. Also by doing so, one stands to be corrected and assisted which are all the more beneficial.

The eighteenth chapter is Going Professional. It is basically an outline of some prerequisite steps and skills that aspiring college students should have in possession in order to attract employment.

He emphasizes on the need to acquire interpersonal, communicational and technical skills that are relevant to ones career. This is clearly illuminated by the following excerpt from the book, “No matter what you major in, if you can’t answer the phone, make a presentation, do a spreadsheet,

or write a business letter, nobody needs you”. The author has expressly highlighted some resourceful ideas that a student can use so as to jump start an exciting career. For instance he has emphasized on the need to have a presentable resume, sound networking, strong interview skills, plausible references etc.

Critique There is no doubt that Patrick Combs’ major in success is not only an enlightening but also an inspiring book. However, some people have had some reservations with some areas in this book. Personally I feel that the book leans more towards wishful thinking than truth and reality.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Major in Success: Make College Easier, Fire up Your Dreams, and Get a Great Job by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This is because the author fails to acknowledge the fact that people are living in an ever changing world where new and emerging demands are being placed in all spheres of live. Furthermore, he has failed to explain how a student ought to adapt to these changes once he/she embarks on a specific career.

He has also failed to describe his own success, the author’s facts are not grounded in quantifiable facts and statistics, he has downplayed the importance of grades in the job market by making an assumption that “College is for developing your talents to learn and do so that you can learn and do anything you like (Combs, 2000) and he also asserts that one should not panic if ones extracurricular activities have a negative effect on ones grades.

Recommendation Nonetheless, major in success is a great book which offers prospective college students a wide range of lessons and advice. I have to say that, in the end, I would recommend this book to any student wanting to identify his/her areas of interest in view of laying a strong foundation towards achieving a satisfying career.

Works Cited Combs, Patrick. Major in success: Make College Easier, Fire Up Your Dreams, and Get a Great Job. Francisco: Ten Speed Press, 2000.

[supanova_question]

Various Ethical Theories Analysis Report essay help free: essay help free

Table of Contents Approaches to Ethical decisions

Utilitarianism

Kant’s moral approach

Psychological egoism and ethical egoism

Didactic stories

Ethical virtues and ethics of conduct

Reference List

Approaches to Ethical decisions Ethics is a prerequisite for human existence. It is a mean of determining a sequence of action to be taken. Without ethics, individual actions would be unsystematic and purposeless. This paper analyses various theories learned in class. Besides, the writer categorizes them in hierarchy, basing on decision making within a given domain.

Utilitarianism In a utilitarian system, a person portrays a tendency in fulfilling the needs of self as well as fulfilling other people’s needs. The principle in the utilitarian approach designates that; any action should involve certain principles which create happiness within oneself and others.

According to Nina (2005), an action that results in the moral rectitude and content should always be viewed as very useful. Using this approach, I will try to enrich the lives of people by adding value to their lives by increasing their satisfaction levels and reducing their sadness levels.

Although at a time, it is very difficult to make people happy since what I might think makes them happy, doesn’t work always, but I will try very hard to reduce their sadness.

Besides, I will employ the greatest-happiness principle as a key to my interaction with other people. I will aim at considering the moral course of my actions by using the levels of mixed feelings of happiness and unhappiness present in people.

For instance, I will ensure that whatever right thing I do will bring an increase the level of happiness in people. However, some action which I will employ at the end brings about the feeling of pleasure and satisfaction, then that action is morally right contrary to a situation whereby the action taken results in the wrong choice due to the feelings of pain and dissatisfaction.

According to Nina (2005), any activity that provides pleasure is right and any action that provides pain is bad. This proposal seems fit since the feeling of pleasure, happiness and satisfaction is always good and right, whereas pain and displeasure always results in unhappiness.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thus, I will ensure that my choice of an instrumental value is appropriate to achieve the desired results. The correct choice of the instrumental values results also in the attainment of an intrinsic value.

Kant’s moral approach This moral theory is also known as the obligatory theory (deontology). Kant’s moral theory is in contrast with the utilitarian approach and it depicts a little relationship exists between true moral thinking and the consequences of an action (Nina, 2005). The Kant’s approach observes that esteem for the ethical law must be present.

Based on this approach, I will argue that whenever an action is done in a good will, the cost (whether good or bad) does not count.

For instance, a situation may arise in which a passerby who notices that the oncoming vehicle might hit a pupil who is playing on the road, and shouts a warning to the pupil which frightens the pupil causing her to panic and fall on the road thus being crushed to death, might be deemed as the warning scream from the passerby was meant to save the pupil.

The passerby meant good with the warning since it was an alarm to the pupil to move away from the road. Therefore, the principality of right doing should be upheld though it doesn’t always make people happy and comfortable.

Psychological egoism and ethical egoism Psychological and ethical egoism have to do with a great deal of selfishness, which is always thinking highly of oneself and criticizing the interests of other people. Being referred to as selfish seems to be unethical, we all agree that we all possess a certain degree of selfishness in us.

According to the theory of psychological egoism, all of our doings are selfish since we were created like that. The selfish nature is part of humanity and getting rid of it is impossible (Nina, 2005). Selfishness mainly focuses on the security of one’s survival but is not a total disregard of other’s interests.

We will write a custom Report on Various Ethical Theories Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For instance, someone may enjoy shooting to kill people who have not wronged him. If such a person is arrested and questioned about his acts, he may not have a valid reason for such criminal acts. The criminal may say that he only enjoys shooting to kill, that is, it is part of his hobby.

Generally, people find themselves doing things such as; doing drugs, over drinking and smoking, which are not useful. Psychological egoism theory does not criticize selfish human deeds since it perceives the selfish deeds as being beyond human control. An individual can be very loving and concerned also be a psychological egoist.

Didactic stories Didactic stories are stories with moral lessons which are mostly narrated to young children by an older person to impact a moral teaching in them. The use of didactic stories is a very effective method to impact moral lessons since the stories are very easy to memorize.

Some facts are very complex to explain, but when they are relayed in didactic stories form, they become so easy to understand. For instance, most children don’t understand what death is, but whenever there parent or teacher narrates a story of a dead dog, the story helps them to relate well to the subject matter which is death.

Stories can be relayed in various forms such as by the use of television, plays, books and many other forms.

Ethical virtues and ethics of conduct These theories analyses the human ethical guidelines. That is, they are mainly focused on the culture of how human beings are supposed to behave ethically. As human beings, we develop the strong desire to be virtuous beings. A virtuous individual is one who is morally upright hence people can bank their trust levels on him.

The society tends to judge a virtuous person as a ‘saint’ in such a way that this person is expected to uphold high levels of cleanliness, modesty and purity. The society sees a person who has committed a wrong act as a bad person and that who has committed a right act as a good person.

Reference List Nina, R. (2005). The Moral of the Story: An Introduction to Ethics, New York: McGraw-Hill.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Various Ethical Theories Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More

[supanova_question]

UK Juicers’ Brand Strategy Report (Assessment) college essay help near me

Introduction A brand refers to the entire experience customers have with the company and this refers to how they perceive the company products, how they will respond to changes in product features, introduction of new products, what the company says and delivers, its believes on what it can deliver to customers and above all the company personality as perceived by customers (Underhil 2000).

Branding also determines how customers’ rate a company with regard to other companies and how they receive and talk to its employees whenever they need assistance or when they are making purchases.

Every company has to stand out amid many competitors who have similar or even more sophisticated products than its products and services (Upshaw 1995). Evidence on how stiff competition is can be seen on the daily commercials appearing on television transmissions, radio, daily newspapers and even internet websites and through product promotions.

UK Juicers started operations as a small entity producing juice and selling as a retail outlet to customers within the neighborhood.

Management came to realize that customers were buying less of its juice products and on the other hand, they kept inquiring where the company had bought its juice blenders. The dwindling sales made management to strategize on re-branding and that called for a SWOT analysis.

UK Juicers’ Brand Strategy UK juicers is out to compete effectively against its competitors by offering the best services, in the customers’ eyes the company ensures reliability and quality. To begin with, the company has offered its customers a range of products to choose from in every category.

The categories available include Fruit and vegetable juicers, Citrus juicers, Wheatgrass juicers, blenders, food dryers, rebounders among others.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This list has products of very high quality in terms of performance and which do not breakdown so easily. Customers always want those products they are guaranteed will perform beyond their expectations and this is what UK Juicers is offering.

There is a 14-day money back guarantee in case the product does not serve its purpose effectively, this shows customers that products from this store are genuine and they will always make referrals to friends who could need similar produces.

The company ensures its products are always in stock, there is free delivery within UK which is made within the following day of making the purchase (Aaker 1991).

Branding gains According to Cross (2000), Companies are always fighting for customers and they make many offers to customers on a daily basis with hopes that customer will buy their products.

UK Juicers is not exceptional since the company offers customers a full package, which includes a dedicated line for customer care issues and an after sales service given free for six months and thereafter the company charges some fee for all servicing done.

The company relies mostly on online sales and there is has guaranteed a secure purchase system where customers will not lose their vital information to hackers and fraudsters. In case of repairs, the customer pays for purchase of the broken parts but fixing is done free of charge.

From the services customers receive, the customers enjoy the sales gains but the company on the other hand is the ultimate beneficiary with a large clientele who give it a massive stock movement every month.

We will write a custom Assessment on UK Juicers’ Brand Strategy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More These are some of the measures any company interested in creating a long-term customer relationship must do so that customers will know that the company is not ripping them off.

When a company starts selling products and customer numbers increase just like in the case of UK Juicers, that means the company has a brand and what is remaining is to know exactly the extent of that brand, how to grow it and leave a lasting impression (Bettman, 1979).

The brand experience from customers can be seen from the way they interact with employees and the frequency of their visits.

Building your brand Aaker (1995) notes that, to build a good brand, the company must carry out a SWOT analysis where management will analyze the company strengths and weaknesses. The major strength of UK Juicers is keeping its word to customers and this is the beginning point of building a good brand.

The company has taken care of weaknesses of branding like having inadequate stocks, selling items at varying price ranges and selling defective products. To build a good brand, one has to analyze opportunities and threats within the operating environment.

Threats to UK Juicers include physical retail stores like supermarkets of which have a limited clientele since they rely on customers who come to buy but are preferred by some customers because of the safety aspect associated with seeing the actual item one is purchasing.

The company has checked the threat of losing customers to competitors by selling high quality products, educating customers how to use them and that is why this company introduced and sells so much through its online trading platform since with this platform, consumers can buy items from everywhere, and they expect the company to carry out delivery within UK.

UK juicers has over the years has been trying carry out business differently from how its competitors do by seeking ways which effectively help to augment the power of its brand strategy to consumers. This has worked well by many customers giving feedback showing they have good feelings for the company products and services and wish it continued to extend the same services forever.

Not sure if you can write a paper on UK Juicers’ Brand Strategy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More To be able to have such an influence a company must know the strength of its brand vis-à-vis competitors’ and work smartly to outdo competitors in the hearts and minds of consumers. UK Juicers not only promises availability of products but also they are genuine, they serve the correct purpose and customers are educated on the services expected from items they wish to buy.

This will enable customers to buy the correct item that perfectly serves the reasons they need it. This brand strategy is very enticing, compelling and so attractive that the customer may not think of going anywhere else when he needs an item that UK Juicers has in stock.

In fact, some customers do ask for referrals in case they fail to find an item they need to buy but UK Juicers does not stock. Once you have a working brand strategy, enforce it throughout the company organizations and any other outlet stores where the company sales from.

This is perfected by UK Juicers by not only waiting for customers to come to the stores for their purchases and services but also the company works out deliveries and servicing is done in some select retail outlets affiliated to UK Juicers.

The brand is everything According to Azmi (2007), “a brand is the sum of the good, the bad, the ugly and the off-strategy” (p.16). He says that a brand is your most valuable product, employee and should be communicated through the best possible award winning advertisements since a bad advert can really kill an otherwise good brand (Walsh, 2002).

UK Juicers has perfected on this by first ensuring that it displays the products the company sells on its website and all the relevant documentation is available. This will assist customers to differentiate the various items in terms of service delivery and choose the best according to their needs.

The next step is to deliver as per the pledges the company makes to customers without fail or giving conflicting information from its various outlets.

The brand is conveyed through written information and what can be heard and seen as a commercial advert, it is therefore interpreted through personal feelings and emotions, and this depends on tastes and preferences of each person.

This means that you have no control at all over your brand, what you do is to help direct it positively so that it will create a good perception among customers. For instance, UK Juicers buys products directly from manufactures, analyzes each item to ensure that it is not defective and therefore the company guarantees quality.

The company goes as far as subcontracting professionals to educate clients on some selected complicated items, which require careful use, or else they could be damaged due to improper application.

Successful branding A good branding strategy begins by understanding your products well, the driving forces for success and any challenges anticipated to push sales. All employees must understand company policies and principles, make sure all brand details are correct and honest or else the company will find it hard to convince customers to buy its products.

Branding begins with guaranteeing quality and effective communication with clients (Azmi 2007). UK Juicers began by providing all the relevant information about its products online and offers excellent customer care services, which gives customers relevant information about various products so they can choose the best alternative. This leads to customer satisfaction and increases brand integrity.

All employees must know and understand the company values since it is from employees those values will be transferred to all those who interact with them.

The employees must consistently stick to the values accurately as is the case with UK Juicers where all employees know what is good for the customers and the company passes on these advantages to customers through the services it offers (Hair et al. 2003).

Research and brand strategy The main goal of any company is to do a comprehensive research and come up with products, which will help satisfy consumer needs. A company with disgruntled customers has a bleak future and could be in the process of losing out customers to competitors.

Good research will enable a company to have a winning brand strategy. This begins with an analysis of company products as per BCG model where the company analyzes products and classifies them to be either stars, cash cows, problem child or dogs (Kotler 1997).

UK Juicers has done research on its products and it has classified them accordingly. Most of its product lies within the category of stars and they drive the company revenue, the company carries out advertising on these products continuously with an aim of increasing sales and consumer awareness.

This has really boosted the brand awareness and royalty, consumers enjoy the company products and services, and this is a winning strategy that has the support of the entire company. The company does not stock defective products or slow moving items that will affect the brand royalty since the company policy is to sell quality items that customers prefer.

Your target customers and brand success Brand success begins with knowing your target customers and their preferences, their needs and desires and the product specifications that will satisfy those requirements. To be able to satisfy fully those requirements, management must carry out a comprehensive data collection exercise that will help sell products that fully meet the customer needs.

A proper classification of customers in terms of age, income, level of education and culture will enable the company to supply the correct products to the correct market segment; this will ensure that products are only sent to the correct market segment (Schroeder 2005).

The main advantage of segmentation is that it helps a company to maximize revenue from the different segments by offering specialized products for each customer segment.

Brand promise The brand preposition arises from a comprehensive branding research and usually states and explains to customers the reasons for buying our products and services. For UK Juicers, the brand promise, which the company has articulated to customers, is the promise on reliability and efficiency resulting from use of company products and services.

This enables customers to appreciate the brand promise, which must be well explained in a way customers will get to appreciate just as UK Juicers has done on its website, where there is a promise of reliability and efficiency as well as customer service and a dedicated line for customers to make calls in case they need assistance.

If the customers do not perceive the brand promise well, both new and existing customers will turn out to competitor products and services. That is why it is imperative to over-deliver just as UK Juicers does in that the customer comfort is always first.

A good SWOT analysis demands that you do not use same tactics like your competitor just because the same has worked perfectly well with your competitor, and the same appears, as it will work with your company.

That is your threat but to counter it, look for a better opportunity that happens to be a weakness on your competitor to counter that threat (Harvard Business Press 1999).

This strategy has worked well with UK Juicers by countering competitors indirectly and in a smart way through relying on delighted customers to help the company to grow.

Bad brand strategy makes some company management to announce that they are the best service provides or best provides of some equipment, which is a broad and non-directional brand strategy. UK juicers is specific in its promises to customers and those promises are easy to memories by customers and this is what a good brand promise is.

Brand strategy: customer’s first, money later According to Harvard Business Press (1999), it is always necessary to make sure that your customers are emotionally attached to your products and services, since this is the creation of the desire to buy UK Juicers products by the mere mention of the company name.

Such constructive emotions are built slowly through good branding between the company and the customer and arises though mutual understanding and trust. A good brand promise has the following values;

Well known by all business employees and constantly practiced

Should be consistently passed across on all advertisement content

Should be repeatedly worked out

Easy to adapt by all employees

Repeated continuously at the company and to the customers

Should create a lasting attachment with customers

Should be relevant to the current market needs

Should be in line with brand values

This notion of having customers first is ideal for a company just like UK Juicers, which values customers and will do what is necessary for customer safety and appreciation.

Conclusion Branding is the beginning point of the company’s success and to have a good brand, it is necessary that a company should carry out comprehensive research to determine winning brand strategies in the market but specifically with respect to the industry the company is operating in.

The customer is always right and the company should strive to make good this phrase by ensuring it has products, which serve the purpose to which the customer is buying them. This therefore means that the company needs to fully understand its strengths and weaknesses capitalize on the strengths and look for ways of managing and making the weaknesses become strengths.

The company also must exploit opportunities within the operating environment as this is what will help customers identify with its brand and this can be done by offering exceptional services and durable products which create an impression to customers. A proper analysis of environmental threats will also help in brand positioning (Berger et al. 2006).

Appendix: A graph showing juice consumption

Source: (Beverage Digest Company 2011)

Reference List Aaker, D.A., 1991. Managing Brand Equity. New York: The Free Press.

Aaker, D.A., 1995. Building Strong Brands. New York: Free Press.

Azmi, R.A., 2007. Business Ethics as Competitive Advantage for Companies in the Globalization Era. Journal of End User Computing, 14(3), pp.16-31.

Berger, J.A., Draganska, M. and Simonso, I., 2006. The Influence of Product Variety on Brand Perception and Choice Confusion. Journal of Consumer Affairs, 24(1), pp.170-189.

Beverage Digest Company, 2011. Beverage Consumption, (Online) Available at: (Access 29 May 2011).

Bettman, J.R., 1979. An Information Processing Theory of Consumer Choice. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.

Cross, G.S., 2000. An All-Consuming Century: Why Commercialism Won in Modern America. New York: Columbia University Press.

Hair, J.F., Babin, B., Money, A.H. and Samouel, P. (2003). Essentials of Business Research Methods. Hoboken, New Jersey: Wiley

[supanova_question]

Queen Victoria Building Essay online essay help: online essay help

George McRae is credited as the designer of the now famous Queen Victoria Building, popularly known as QVB. The building, completed in 1898, was constructed as a tribute to the ruling monarch when Sydney was undergoing a ruthless economic slump.

The complex structural design of the project was sketched in a manner such that the government could be able to hire jobless craftsmen such as plasterers, stonemasons, and stained window artistes to enable them make a decent income.

After its completion, the building initially hosted offices, coffee shops, showrooms, warehouses, and a recital hall. QVB also provided accommodation for a number of individuals engaged in commercial activities for example florists, mercers, tailors and hairdressers (IPOH, 2011, p.1). As time went by, the concert arena was modified to adopt new roles.

For example, a library and other offices were established and more occupants such as palmists, piano tuners, and clairvoyant moved in. Later on, the Sydney City Council occupied QVB after it underwent a major restructuring in 1930s.

Although the building was almost pulled down in 1959, it has emerged as a glorious building that reflects the initial dream of its designer and the excellent artistry of the artisans who worked tirelessly to construct it again (ibid. p.2).

QVB hosts over 148 boutiques, shops, restaurants, and cafes on the entire levels of the building (Sydney, 2011, p.1). The major parts of the building are made of magnificent stained glass windows and fabulous designs. The Sydney’s coat of arm, found on the cartwheel stained window, reflects the commercial activities sailing ships and the dolphins.

The symbols on the left side of the first panel symbolize architecture and the Sidney City Council whereas Ipoh Gardens Berhad, the company that renovated the building is represented on the third panel by letters IGB It is worth to note that several symbols were used to recognize those people who took part in the restoration of the building (IPOH, 2011, p.4).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There are also several symbols constructed outside the building. For example, there are statues representing Queen Victoria and the Royal Wishing Well erected on Town Hall Palace, outside the building (TravelOnline, 2011, p.4).

The building boasts of two huge mechanical clocks, the Royal Clock and the Great Australian Clock. Thus the Great Australian Clock is a symbol of social harmony among different cultural groups of people visiting the Queen Victoria Building (Sydney, 2011, p.5).

The building has a number of attractive restaurants that offer special services. For example, The Tea Room is one of the attractive places that one can visit to take tea. The restaurant boasts of highly qualified chefs that make delicious dishes served throughout the day under stained glass and towering ceilings.

The place can also be leased to people who plan to have private celebration at the place. Thus the Room has a limited number of seats (200). The Tearoom also has a pub that serves alcoholic drinks (Restaurant Information, 2011, p.1).

People visiting QVB are encouraged to tour the basement to learn about migration policies adopted by the city. The basement has a room where visitors are learn why Australia has been successful in promoting social integration between the native residents and immigrants.

Also part of the basement has food outlets that sell Asian delicacies. Commuter services are run by the government. The city has a broad network of bus services. For example, the white and blue buses are new and clean. The route number is prominently displayed in front and at the rear parts of the bus.

The major terminal points of these buses are located at Wynyard Park, Circular Quay, the rear side of the QVB and central Railway Station. Car rental services are also available at QVB. Operators such as Europcar, Budget, Hertz and Budget offer such services.

We will write a custom Essay on Queen Victoria Building specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More During my tour, I observed that majority of the visitors preferred to use public transport because it costs less compared to private means. I noted that car-parking services run by QVB are very expensive despite the fact that the fee varies with time.

For example, you can park his car for $17 as long as you do it before 10AM and exit the parking bay before 7PM. For those who leave a minute late, they pay the daily rate, pegged at $43. However, the parking fee is usually lower (between $14 and $24) during weekends and evenings (Perica, 2005, p.5).

The Queen Victoria Building is regarded among the culturally famous sites that are visited my people from all over the world. I visited the building on one Sunday afternoon and got first-hand experience about the significance of QVB to the City and those who visited it.

For example, I went to Paddy’s Market and counted over 100 people from all walks of life trying to buy souvenirs to take home.

However, I discovered that many of the visitors went there to window shop rather than buy because most of the genuine Aboriginal sculptures, hand-made traditional paintings and Aboriginal didgeridoos are very costly and limited in supply. A few of them were however able to buy several cheaper souvenirs to take home as memento (Sydney, 2011, p.4).

I also learned that QVB is home to several major calendar and festival events that take place every year. Family celebrations such as wedding anniversaries and birthdays are usually common phenomena at QVB. There also several outlets within and around QVB that sell multicultural delicacies that are affordable and in plenty of supply (Sydney, 2011, p.5).

QVB has an ample road infrastructure that facilitates easy movements of the visitors to the site and other major commercial and recreational centers within the Sydney City.

There are two shopping malls, Westfield and Myer to the north, and Gallery Victoria on the eastern part of the east, linked to the building through the underground pedestrian passageway. There is also a bridge than enables pedestrian to enter any of the four doorways of the QVB from the Sydney Hilton.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Queen Victoria Building by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The building was erected in late 19th century. After its completion, the building was assigned the name Queen Victoria Markets in 1897 as an honour to Queen Victoria who was commemorating her Diamond Jubilee. However, the name of the building was later changed in 1918 to Queen Victoria Building (Perica, 2005, p.6).

The other day I was observing the customers of Salvatore Ferragamo and counted the number of people who did window shopping and real shopping, I saw a mother and her teen daughter who were moving around, doing some window shopping.

The daughter spent over two hours trying on shoes, only to inform the salesclerk, “Thanks, but no thanks.” She told the salesclerk she was leaving the store and that she was going to buy similar shoes at Amazon and spent $22 less on the pair (Kirkwood, 2010, p.3).

The mother remained silent but when they left the store, she went ballistic. She felt her daughter had wasted a lot of time sampling shoes, then not buying anything. The mother believed that the time wasted on window shopping by her daughter could have been used by the stores clerk assist someone who was willing to buy one of the Salvatore Ferragamo products.

It is apparent that the daughter refused to buy the shoes because it is much cheaper procuring the same pair from online sites such as eBay than from a shop (Kirkwood, 2010, p.4). This incident reveals that majority of young people in this age are techno savvy.

Online shopping has not only emerged as the most ideal way to procure goods but also goods and services cost less. From my observation, it is window shopping is a tiresome and time consuming activity and a shopper may end up not getting what he intended to buy.

Moreover, stores clerks sometimes do not help shoppers to locate what they want to buy. On the other hand, online shopping sites such as eBay offer a variety of services that satisfy the needs of shoppers.

Besides, online shopping enables a shopper to compare prices tags of the same product offered by different online shops from the comfort of a chair. Also, online shopping enables a buyer to purchase products from any region in the world (Kirkwood, 2010, p.5).

I also observed a number of shoppers using their mobile phones to communicate with their friends. Majority of them were either sending text message or surfing the internet. A few of them made calls. The advent of modern technology could be the reason why most people prefer to text and surf using their advanced phones as opposed to calling.

Since their inception, mobile phones have evolved tremendously since the turn of the century. Nowadays, individuals can used their sophisticated gadgets to text, surf the web, navigate using the GPS function, and interest with their peers through social networking sites such as face book and twitter.

Smartphone such as the iPhone are currently playing the lead role in this aspect. These phones have computer-like operating system that can manage all sorts of applications such as games applications, Twitter, Facebook, shopping assistants, restaurant guides, and more.

Traditional mobile phones are not accumulating dust, though. Scores of of the newest models have large displays, keyboards, and Internet capabilities. Their applications and e-mail and are not as developed when compared to smart phones, but they’re easy to use (Consumer Report, 2010, p.5).

There are several things to be considered before buying a phone. For example, you may consider the service provider because they help to ascertain the type of the cell phone that is compatible with the local network.

So when you’re swapping your cell phone, make use of this cell phone guide to aid you make a decision on whether to keep your present mobile service provider or switch to a new one. Main carriers rely greatly on two irreconcilable digital networks.

Verizon and Sprint networks employ mainly Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) platform, whereas AT

[supanova_question]

Ineffectiveness of International Law in Combating Crime Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Introduction At the end of the Second World War, one of the vital goals of the victorious allied powers was to make international law efficient to help uphold world peace. The unlawful invasions and killings perpetrated by the Hitler regime were so despicable that the temptation was immense simply to apprehend Nazi leaders and have them shot.

This, in fact, was an early British suggestion that possibly would have been approved by Stalin but it was not acceptable to the United States. Contrary to some popular misconceptions, war-crime trials were never intended as victor’s revenge over a vanquished enemy.

The leading juridical drafters of the trials, highly respected Justice Robert M. Jackson, on leave from the Supreme Court to become America’s Chief Prosecutor, re-affirmed the rule of law as he opened the trial before the International Military Tribunal (IMT) at Nuremberg in 1945.

The four great nations, flushed with triumph and stung with damage, avoided the hand of retaliation and willingly submitted their captive enemies to the verdict of the law. The Charter of the United Nations proclaimed the goals of saving succeeding generations from the plague of war, promoting human rights, justice and respect for international law. The Nuremberg trials were a basis of the vast endeavor to make peace.

In Jackson’s observation, it was the high time for making war less attractive to those who held the fate of people in their authority and protect people from domestic repression, violence and aggression. This was aimed at making all men answerable to law and ensuring that those who start a war will pay for it in person.

Ineffectiveness of International Law in Combating Crime The Role of Force

There is no integrated structure of sanctions in international law in the sense that there is in municipal law, but there are situations in which the use of force is regarded as justified and legal. Inside the UN’s structure, the Security Council perhaps may apply sanction after fortifying a menace to tranquility, infringement or act of belligerence.

Such permissions could be gainful for instance those declared in 1966 against Rhodesia, or armed action as in the Korean warfare in 1950, or certainly both, as in 1990 against Iraq.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Coercive power within the precincts of the UN is unusual, as it entails synchronization amongst the five lasting affiliates of the defense committee and this obviously demands an issue not considered by some of the grand authorities as bullying their crucial benefits. Apart from such institutional sanctions, one may note the bunch of rights in taking aggressive action known as self-help.

This procedure of resorting to power for guarding certain rights is characteristic of uncivilized system of law with blood feuds, but in the domestic legal order, such procedures and methods are within the restricted control of the recognized authority.

In such cases, the States themselves choose whether to take action and if so, the extent of their measures and there is no ultimate body to rule on their legitimacy or otherwise, in the absence of an assessment by the International Court of Justice, acceptable to both parties, although International Law does put down appropriate rules.

Since one cannot ascertain the nature of International Law by reference to a definition of law mediated upon sanctions, the character of the international legal order has to be examined in order to seek to and find out whether in fact States feel indebted to comply with the rules of global decree and if so why.

If indeed the response to the earliest query is depressing, that States do not think there is need to act in accordance with such rules, then there does not subsist any structure of global law creditable to the name (Pellet, 1992).

The International System

The importance of finding out depend upon the distinctive aspect s of the global structure in the sagacity of the system of affairs existing principally, if not wholly, between States that are aware of certain ordinary principles and ways of life.

While the legal structure within all but the most ancient societies is in pecking order and authority is perpendicular, the global organization is parallel, consisting of over 190 sovereign nations, identical in lawful theory, in that all posses the features of self-sufficiency, and distinguishing no one is in authority over them. Individuals only have the alternative as to whether to abide by the law or not.

We will write a custom Essay on Ineffectiveness of International Law in Combating Crime specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They are never involved in designing the law (Warson, 1992). Particular institutions do that. In global law, conversely, the states themselves create the law and obey or violate it.

This evidently has substantial ramification with reference to the sources of regulation over and above the techniques for enforcing acknowledged permissible rules. Global law is mainly formulated by global contract, which generates rules binding the parties and customary rules, which are fundamentally State practices accepted by the community at large as laying down patterns of behavior that have to be complied with.

Conversely, it perhaps alleged that since nations themselves sign treaties and engage in action that they may not regard as legally mandatory, international law would appear to consist of a series of rules from which States may select (Berderman, 2001).

Converse to accepted principle, nations do obey global declarations, and desecrations are to some extent intermittent.

Nevertheless, just as incidents of assassination, burglary and rape do occur within national legal guidelines without destroying the system as such, so similarly assaults upon global legal rules highlight the limitations of the structure without condescending their legality or their requirement. Consequently, regardless of the exceptional nasty contravention, the gigantic immensity of the requirements of global regulations is pursued.

Conclusion One cannot fail to notice the task of consent in global law. To identify its limits is not to disregard its magnitude. Much of global law is composed of states overtly in favor of definite normative standards, apparently by entering into treaties. This cannot be curtailed.

Nonetheless, it is preferable to consider consent as significant not only with regard to specific rules accepted, which is not the sum total of global law, but in the light of the approach of states commonly to the entirety of rules, appreciative, patterns of behavior and formations sustaining and representing the global system.

In an expansive logic, states accept or consent to the general structure of global law, for in actuality without such systems they could perhaps not function. It is this advancement, which may be illustrated as consent or the crucial summarize within which the stipulation of an individual state sanction is transformed into community acceptance.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ineffectiveness of International Law in Combating Crime by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More References Berderman, D (2001). International law in antiquity: Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Pellet, A. (1992). The normative dilemma: Will and consent in international law-making, 12 Australian YIL. Sydney: Butterworth.

Warson, J. (1992). State consent and the sources of international obligation: Pasil. New York, NY: Prentice Hall.

[supanova_question]

Marketing efforts and consumer needs Report (Assessment) college admission essay help

Table of Contents Personality

Culture and Consumer Behavior

Attitude as a Predictor of Behavior

Unethical issues: marketers taking advantage of consumers

References

Consumer needs are the effects that consumers require. This does not imply that the consumers can not necessarily do without these commodities.

Some of the commonly identified needs of consumers include food, shelter, clothing and medical care: these elements form the basis of the lives of consumers which as a result make them top priority necessities in consumers’ lives.

Any particular consumer will thus be forced to go for these goods and services in order to sustain life. They are more like things that people can not do without.

Marketing is the act of promoting the level of sales of a commodity. Whether the commodity is a good or a service, the marketing process will seek to influence consumers into using that particular good or service that is being marketed.

One of the main objectives of marketing initiatives involves the provision of information of a commodity which in turn helps to increase the number of consumers who are willing to try out that commodity and ultimately the level of sales is likely to increase.

The fact that marketing is a step to promote a commodity into satisfaction of needs thus illustrates that needs pre-exist marketing. Marketing efforts can therefore not change consumers’ needs because these needs must be satisfied with or without marketing.

A consumer who is hungry at a particular time will have to look for food to eat whether there is a marketing initiative or not, unless if the consumer is constrained to temporarily sacrifice the need to satisfy the hunger.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Similarly, once the person has satisfied the hunger, it will not be possible to be immediately hungry because of a marketing initiative carried out after his/her satisfaction. Marketing efforts can similarly not arouse customer needs because the needs are primarily aroused by the human body.

Personality Personality is defined as the way an individual behaves in regard to his or her environment. This response is a factor that depends on two elements. The first element of personality is the general social aspects that surround the person. Such social aspects constitute external factors around an individual consumer.

The factors are therefore shared by a group of consumers in a given society of geographical location. Peer influence or advertisements can thus form the basis of an individual’s personality. The other element of personality is, on the other hand, genetic.

Personality acquired genetically can be said to be features that are acquired by an individual from his or her parents biologically through the recreational process. This aspect of personality is thus permanent in an individual as a character and cannot be changed.

Segmentation refers to the classification of subjects into groups based on common features. Segmentation will therefore pick out specific features that are directly identifiable among the individuals or more specifically in potential consumers.

Personality is however diverse and combines all environmental factors around an individual as well as biological factors. This means that each and every person will pose an overall difference in personality thus providing no basis for segmentation.

Basis for segmentation can however be attained through consideration of individual features, both biological and environmental, that constitute an individual’s personality. The two bases of consumer personality also lead to diverse orientation of consumers.

We will write a custom Assessment on Marketing efforts and consumer needs specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A customer will either be oriented towards products or services with a general trend of biasness towards a particular product or a biasness with respect to relations developed with the source of the product.

Such binary biasness is also based on diverse elements of personality that must be considered independently. Personality is therefore not a sufficient tool for segmentation.

Culture and Consumer Behavior Culture refers to the particular approach that is taken by individuals in a society when handling issues. A society can be an ethical set up or a territorial set up such as a country. Once an individual is born in a society, the individual grows to adopt the norms of that society.

A country’s culture therefore refers to a culture that is widely practiced in a given country and one that has much influence on the behavior of people from that country. The role of culture in a customer’s behavior is a key to understanding the marketing profession because it is significant to the success of a marketing strategy.

A marketing strategy can either bear fruits or be ineffective due to factors in a particular market with culture being one of those factors. Culture defines and shapes what people consume due to the moral values that it instills on people.

Christians will, for example, not purchase Muslim religious attires because they are opposed to the Muslim faith. An understanding of the role played by a consumer’s culture is thus essential to a marketer to help in the identification of the basis of that culture for a better approach to engaging the culture, if that is at all possible.

Understanding the culture of a consumer in a market can also help a marketer to make appropriate strategies. Appropriate strategies will seek to bring out the reason for a culture prohibiting the use of a given commodity after which appropriate measures can be taken to counter such values.

A marketer who intends to explore a foreign market is thus advised to seek a clear understanding of the foreign culture because it will determine the level of possible marketing success.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Marketing efforts and consumer needs by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Attitude as a Predictor of Behavior An individual’s attitude refers to the state of mind towards a particular subject. It is the position that an individual holds at a particular time. A consumer’s attitude over a commodity can, for instance, be to take a step into the acquisition of a commodity.

Consumer behavior on the other hand refers to the particular action that a consumer takes. This action is shaped by the attitude that is developed by the consumer over a commodity as well as the constraining factors to the attainment of the consumer’s attitudes.

The extent to which attitude predicts behavior is thus a factor of the constraining elements to the satisfaction of what an individual might desire to undertake. It is however realized that consumer behavior is not at least always in line with their behavior.

There is often a realized discrepancy between attitudes and behavior of consumers based on a number of reasons. One of the factors that cause the discrepancy is the ability of a consumer to act according to his or her attitudes.

A consumer may for example develop a desire for a newly introduced brand of vehicle and long to purchase it. Lack of finances will however prevent the individual from purchasing that particular vehicle.

The range of other demands can also increase the gap between attitude and behavior as an individual can prefer to satisfy more pressing needs contrary to purchasing the brand of vehicle that he/she wishes to. Social influence can also hinder a person from implementing attitudes.

Conflicts of interest between individuals’ desires and norms of a society can for instance force the individual to make sacrifices for compatibility with the society’s norms. Attitudes are thus not a strong predictor of behavior due to the other factors that affect behavior.

Unethical issues: marketers taking advantage of consumers The desire of commercial institutions to ensure sales of their commodities has seen the emergence of measures to increase their sales at the cost of the consumers. Some marketers have for example resorted to capitalizing on weaknesses of consumers to take advantage of them and influence them into making purchases.

One of these advances is the move to target children as consumers. The marketers having learnt that children are not yet steady decision makers have increased products for this category of consumers and even established advertisements to influence children into the products.

Children then pressurize their parents or guardians to purchase these commodities or even turn to stealing in order to make the purchases. Some marketers also rely on weaknesses of consumers in order to develop market for their products.

Products such as drugs like tobacco and alcohol are for example generally restricted in societies especially for under age groups. Marketers however continue to make advancements for the increased consumption of such products and even take advantage of addicted individuals as market targets.

Pressurizing consumers into making decisions contrary to their opinions is also a common unethical practice that individual marketers use to influence consumers. A marketer will for example study an individual to identify their weaknesses which the marketer then capitalizes on.

The marketer then uses his or her skills to convince the potential consumer into a regrettable decision. These unethical approaches can be controlled by a joint initiative from consumers, government authorities as well as producers under social responsibility.

The government can also institute regulations to enhance consumer protection while producers can adopt fair techniques for their marketers. Consumers can on the other hand rely more on personal information contrary to that of marketers.

References Beamish, K

[supanova_question]

Marketing efforts and consumer needs Report (Assessment) essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Personality

Culture and Consumer Behavior

Attitude as a Predictor of Behavior

Unethical issues: marketers taking advantage of consumers

References

Consumer needs are the effects that consumers require. This does not imply that the consumers can not necessarily do without these commodities.

Some of the commonly identified needs of consumers include food, shelter, clothing and medical care: these elements form the basis of the lives of consumers which as a result make them top priority necessities in consumers’ lives.

Any particular consumer will thus be forced to go for these goods and services in order to sustain life. They are more like things that people can not do without.

Marketing is the act of promoting the level of sales of a commodity. Whether the commodity is a good or a service, the marketing process will seek to influence consumers into using that particular good or service that is being marketed.

One of the main objectives of marketing initiatives involves the provision of information of a commodity which in turn helps to increase the number of consumers who are willing to try out that commodity and ultimately the level of sales is likely to increase.

The fact that marketing is a step to promote a commodity into satisfaction of needs thus illustrates that needs pre-exist marketing. Marketing efforts can therefore not change consumers’ needs because these needs must be satisfied with or without marketing.

A consumer who is hungry at a particular time will have to look for food to eat whether there is a marketing initiative or not, unless if the consumer is constrained to temporarily sacrifice the need to satisfy the hunger.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Similarly, once the person has satisfied the hunger, it will not be possible to be immediately hungry because of a marketing initiative carried out after his/her satisfaction. Marketing efforts can similarly not arouse customer needs because the needs are primarily aroused by the human body.

Personality Personality is defined as the way an individual behaves in regard to his or her environment. This response is a factor that depends on two elements. The first element of personality is the general social aspects that surround the person. Such social aspects constitute external factors around an individual consumer.

The factors are therefore shared by a group of consumers in a given society of geographical location. Peer influence or advertisements can thus form the basis of an individual’s personality. The other element of personality is, on the other hand, genetic.

Personality acquired genetically can be said to be features that are acquired by an individual from his or her parents biologically through the recreational process. This aspect of personality is thus permanent in an individual as a character and cannot be changed.

Segmentation refers to the classification of subjects into groups based on common features. Segmentation will therefore pick out specific features that are directly identifiable among the individuals or more specifically in potential consumers.

Personality is however diverse and combines all environmental factors around an individual as well as biological factors. This means that each and every person will pose an overall difference in personality thus providing no basis for segmentation.

Basis for segmentation can however be attained through consideration of individual features, both biological and environmental, that constitute an individual’s personality. The two bases of consumer personality also lead to diverse orientation of consumers.

We will write a custom Assessment on Marketing efforts and consumer needs specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A customer will either be oriented towards products or services with a general trend of biasness towards a particular product or a biasness with respect to relations developed with the source of the product.

Such binary biasness is also based on diverse elements of personality that must be considered independently. Personality is therefore not a sufficient tool for segmentation.

Culture and Consumer Behavior Culture refers to the particular approach that is taken by individuals in a society when handling issues. A society can be an ethical set up or a territorial set up such as a country. Once an individual is born in a society, the individual grows to adopt the norms of that society.

A country’s culture therefore refers to a culture that is widely practiced in a given country and one that has much influence on the behavior of people from that country. The role of culture in a customer’s behavior is a key to understanding the marketing profession because it is significant to the success of a marketing strategy.

A marketing strategy can either bear fruits or be ineffective due to factors in a particular market with culture being one of those factors. Culture defines and shapes what people consume due to the moral values that it instills on people.

Christians will, for example, not purchase Muslim religious attires because they are opposed to the Muslim faith. An understanding of the role played by a consumer’s culture is thus essential to a marketer to help in the identification of the basis of that culture for a better approach to engaging the culture, if that is at all possible.

Understanding the culture of a consumer in a market can also help a marketer to make appropriate strategies. Appropriate strategies will seek to bring out the reason for a culture prohibiting the use of a given commodity after which appropriate measures can be taken to counter such values.

A marketer who intends to explore a foreign market is thus advised to seek a clear understanding of the foreign culture because it will determine the level of possible marketing success.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Marketing efforts and consumer needs by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Attitude as a Predictor of Behavior An individual’s attitude refers to the state of mind towards a particular subject. It is the position that an individual holds at a particular time. A consumer’s attitude over a commodity can, for instance, be to take a step into the acquisition of a commodity.

Consumer behavior on the other hand refers to the particular action that a consumer takes. This action is shaped by the attitude that is developed by the consumer over a commodity as well as the constraining factors to the attainment of the consumer’s attitudes.

The extent to which attitude predicts behavior is thus a factor of the constraining elements to the satisfaction of what an individual might desire to undertake. It is however realized that consumer behavior is not at least always in line with their behavior.

There is often a realized discrepancy between attitudes and behavior of consumers based on a number of reasons. One of the factors that cause the discrepancy is the ability of a consumer to act according to his or her attitudes.

A consumer may for example develop a desire for a newly introduced brand of vehicle and long to purchase it. Lack of finances will however prevent the individual from purchasing that particular vehicle.

The range of other demands can also increase the gap between attitude and behavior as an individual can prefer to satisfy more pressing needs contrary to purchasing the brand of vehicle that he/she wishes to. Social influence can also hinder a person from implementing attitudes.

Conflicts of interest between individuals’ desires and norms of a society can for instance force the individual to make sacrifices for compatibility with the society’s norms. Attitudes are thus not a strong predictor of behavior due to the other factors that affect behavior.

Unethical issues: marketers taking advantage of consumers The desire of commercial institutions to ensure sales of their commodities has seen the emergence of measures to increase their sales at the cost of the consumers. Some marketers have for example resorted to capitalizing on weaknesses of consumers to take advantage of them and influence them into making purchases.

One of these advances is the move to target children as consumers. The marketers having learnt that children are not yet steady decision makers have increased products for this category of consumers and even established advertisements to influence children into the products.

Children then pressurize their parents or guardians to purchase these commodities or even turn to stealing in order to make the purchases. Some marketers also rely on weaknesses of consumers in order to develop market for their products.

Products such as drugs like tobacco and alcohol are for example generally restricted in societies especially for under age groups. Marketers however continue to make advancements for the increased consumption of such products and even take advantage of addicted individuals as market targets.

Pressurizing consumers into making decisions contrary to their opinions is also a common unethical practice that individual marketers use to influence consumers. A marketer will for example study an individual to identify their weaknesses which the marketer then capitalizes on.

The marketer then uses his or her skills to convince the potential consumer into a regrettable decision. These unethical approaches can be controlled by a joint initiative from consumers, government authorities as well as producers under social responsibility.

The government can also institute regulations to enhance consumer protection while producers can adopt fair techniques for their marketers. Consumers can on the other hand rely more on personal information contrary to that of marketers.

References Beamish, K

[supanova_question]

Red Eye Effect and Animal Eyes Essay a level english language essay help

Red-eye that appears in most flash photos is a common problem today. At the back of the eye, retina reflects flash light emanating from camera. This type of reflection is one of the major causes of red-eye in flash pictures.

Additionally, red-eye in photos may appear due to larger surface area provided by iris when in low-light environment (Sollars et al. 603). It is worth pointing out that individuals who take photographs normally use flash when in low-light conditions and as such the surface area provided by iris may cause red-eye effect.

The emergence of digital photo technology is yet another reason why red-eye appears in flash photos (Sollars et al. 603). It can be attributed to a small or lack of space for films and internal mechanics compared to other cameras that use films. It is also important to note that a digital camera has its lens closer to the flash.

Consequently, when a picture is taken using a flash, the red-eye occurs since reflection from the iris part of the eye takes place when flash enters it. Thereafter, the reflected light goes back to the camera.

Today, most digital shoot and new point cameras being used have been modified in such a way that lens is situated right below and close to the flash. This enhances red-eye.

Furthermore, lack of tapeum lucidum is another known cause of red-eye in photos. Color pigment found in epithelium of retina gives out the fundus color which in effect causes red eye. Reflection of the flashlight by the fundus is recorded in the camera.

Most cameras lack an option for eliminating red eye (Rosolen et al. 145). Similar to digital cameras, they do not have room for adding an external flash away from the camera for lack of a hot shoe.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The reduction feature found in most cameras today cannot fully eliminate the red-eye problem even with a pre flash prior to image exposure by the camera. The reduction feature only causes the actual picture to have a small iris.

Discuss why animal eyes glow green when illuminated at night. Animal eyes have cone and rods. These are important light receptors that help them in dim light conditions to function well. At night, nocturnal animals which are usually known have less cones and more rods are able to visualize motions and gather light for easy navigation from distant sources such as stars and moon (Sollars et al. 603).

The reason why green color is seen when light illuminates their eyes is due to the membrane at the back of their eyes which resembles a mirror. The spooky eye shine is a glow in the eye when bright light is shone through their eyes.

Besides,the strength of light reflected tends to be higher than its normal strength when originating from retina due to the tapetum lucidum (Rosolen et al. 145). This reflection from the tapestry of cells enhances vision of animals and appears green under spotlight. Different animals exhibit varying colors when tapetum is reflected.

Additionally, it is important to note that not all light that enters eyes are absorbed into retina. However, an animal uses what has been absorbed and reflected back from tapestry of cells to manage vision. At night, animals gather light from distant illuminating objects sources such as stars and moon.

The very light is reflected in the retina to enable night vision. The ricocheting of that light during illumination of animals’ eyes at night is seen as green color (Rosolen et al. 145).

Works Cited Rosolen, Serge G. et al. “The ERG of the beagle dog: evidence associating a post b- wave negativity with the tapetum lucidum.” Documenta Ophthalmologica 110.2- 3 (2005): 145.

We will write a custom Essay on Red Eye Effect and Animal Eyes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Sollars, Patricia et al. “Melanopsin and non-melanopsin expressing retinal ganglion cells innervate the hypothalamic suprachiasmatic nucleus.” Visual Neuroscience 20.6 (2003): 601-610.

[supanova_question]

Early Childhood Education and Special Education Essay college essay help

Table of Contents Academic Goal for the Students

Strategies for the Implementation of the Goal

Students with Special needs

Works Cited

Academic Goal for the Students Early childhood education is a form of teaching that is offered to children at a very young age away from their families. It includes the normal care that is normally offered to the children at their respective homes. This education is normally offered as a prerequisite to the formal education system. Special education is on the other hand offered to students with identified special needs.

The results that have revealed an overall below average performance by students call for measures to help the students in improving their performance. This is because the foundation that they lay at this level of education in their lives will most likely affect their capacity to handle academics at higher levels.

My academic goal for the students is thus to improve their academic performance. My choice of goal is based on the increasingly competitive economies that require competence for career success. I thus believe that a better foundation for the students would be better intellectual capacity with respect to academics right from their young age.

Strategies for the Implementation of the Goal My strategy for implementing my objectives over the children is based on an outline that I believe will yield the best result for the students. The first step that I will undertake with respect to attaining the objective will be the formulation of the goal. The first stage of formulation of the goal will be the explicit outlining of the desired goal in writing.

Following a deeper analysis of the capacity of the students, specific targets will be set for individual students with the aim of motivating them to higher performance. This step will be aimed at maintaining focus over the desired results. The outlining of the objective will be presented in positive terms in order of improving the grades of the students. This is because negative presentations are realized to demoralized individuals.

The goals that are going to be set will be feasible with respect to the capacity of the students. With this respect, a proper review of the students will be undertaken with the aim of estimating their range of performance capacity. Another important aspect of the formulation will be personalization of the objective.

The assumption that attainment of the set targets will be my achievement rather than the success of the students will be a motivation not only to improve my efforts in teaching but also to focus on each student so that the desired success may be achieved (Academic 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Specification of the goal will be made to clearly indicate the set objective that will also help in monitoring the success made with respect to the set goal. Such statement of specification will then be kept not only for the assessment of progress in the current year but also in the future so as to help in developing a strong academic basis for other students.

Though a review of the results and the students’ capacities will be considered in formulating the goal target, opinion held by other stake holders as well as personal instinct regarding what is best for the students will be considered before the final decision into implementing the goal is undertaken.

If at all the goal is implemented but no significant achievement is realized by the second month of the year, reconsideration will be made with respect to the set objectives and the mode of implementation of the goals. There will however be no alternative considerations of abolishing the goal.

Adoption of different approaches will be employed such as the involvement of all stake holders to ensure that the academic interest of the students is well preserved.

Students with Special needs There are a number of disabilities that have been identified among students in the institution. Such disabilities range from medical factors such as retardation to seasonal medical complications such as allergies. There are also emotional, mental and physical disabilities that are realized.

All these disability have in particular ways and to varying degrees been causing challenges with respect to the academic environment of the student. The major challenge that I have encountered with the students is effect of these complications have on their capacity in class.

Due to the effects of their complications, not all students, they are either forced to be out of school or to lose concentration whenever they are affected by their conditions. This is particularly challenging because as a teacher, one must assume the primary role of taking care of these complications when they arise in school.

We will write a custom Essay on Early Childhood Education and Special Education specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The challenge is even more complicated when there is no extra teacher available at the moment because a dual responsibility is then instituted, that of taking care of the complication and that of ensuring that the remaining group of students are neither distracted nor affected by the problem. The strategy that I have often developed to help me deal with the challenge has been to assign another teacher the class while I attend to the complication.

If there is no available teacher then I talk to the students and make them understand that I need to attend to the issue and assign a role leadership to one of them to help them control themselves as I am absorbed in the complication. The strategy of paying personal attention to the students with complications have helped them to understand that they are accepted in the society and also helped the other students to learn that their fellows who have complications require special attention.

The results have been that whenever such complications arise, students show concerns to the affected individual rather that running away. The strategy can thus be identified to have eliminated stigmatization that could have otherwise developed among the students over their colleagues who suffer from disabilities.

Such impact on the students was impacted by the level of care that the students saw me practicing and which they imitated. The care that was adopted by the students was one day realized when a student collapsed and one of the students was quick to assume the role of a teacher giving first aid though I was just few meters away.

Following the success of my approach to handling the student with special needs that has influenced other students to accept their colleagues with special needs, I do not wish to handle the student in any particular different way. The main reason why I would not adopt a different approach is the potential instability that might be induced on the students.

A change in approach may be interpreted by the students as change in how they are perceived. This may make them feel stigmatized against and even induced stigmatization from other students (Childcare 3).

Works Cited Academic. “Setting and reaching academic goals”. Academic developments, n.d. Web.

Childcare. “Caring for the children with special needs”. Child Care Law, 2011. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Early Childhood Education and Special Education by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More

[supanova_question]

Hitler’s Rise to Power Term Paper college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Mein Kampf

Jews and Communists

German Capitalists

Hitler’s Voting Triumph

Hyperinflation

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Hitler had unexceptional political vocation in World War I. However, by 1930s, he had turned out to be a powerful person in Germany. There is no specific factor that can be attributed to the rise of Hitler, but a variety of factors that happened either subsequently or concurrently. Investigators responded to queries concerning aspects that gave rise to Hitler’s regime in Germany.

The Great Depression is observed as an overriding cause that gave rise to the fallen dictator, Hitler. The agreement made at Versailles was forced by allied authorities on Germany in which Germany was to bear weighty war damages. Joint authorities engraved their own regions of control inside Germany by inhabiting particular provinces.

The disappointment of Germany to recompense war damages from time to time led to armed battle. The Treaty of Versailles argued in editorial 232 that “The associated and connected administrations postulated that Germany should accept and facilitate payment for all injuries done to the national inhabitants of the united and connected authorities and to their belongings during the episode of the belligerency” (Anon 45).

At the time when the government began publishing receipts, hyperinflation ruined the German financial system. The Great Depression was an influential occasion that piloted the rise of Hitler. Hitler achieved massive civic backing subsequent to his tryout after the collapse of the Munich Putsch regime in 1923.

He spent some months in prison where he held the opinion that the only method to seize authority was to operate within the organization. Moreover Hitler did not take pleasure in supporting the German privileged class that vetoed his collapse at that echelon.

Mein Kampf Through the 1930s, Hitler’s enigmatic individuality and talking had given him the support of the German military and manufacturing zone. Hitler’s publication Mein Kampf turned out to be an outline for his philosophy of abhorrence and discrimination.

He accused Jews, communal Democrats and Communists as being opponents of the German state. In the book, Hitler argues that “In the congregation of those years, particularly the exterior of Munich, there were five, six, seven, and eight hundred challengers to fifteen or sixteen public Socialists” (Hitler 45).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He eulogizes the courageousness of the Nazi party in opposition to collective hooligans “And it came to pass more than once that numerous party friends had courageously tussled their way to triumph in opposition to a boisterous thrashing predominance” (Hitler 45). The Nazi party was proscribed in the 1920s as it knocked out.

Hitler’s astounding talent as a demagogue was central to the endurance of the nationwide Leninist Party. These dexterities enabled him to rise to power as he attended to the multitudes in panic. Hitler was a brilliant raconteur as he took a trip in Germany stirring the populace and faulting scapegoats for the inadequacies of the German state.

He formed a bogus sagacity of optimism and certainty in the capacity of the German state to develop similar to a phoenix from the vestiges. Hitler pronounced in the Mein Kampf that “an activist who exhibits the talent to pass on an initiative to the broad masses should constantly be a psychologist, even if he was merely a demagogue.” He believed that leading implies being competent to stir masses (Hitler 65).

The Great Depression provided a channel for leading numerous German electorates to turn to Hitler. The German leader Stresemann’s strategies were endorsed by German individuals prior to the Great Depression as the financial system benefited from extensive expansion.

Conversely, the Great Depression made various citizens to cast their votes to Hitler due to his pledges and potentials. Jews were a suitable scapegoat for the financial predicaments of Germany. Anti Semitism was on the increase following high-ranking posts assumed by Jews as the monetary circumstances in Germany deteriorated. German civilization too contributed to the growth of Hitler. German academicians and musicians such as Hegel had advocated for the qualities of German intrepidness.

The country was to be respected just like a faith by the masses. Allegiance to the state and surrender was overestimated, something that predisposed the facts and thinking of Hitler. Acton Hegel observed that this reason took part in such a huge division in the contemporary world that “the folks and chronological institutions were no longer competent for nourishing people’s uppermost adherence” (Acton 213).

Henrich von Treitschke, a German logician argues that another reason that led to the rise of Hitler was the shame subjected to the background of Hitler as he described the conformity of the masses as imperative for the constancy of a state like Germany.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Hitler’s Rise to Power specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Friedrich Nietzsche’s viewpoint necessitated the introduction of a race that could generate a sturdy and affluent state. German militarism was never a new incident as the 18th and 19th centuries witnessed soldiers such as Frederick III build Prussia that formed the base on which contemporary Germany was built. Prussia’s armed customs were founded on obedience and stringent following of customary principles.

Jews and Communists Conventionally in Germany, Jews had been hated on foundations of spiritual and cultural labelling. Jews assumed posts of authority in economic organizations such as reservoirs. They had a background and beliefs that were divergent from other Germans.

Majority of Germans alleged that the Jews were more dedicated to their belief as opposed to the state. Judaism was perceived to be diverse and unfamiliar to the German religious conviction, which was Christianity. The loathing and prejudice to Jews had been an ingredient of German civilization. German logicians, spiritual developers and musicians had dribbled at the Jews for their conducts, faith and high-ranking posts.

German civilization with its record of anti Semitism was an ideal reproduction argument for Hitler’s sadistic information. The societal and financial circumstances of the 1930s offered a prolific position for the surfacing of Hitler. German folks were in a situation of disquiet and panic as regards to the financial and societal inconveniences of the 1920s and 1930s.

Hitler appeared to offer a response to each query as he promised to reinstate Germany to its magnificent precedent. As adversity augmented subsequent to the Great Depression, Hitler’s sermon was listened to by scores of Germans who had no employment.

The feeble Weimar democracy was held responsible for the unfortunate situations of Germany as they had procured the Versailles accord. An additional scapegoat was that of socialism. German workforce that had initiated demonstrations was presumed to be the apparatus and instruments of the Soviet Union.

The Communists were held responsible for several German’s financial troubles. Josephine Herbst correctly observed that Hitler had been victorious in offering the Germans the suggestion that “he hoarded the state and the entire of Europe from bolshevism” (Herbst 32). The philosopher further argues that the phrase bolshevism with a lot of utilization has started to misplace its spiky circumference (Herbst 35).

German Capitalists Influential entrepreneurs and industries backed Hitler since they apprehended a socialist conquest of Germany. The rustication of employees by Leninism was thought of as a danger to the influential entrepreneurs of Germany. These industrialists perceived Hitler as an influential collaborator who may perhaps restructure the German financial system and hoard it from socialism.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Hitler’s Rise to Power by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Sutton posits that Hitler’s 1924 Munich tryout capitulated substantiation that the Nazi Party acknowledged $20,000 from Nuremburg entrepreneurs (Sutton 78). Monetary backing by the 1930s augmented to Hitler as numerous conferences were conducted between German industrialists. Sutton points out that “Hjalmar Sehaeht and Rudolf Hess” were key individuals who participated in meetings with German industrialists.

Most of the German industrialists who backed Hitler were “German multi-national firms” that according to Sutton were “built up by American loans in the 1920s.” European organizations like the Schneider group also played an important role in providing weapons to Hitler’s war machine.

Sutton says that “A total of three million Reichmarks was pledged by well-known firms and businessmen” to warrant that Hitler would win the general election of 1933. The financial donations of German bankers and industrialists were followed by the deferment of constitutional rights and the consolidation of authority by the Nazi Party.

Hitler’s high opinion for private assets was one of the chief motives why German industrialists and businesses gave support to the Nazi party. Hitler’s public speaking and demagoguery also stimulated assurance and hope in the German commerce sector that capitalism would be endorsed and the economic problems of Germany would be cracked.

Hitler’s Voting Triumph The ultimate reason why Hitler became the extreme tyrant of Germany was his appointment by Hindenburg. After Von Papen was nominated as Chancellor of Germany, he wanted to transform the political system of Germany that had been imposed after the Weimar Republic (Papen 99).

He had ideas that Hitler was a perfect option for being the Chancellor because of the latter’s fame. Papen supposed that Hitler would be the front man who could induce the masses with his huge backing. He wrongly believed Hitler could be stage-managed to pursue his policies. According to the Spartacus International, Von Papen supported the maltreatment of Jews as “there can undoubtedly be no objection to keeping the unique quality of a people as dirt-free as possible and to awaken the sense of a people’s community” (Papen 102).

He also applauded Hitler by saying “permit me to say how manly and humanly great of you I think this is. Your audacious and determined intercession has met with nothing but acknowledgment throughout the entire world. I congratulate you for all you have given anew to the German nation by crushing the intended second revolution” (Papen 75).

Papen would be incorrect in his judgment as Hitler could not be controlled. Hitler did not grab power but was instead given the power to shape German fortune. He eventually set free a global conflict in which millions of people’s lives were taken. His policies of hatred and racial discrimination led to the genocide of the Jews, Communists, Gypsies and any race that was considered lesser according to the beliefs of the National Socialist Party.

Hyperinflation In 1923, a condition cropped up that was encouraging to the Nazis. The French raid to the Ruhr, hyperinflation produced an atmosphere of acrimony. When Stresemann suspended unreceptive confrontation, Hitler was convinced the incidence was accurate to advance on Berlin and grab authority. Hitler wanted the backing of others because he was not sturdy enough on his own. He had the backing of Ludendorff the previous army captain.

He also preconceived to be having the backing of the three most dominant men in Bavaria. Kahr was the leader of Bavarian state government, Seisser was the leader of the law enforcement unit and Lossow was the local military chief. All three were great right-wingers although they vacillated to back Hitler. Hitler attempted to compel the three to take steps.

They were congregating in the Burgerbraukeller (a social hall) in Munich on 8 November 1923 when Hitler and his hurricane troopers ruptured in brandished armaments and asserting that the putsch was in progress. The three friends never adhered to Hitler’s commands, in its place the police force and military stirred in opposition to his 3000 men. Sixteen Nazis passed away and Hitler was detained.

The social hall putsch aborted although it provided Hitler with conquerors that passed on for a reason. He never permitted the Germans to disregard this.

Hitler and Ludendorff were held up for audition pertaining to plotting to overthrow the government. Hitler utilized the audition to achieve exposure in Germany. Ludendorff was proved not culpable and Hitler contracted a squat jail punishment.

In 1924, at the same time as in Landsberg detention center, Hitler inscribed a manuscript, Mein Kampf (My great effort) that positioned his xenophobic, chauvinistic and anti-Semitic thoughts. While in jail, Hitler deliberated on how he may perhaps grab supremacy. He was not to replicate the faults of 1923 but he preordained to succeed authority by competing in ballot voting.

The Nazis as well employed brutality to achieve exposure and to influence the populace that they were the superlative justification in opposition to the communists. The Nazis in addition, utilized propaganda to gain backing intone language, gatherings and the media to extend their thoughts. Joseph Goebbels extended the thoughts in 1930. An SA troop head, Horst Wessels was murdered by a communist in a wrangle over a slat.

Goebbels frequented the narrative that Wessels had passed on as a champion, struggling for the Nazi origin. A song was unruffled regarding Wessels. When the Nazis took over leadership, the Horst Wessels song was declared the succeeding nationwide song of praise.

The Nazis never formulated scores of achievements in the late 1920’s. In the 1928 ballot, they secured merely 12 out of 491 positions in the Reichstag. Five years afterwards, the Nazis were in conundrum.

This spectacular variation was because of the gigantic augment in the number of citizens ready to cast their votes for the Nazis owing to the crumple of the financial system following the Wall Street hurtle in 1929. The cave in of the German financial system that was reliant on American finances, saw joblessness increase hence providing an opportunity for Hitler to sell his anti Jews policies.

Conclusion There were many reasons that contributed to the rise of Hitler. The flaws of the Weimar Republic were a main factor that helped Hitler to ascend to power. Hitler was a brilliant orator and demagogue who stirred hope and expectation amongst the German masses. The Great Depression had forced the German citizens to lose their posts.

Impoverished and frustrated by the economic and social conditions of Germany, they were prepared to listen to anyone who would resolve their problems. The influential elite of Germany such as the industrialists and businessmen were also influential in helping Hitler gain power.

The Nazis formed a propaganda in which they blamed the Jews, communists, social democrats and socialists for having caused German problems. They regarded the Weimar Republic as betraying Germany by signing the imbalanced treaty of Versailles. Germany lifestyle also played a significant position in shaping the ideas of Hitler. Germany had a habit of militarism in which sacrifice for the state was puffed up.

German theorists had provided ideologies about how a master battle should take hold of power in Germany and work for the establishment of a strong and secure Germany. The Jews were perceived as powerful people who had ruined the economy of Germany.

The Communists were alleged to be an invention of Jews who wanted to tear down German industry. In conclusion, it can be said that the Great Depression was the main reason that endorsed Hitler to become Chancellor of Germany. It is exceedingly doubtful that Hitler would have risen to power if the Great Depression had not taken place.

Works Cited Acton, Hew. “Hegelian Political and Religious Ideas.” 2010. Web.

Anon. “University of San Diego.” 2008. Web.

Herbst, Josephine. “The German Underground War.” Spartacus International. 1936. Web.

Hitler, Adolf. “Mein Kampf.” 2008. Web.

Papen, Franz von. “Franz von Papen.” Spartacus International. 1934. Web.

Sutton, Antony. “Who Financed Adolf Hitler?” 2000. Web.

[supanova_question]

United Nations Human Rights Council Term Paper college application essay help

Introduction The United Nations Human Rights Council (UNHRC) is an inter-governmental organization and an organ of the United Nations; all members of the United Nations members are members of UNHRC, the council seat, however, has a membership of 47 countries and it is charged with the responsibility of promoting and protecting human rights across the world, it fundamentally addresses matters concerning human rights violations.

United Nation Human Rights Council was established on 15 march, 2006 by the UN General Assembly primarily to replace the United Nation High Commission on Human Rights which had been ineffective in solving the human rights issues and also due to the fact that several of its membership were perceived to be human rights abusers.

The United Nations Commission for Human Rights was criticized for its effectiveness since it dwelt too much on the Israel situation at the expense of the other human rights issues. UNHCR was also criticized for its politicization and double standards in handling the Israel situation.

The membership of the council was 47 states and was geographically distributed according to regions and continents. The distribution was 13 countries from African continent, 13 countries were from Asia, and 6 came from Eastern Europe, 8 from the Latin America and the Caribbean and 7 countries were from Western Europe.

The threshold for calling sessions was placed at one third of the membership and could sit not less than three sessions per year. The status of the council was to be reviewed by the Security Council at the intervals of five years (Matas 10)

The members of the United Nation General Assembly meet to vote for those who can occupy the forty seven main seats in the council. The term of each member state in the council serves for a two-three year term.

The members who are elected to the council should uphold the highest standards in the protection of human rights. All the united Nation members are eligible for election into the council provided they receive an absolute majority of the votes and they should be nominated by their blocs or regions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The members that presently seat in the council are Africa; Angola, Burkina Faso, Cameroon, Djibouti, Gabon, Ghana, Libya, Mauritania, Mauritius, Nigeria, Uganda, Senegal and Zambia.

Asian countries in the council are; Bahrain, Bangladesh, China, Japan, Jordan, Malaysia, Maldives, Kyrgyzstan, Thailand, republic of Korea, Saudi Arabia, Qatar and Pakistan. Eastern Europe: Hungary, Poland, republic of Moldova, Russian federation, Slovakia and Ukraine; the countries from Western Europe are Belgium, France, Norway, Spain, Switzerland, United Kingdom and united states.

Those from Latin America and the Caribbean are Argentina Brazil, Chile, Cuba, Ecuador, Guatemala, Mexico and Uruguay (Blanchfield 5).

The UNHRC has been relentless in condemning the state of Israel, majority of the resolutions have been targeting Israel which is a perceived violator of human rights and had became a permanent feature in each of the council’s session. Other countries that have been condemned by the UNHRC are Sudan, Iran.

The development of bloc voting has made the council a political instrument and it has attracted criticism from other states. This idea of voting along blocs has enhanced a unity of convenience between the nations of Africa and those of Middle East; they are often supported by the China, Russia and Cuba, this complicates the objectivity of the council.

Under the statutes of UNHRC, a council member can have its rights and privileges suspended by the council when it is found to have continuously violated human rights especially when it is serving its term in the membership. The process of suspension of a council member requires the endorsement of two thirds majority of the general assembly vote. The recent example is the suspension of Libya which was unanimous.

The mission of the UNHRC is to act as the main UN Avenue that states get to cooperate and dialogue on issues of human rights; it enables member states to deliver on their human rights obligations through dialogue, capacity building and technical assistance. The UNHRC also make suggestion to the general assembly when there is need for an international law in the field of human rights.

We will write a custom Term Paper on United Nations Human Rights Council specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Consequently through the universal periodic review, the UNHRC assess the review and the progress of human rights in the 192 UN member states, it can also act as an advisory committee capable of providing advice on particular topical human rights issues. The UNHRC also acts as a complaints committee through which non-governmental organizations, individuals and member states channel their complaints (Arroba 66-85).

The mandate and the structure of UNHRC Under the resolution A/RES/60/251 that gave birth to the UNHRC, the following was deemed to be its mandate;

The UNHRC is aimed at promoting human rights education, advisory services, technical assistance and capacity building.

The UNHRC is also expected to serve as a forum for debate and dialogue on topical human rights issues and to facilitate the generation of international human rights law to be forwarded to the UN General Assembly.

The UNHRC is also tasked with the responsibility of promoting full implementation of the human rights obligation of the member states and also to ensure that states adhere to human rights commitments seriously that may arise from human rights summits and conferences.

Structure of UNHRC On the structure of the UNHRC, the council holds an organizational meeting at the inception of each year; these elections are presided over by the president and the four vice-presidents each representing a regional bloc in the council.

The president and the vice-president form what is referred as the council bureau which is charged with the responsibility of procedural and organizational issues that relate to the council. The council bureau members elect the president from among them selves.

The seat of the council is in Geneva Switzerland where the members meet three times in one year for duration of 10 weeks. The council can also hold special session when a member state makes a request, the special session should be sanctioned by a third of the members (Blanchfield 7).

On its reporting, the council submits its annual reports to the UN General Assembly, consequently the council, after every five years should review and report its work and functions to the general assembly.

Under the UNHRC the following are issues considered to fall in its premise of human rights: Adequate housing, business and human rights, children; the rights of children include violence against children.

Children trafficking and the basic rights of the child, civil and political rights, climate change, communication, cultural rights, democracy, detention, good governance and debt, disability and human rights, disappearance, discrimination, education, food, freedom of expression and opinion , freedom of religion and belief, HIV/AIDS, mercenary, indigenous groups, internal displacement, poverty and health among others. (UNHRC 1)

Not sure if you can write a paper on United Nations Human Rights Council by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The UNHRC enjoys a high profile as compared to its predecessor, the UNCHR because it is an organ of the United Nations General Assembly (Terlingen 12).

The funding of UNHRC The major contributor to the monetary account of UNHRC is the USA, the congress for example have demanded that 2% of the UN regular budget should be dedicated to UNHRC. The USA congress has however sought to limit the US funding to the council because they still doubt its effectiveness (Blanchfield 12).

UNHRC in the international relations UNHRC has been instrumental in the structuring of international system, the United States immediately after joining, made it a signature of its piece of diplomacy. Several resolutions of the council have been favorable as well as unfavorable depending on the item of deliberation.

The USA for example celebrated the outcome of the vote on banning any form of discrimination based on sexual orientation and the sanctioning of Iran. The US have used the UNHRC firmly to push for its objectives, this however does not erase the fact that the USA especially the Obama administration have been firmly supportive of the course of the council. The USA has effectively used the council to press for hard sanctions against Libya and Iran.

Following the adoption of the universal declaration of human rights in 1948, several states have attached primacy to it. They have included it in their national constitutions, consequently the universal declaration of human rights led to the emergence of human rights institutions in the world to monitor and safeguard the upholding of the similar rights.

In the international arenas, states have reneged on their promise of upholding, promoting and protecting human rights and now they have turned to be principal breakers or violators. The greatest field of concern in the dimension of human rights is the compliance factor.

The establishment of the international criminal court was considered the best alternative fro those who violate the international human rights norms. The commitment by states to the compliance to human rights is demonstrated by its ability to; first is that it should ratify all human rights treaty, second is the fulfillment of reporting and acceding to the request by the supervisory bodies and third is the implementation of norms in their domestic law.

Matters of Human rights have had primacy in the 21st century. The influence of the United National Human Rights Council has been taken seriously by States; states have incorporated matters of human rights in their foreign policy documents and agendas.

The donor countries have consistently opted to using human rights record as a requisite when they want to allocate foreign aid whether military or economic, the issue of democracy and good governance has been made mandatory for any state to receive donor funding. This has been one of the effective ways of ensuring that human rights are protected.

Consequently the UNHRC has been instrumental in whipping states against violation of human rights. The suspension of Libya was unanimous and required no vote. It sent a note that states that violate the universal human rights have no place in the international arena.

It was the first time that a state had been suspended from the UNHRC since its inception. The suspension of a country, however, does not necessarily remove it from the UNHRC but will only hinder it from participating in its activities until that time that the General Assembly determines the fate of its reinstatement (Blanchfield 14).

The project of UNHRC The introduction of the Universal Periodic Review by the UNHRC is considered one of the important projects. The Universal periodical Review analyses the status of countries’ human rights record.

The UPR is universal and reliable. This has been considered the best way of defeating double standard in the identification of countries to be examined. The UPR calls on all the membership states to cooperate since failures comply may warrant an expulsion from the council which some states term as an embarrassing act (Arroba 73).

Successes of the Council After its creation in 2006, the council has attempted to overcome obstacles that plagued the previous UNHCR which had been widely criticized, this is despite the fact that it is too early to criticize or to praise it. The main activity of the body at the present is to structure the council.

The council being an organ of the UN General Assembly has managed to overcome the notion of protecting national sovereignty that has been a creation of states and a scapegoat against interference by any international body on the internal affairs of the state. The states have been using the privileges of national sovereignty to trample upon the rights of its citizens.

The UNHRC therefore has managed to balance national sovereignty and the protection of human rights. This dilemma had complicated the work of the previous commission in the western Darfur region of Sudan where the Sudanese government felt that external intervention amounts to the violation of its national sovereignty.

Being an organ of the General Assembly therefore has made the council more effective in its role to placing betterment of the world and the protection of human rights at the forefront over national interest (Arroba 80).

The failures of UNHRC on its mission The UNHRC has been criticized for paying too much focus on the Israel in most of its sittings; this has been done at the expense of other human rights violation around the globe like in Darfur, Iraq and Zimbabwe.

The failures of the UNHRC have been catastrophic and open to see, first to begin with, the Universal Periodic Review has not been universal in form; the continuous singling out of Israel in its objectives has led to its diminishing influence.

Consequently, the universal periodic review which is global and covers all the global corners and not only the members of the council as it may be thought, it does not however include observers and this technically excludes the Palestinian Authority, this is considered an element of bias against Israel.

Also the scrutiny of the human rights record of the member states annually as been considered a failure in the effectiveness of UNHRC. The pace amounts to sixteen countries per session and with three sessions per year; the scrutiny cycle takes four years to cover the 192 countries.

Furthermore, the parameters of the review have been criticized; UNHRC bases its review on the information contained in treaty bodies. This implies that the blatant violators of human rights which sign few or no treaties at all will have little scope for review whereas the states which have demonstrate greatest respect for Human rights by ratifying many treaties will have a big scope for review, this creates bias against those who demonstrate high degree for the promotion and protection of human rights (Terlingen 43).

Obstacles facing UNHRC

The perception of member states that national interest takes precedence human rights issues has emerged the major challenge facing the council. Members states vote on the items of the UNHRC only based on their self interest. Consequently, the UNHRC is ineffective in discharging its duties.

Since it is the organ of the UN, it falls under the command of the Security Council which is the supreme organ of the UN; as such its role is only to advice and not to act or command. Unless the Security Council agrees to any intervention the UNHRC may not act to prevent human rights violations (Arroba 1).

There have been criticisms of the council based on the notion that the council is politicized. This is due to the fact that it has allowed the membership of undemocratic and human rights abusers like Libya, China, and Cuba to join it. This casts aspersion on its role in protecting human rights (Carlsnaes and Simmons 155).

My suggestions The report on the human rights situation in the Palestine territories should also include all human rights violations that were committed by the both parties and not to only concentrate on the human rights violations committed by Israel. This is an arbitrary and discriminatory.

I also suggest that Israel becomes part of the regional bloc; being a member of the UN since 1948 and its denial to join one of the regional groupings is doing a disfavor to the state of Israel. In the UNHRC, it is the regional blocs who nominate and also vote for any member to any of the committees in the United Nations.

Its rejection by states from the regional blocs meant that Israel can not qualify to be elected in one of the committees of UN since no regional bloc can forward or nominate Israel for election. This has been largely associated with the continuous condemnation of Israel by UN institutions.

The Israel could have belonged to the Asian bloc but the Arabic countries have vehemently rejected it, no other bloc could allow Israel into its grouping because groupings operate via consensus. This has the effect of excluding Israel from UNHRC deliberation even if it is the main item on the agenda and hence makes it a target of manifest prejudice.

I strongly suggest that bloc voting be abandoned completely; this will help in achieving the intended objectives of the council. Vote bloc is the best way of curtailing the dominance and the hegemony of the Organization of the Islamic countries (OIC). This however seems a mirage since almost all the regional blocs have perfected the art of voting as a bloc as show of solidarity, besides the OIC, European Union have perfected voting as a bloc to strengthen their union (Matas 10).

Leadership from democratic countries; there has been lack of leadership in the council especially a leader from that countries that have an excellent human rights record. The voting regime has been detrimental to the objective of getting a able, and democratic leader, this is because unlike in other UN agencies who have devised a voting pattern that is based, the UNHRC votes based on blocs and whichever bloc that has a lot of members will be the winner and in this has been to the advantage of the OIC.

Works Cited Arroba, Angel. The New United Nations Human Rights Council: What Has Changed? What Can Change? WEBASA, 2006. Web.

Blanchfield, Luisa. United Nations Human Rights Council: Issues for Congress. New York: DIANE Publishing, 2002. Print.

Carlsnaes, Walter and Simmons, Beth. Handbook of International Relations. New York: SAGE, 2010. Print.

Matas, David. Reforming the “Reformed” United Nations Human Rights Council. Institute of International Affairs of B’nai Brith Canada, 2009.Web.

Terlingen, Yvonne. The Human Rights Council: A New Era in UN Human Rights Work. UNACHINA, 2007. Web.

UNHRC. United Nations Human Rights Council. UNHRC, 2011. Web.

[supanova_question]

New Business Development Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Revenue Model

Operational Mode

Vague Descriptions

References

Revenue Model A business revenue model ought to define how the business will make money. One key feature to consider when developing the business model is the core service of the business and the medium which the services will be provided to the customers (Schneider 2008).

If the business undertakes its services online, it is essential to come up with an online revenue model. In designing the business proposal revenue model, services can be offered to the customers directly through the services offered, and customers can be able to pay through online payment methods or directly to the tour company (Li 2006).

In the long-term, the company will expect to make revenue by selling advertising space to affiliated business enterprises such as hotels, airlines and other affiliated companies. In this regard, sales may be made through affiliate marketing, where Sherly Group receives commission from the affiliated companies by marketing their services on the company brochures and other forms of advertisements.

Operational Mode The strategic role of Sherly group in the entire luxury market tourism industry is very important, especially in determining the niche market for the business and where to position the business in the market. If the business intends to organize and package travel holiday products, then the business is expected to fall within the category of tour operations (while the individuals will be perceived as tour operators) (FTO 2011, p. 1).

Often, the core function of such a business is to make adequate arrangements with airline companies, ground support companies and hotels to come up with a comprehensive holiday product for their customers. Travel agents are known to sell their advice to the customers.

Sometimes, travel agents can do holiday booking for individual customers or tour operators, but other times, they are seen to carry out normal tasks like car hiring, airline ticket booking (and the likes) for individual clients and companies.

A ground handler implements the travel choices made by the clients, and their services may include driving the tourists around their destinations, offering tour guides (and the likes). In the context of the submitted business proposal, the business nature of Sherly travel group describes a tour operation company.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Vague Descriptions In writing a good business proposal, it is important to articulate every element of the business plan in detail to ensure the business plan is comprehensive enough to cover most functional areas of the business. In the context of Sherly travel group, emphasis should be made to the marketing, financial and human resource elements of the business.

In coming up with the best marketing plan for the business, the business description should outline: the target market; the primary business environment; the business goals and the required marketing strategies (designed to achieve business goals) (Hiebing 2004).

The human resource plan should include how the business expects to recruit new employees; planning and appraisal concept; succession planning strategy; job design concept; compensation and reward strategies and how the organization will foster individual or team development (Jackson 2008).

The financial elements of the business plan will include elements like: the revenue model, how the organization will obtain financing; tax plan and financial resource allocation (Care One 2010, p. 1). Observing these elements will avoid vague descriptions in the business plan.

References Care One. (2010) Elements of Financial Planning (Online) Available at: https://www.careonecredit.com/how-to-get-out-of-debt# .

FTO. (2011) Tour Operators and Travel Agents (Online) Web.

Hiebing, R. (2004) The One-Day Marketing Plan: Organizing And Completing A Plan That Works. London, McGraw-Hill Professional.

We will write a custom Essay on New Business Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Jackson, S. (2008) Managing Human Resources. London, Cengage Learning.

Li, F. (2006) What Is E-Business?: How The Internet Transforms Organizations. London, Wiley-Blackwell.

Schneider, G. (2008) Electronic Commerce. London, Cengage Learning.

[supanova_question]

Problems in Thailand Research Paper best essay help: best essay help

Introduction Thailand is a country in south Asia with a kingdom constitutional monarchy government. Geographically, it is one of the biggest countries and ranked 50th largest in the world. Its capital city is Bangkok and its main foreign exchange earner and flourishing sector is tourism.

The three main problems in Thailand are environmental issues, child prostitution, and HIV/AIDS.

Identification of the problem Problem One – Environmental issues

The rigorous environmental growth in Thailand has led to various environmental problems. Currently, Thailand faces the problems of pollution, diminishing wildlife population, deforestations and the dumping of hazardous wastes (WWF, n.d.).

Deforestation has emerged as an environmental problem due to the increased desire to enlarge land for cultivation and other agricultural activities. This has reduced the land under forest cover from 53% in 1961 to 25% in 1998 (WWF, n.d.).

Overfishing: excessive fishing has led to diminishing fish population; this has been demonstrated by the fact that fishermen have recently had to spend several days in the sea to catch fish (WWF, n.d.).

Pollution: the quick industrial development and the resurging population growth have led to increased quantities of pollution. Also increased industrialization has led to industrial waste water and other hazardous wastes.

The increased demand for water has resulted in the depletion of Thai’s water resources and it has been ranked as the lowest in the Asian region for water per capita (WWF, n.d.).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Infrastructural development: the emergence of the coastal areas as favorite tourist destination and other urban developments has placed the coastal wetlands, coral reefs and sea grasses under threat and also raising the survival concerns of sea animals like whales and turtles (WWF, n.d.).

Problem Two – Child Prostitution

Child prostitution in Thailand is an illegal activity but people with commercial interest in this illegal act have continued to propagate the activity. It is a serious problem and considered the 21st century form of human enslavement and it involves approximately 1 million young children who fall under the age of 16 years and the profit from the trade is estimated to be more than that of drug and weapon trade.

The problem is so severe because there is minimum health protection for prostitution. The prostitution, enslavement and exploitation of children represent sad story of human degradation.

The intensification of child prostitution is largely associated with the growing industry in Thailand, the relegated position of women in the Thai society due to Thai Buddhism and the culture of recreational sex.

The escalation of this problem is also largely due to racism, women from the indigenous groups who are associated with their economic vulnerabilities hence considered easy prey for recruitment into prostitution. It has also lately escalated due to the financial crisis and the rise in the standard of living (AGW, n.d.).

Problem Three – HIV/AIDS

HIV/AIDS case was first reported in Thai in the year 1984 and since then, gay, commercial sex workers and drug users have been widely affected by the disease. The factors that are largely associated to the rapid spread of HIV/AIDS is, among others low level of awareness and ignorance, limited use of condoms and the prevalence of prostitution activities.

Policies Environmental issues

The government has contributed a lot in the reduction of pollution. It has aided in the reduction of levels of lead. The private sectors like the PPT and the Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) have also demonstrated interest in curbing environmental calamities.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Problems in Thailand specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The government have also played a critical role in enforcement of environmental laws and well established institutional capacity; the government has also assisted in increasing investment in prevention of pollution. The World Bank has also helped Thai in the implementation of national CFC phase out plan; these have been instrumental in reducing depletion of Ozone layer.

Environmental solutions failed because of the following reasons; first was due to the outdated institutions and policies, an example is the open access policy regarding natural resources which has often resulted in overuse of the environmental resources; another failure emanates from the lack of coordination of public relations on environment, this is because environmental campaigns only target individual citizens but ignores dissemination of information and coordination among government departments and agencies.

Also the failure of environmental issues is due to the lack of enforcement mechanisms. There have been environmental management laws in Thailand but only targeting resource use as opposed to environmental conservation. The environmental legislations that address environmental issues are weak and often lack implementation mechanisms.

Child Prostitution

To curb child prostitution, the government has passed legislations like measures in protection and suppression of trafficking in women and children act which gives the authorities the liberty to arrest and detain victims that are suspected of abating the illegal acts.

Also, those women who are found to be illegal immigrants and found to be indulging in prostitution activities are deported and their names are blacklisted from entering Thailand.

HIV/AIDS

HIV/AIDS prevention was made to be a priority when the Prime Minister Anand Panyarachun made the prevention and the control of HIV/AIDS a nationally priority and as such he initiated various steps aimed at curbing the spread of the pandemic.

First, the government moved the HIV/AIDS control program from the ministry of public health to the office of the Prime Minister and its budgetary allocation was increased in order to make its fighting sustainable. Secondly, the government initiated numerous information campaigns in order to sensitize the people; Anti-AIDS information was played on all radio and television stations and more so every learning institution was required to teach lessons on HIV/AIDS.

The government also repealed repressive laws like the one that required the reporting of names and addresses of those people who lived with the viruses, when they visited health institutions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Problems in Thailand by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The campaign was unpopular among the influential tourist gurus who benefited from the industry of drug trafficking and child prostitution. Government programs helped a lot in the reduction of the cases of HIV/AIDS in Thailand (Avert, n.d.).

Section three- recommendation Environmental issues

The government should formulate legislations that govern the management of the environment; this is due to the fact that majority of the environmental issues in Thailand are artificial e.g. the government may ban fishing for sometime, the government can also issue a policy that everybody should be planting a tree among others.

Child prostitution

The following are my recommendations as the solution to child prostitution:

Government and other stakeholders should develop measures that will help rescue women and children that are caught in the prostitution

The government should revise the laws that deal with the menace

Government and the stakeholders should address the economic calamities that drive women and the children into the vice.

The society should critically examine the culture and the traditions that are largely associated with the vice.

The fight against child prostitution should not be left entirely to the government but also other stakeholders like the non-governmental organizations should supplement government efforts.

HIV/AIDS

Intensification of campaigns against HIV/AIDs by use of media tools like the radio and TV; it can also be achieved through holding of sensitization seminars and workshops.

Making the teaching of HIV/AIDS lessons in schools mandatory to inculcate it into the minds of the younger generations.

Government should formulate laws that prohibit the spread of HIV/AIDS

Government should also work together with the brothels to make sure that they (brothels) do not become the only way of spreading the pandemic (WHO, n.d.).

Conclusion Environmental issues, child prostitutions and HIV/AIDS pandemic being some of the problems that bedevil Thailand; this notwithstanding, they are not only unique to Thailand but are common to all the countries of the globe. Thailand government has failed in its efforts to address the problems.

Both issues are of grave concerns and still remain a threat to human life. The policies that are formulated by government are too weak and if not they lack proper implementation strategies. A policy for example that requires brothels to be offering safe sex or to make condoms available are definitely ambiguous in form and it appears like a public relations exercise.

The policies to curb the spread of HIV/AIDs and to prevent child prostitution appear just in paper and are meant to hoodwink the public. This is because the operatives of the tourism sector are the leaders in government who are keen to maintaining the status quo and to allow sex tourism to flourish, to them, formulating harsh laws to govern the menace will amount to their decrease in revenue from tourism in general and sex tourism in particular which has been linked to rapid spread of HIV/AIDS.

References AGW. A Globe of Witness: child prostitution in Thailand. Web.

Avert. (2011). HIV/AIDS in Thailand. Web.

WHO. Health a key prosperity. Web.

WWF. Environmental problems in Thailand. Web.

[supanova_question]

The Paradox of Social Class and Sports Involvement Essay (Critical Writing) essay help

Table of Contents Abstract

Introduction and review

Methodology used

Results

Discussion

Conclusion

References

Abstract The article of Thomas C. Wilson (2002) will be critically analyzed in this thesis. The study in that article was to establish the role of sports involvement in the creation of social classes within the society. The author opined that high educational level or the income distribution of participants increases people’s tendency of involving in sports.

However, the higher these elements are, the more of a deterrent it is for them to engage in ‘prole’ sports. This, according to the writer is a paradox and which the writer has to a great extent helped us to understand except for a few limitations.

This article will try to analyze the various strong points formulated by the author, the weaknesses as well as the limitations of the study.

Introduction and review The author presents a case study of the relationship where he argues that social classes of individuals plays a big part in shaping the pattern of sports involvement and participation.

This may have been true in the past, where, “sport [was] analyzed as a reflection of the way of life. Social inequalities are reflected in the use of sports and they are also a means of group and class values affirmation,” (Ohl 1999, Pp. 148).

The author, however, did not make any reference to recent study. The current trends shows that: ‘individuals of higher managerial and professional occupations attend cycling in larger numbers as opposed to people of lower supervisory and technical occupations, semi-routine occupations, routine occupations and unemployed individuals” (Sports England 2010 P. 5).

Further, the classification between the so-called ‘prole’ sports and high-class sports is not clear. He does not tell us how he reaches to the conclusion that golf is higher class than football. The Gallup polls conducted between December 11th and 14th 2006, shows that football is Americans favorite sport (43%) while golf is relatively less preferred (3%) but such games as boxing receive the list popularity (2%), (Carroll, 2007).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This seems to differ with the writer’s conclusion that middle class people are more likely to attend boxing than golf. It also casts doubt to his conviction that the reason why people do not attend such games as golf is solely because of resources.

The statement of the problem is not very clear, for example the effect of education on sports. There is ambiguity on how exactly education affects sports participation.

For example, in a study conducted in Scandinavia institute of education, “showed no effect to sport spectatorship in Denmark, slightly positive effect in Norway and a negative effect in Sweden” (Thrane 2001, Pp. 158). Further, the writer himself agrees that economic capital itself is not an effective method of supporting this argument.

The author’s argues that the cultural and economic capital settings deter individuals from engaging in other lower class sports. This argument does not explain why participants continue being in such lower class sports long after they have gained enough wealth and worldwide recognition and quite evidently acquired a higher social milieu from their previous one.

The most logical thing for them to do, according to the author’s argument, would be to abandon their current sports they are involved in and join the ones matching with their current social standing in the society, but this does not happen.

Further the author overlooked on the role of other demographic factors, such as age and gender, to sports involvement. For example, there are sports which are more likely to attract young people as opposed to the aged.

Sports such as car racing are most common with the youths while golf playing is more prevalent among the older generation. This is so even for sports like football where players retire from their teams at their early 30’s.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on The Paradox of Social Class and Sports Involvement specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Further few women are associated with sports like wrestling and rugby, which involve physical strength, as compared to sports such as swimming and tennis playing. Failure to take into consideration of these factors leads to a denial of their significant contribution to sports involvement, a fact that is very obvious.

Methodology used The writer uses a representative sample of people who attend certain specified sports. While this shows some evidence of positive relationship between economic capital and sports participation, the research has relied on a very small proportion thus compromised on generalization of the outcomes.

Further, the research only considered the duration of one year only. Such a short span does not warrant the writer to jump to the conclusion that “education transmits class-based culture intergenerationally…” (Thomas 2002, P.3).

There should be a range of sports dealt with by the research to facilitate conclusive decision without bias. In his research on participation on ‘prole’ activities, the writer only deals with auto racing, which according to him is a middle class sport. This gives a very narrow basis to make any general conclusion.

Further, there is no big difference in participation in this sport between the middle class people and the upper class participants. The writer only analyses the those elements confined to his argument and simply ignoring the other aspects which are equally important to the outcome of the discussion.

Results It is in fact true that income and education bears on an individual’s tendency to participate in sports, and the writer research has in a way, depicted this principle. But there is no major difference in frequency of sports involvement between people who attend such high class games as golf, skiing, tennis etc and those that attend such prole sports as auto racing etc for both men and women (2.3% for men and 3.0% for women) (Tb. 1). Thus the research is not based on convincing grounds.

The writer does not explain why individuals earning $30000-39999 participate in sports more than those earning $40000-49999 if the economic capital principle applies, (Tb. 2) and generally there is no major difference in sports participation for respondents earning $30000-3999, which is a middle class, to those earning $60000-74999, which can be classified as a high class, (Tb. 3).

Discussion The writer explains the results by arguing that the reason why there are less people with high income attending auto-racing is because tastes and preferences are determined by social class. This is a bit farfetched and there is no evidence on it. The researcher did not ask the respondents why their attendance of sports was that way.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Paradox of Social Class and Sports Involvement by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Probably this would have enlightened us on other matters that affect their decisions which the writer has overlooked. With these defects in the writers research, to say that sports participation creates social stratifications would be wrong and inappropriate, but to say that income distribution causes individuals to attend some sports and not others would be indeed, very true.

One can adopt Bourdieu’s concept of habitus; which he explained as ‘‘a set of basic, deeply internalized master-patterns which may govern and regulate mental processes without being consciously apprehended and controlled’’ (Bourdieu 1984)

Conclusion The analyses by the writer of the relationship between education and income on one side and how different groups engage in sports on the other side helps us to understand why various sports involve more people such as football, while others have relatively few spectators.

However, the analogy on how sports involvement contributes to social inequality did not come out clearly. All in all, the author’s ideologies and arguments are fairly practical and relate to real life and portray a brilliant mind.

References Bourdieu, P. D. (1979) A Social Critique of the Judgment of Taste. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1984.

Carrol, J. (January 2007), Football Reaches Historic Popularity Levels in Gallup Poll: Gallup News Service. Web.

Ohl, F. (1999) Are social classes still relevant to analyse sports groupings in‘‘postmodern’’ Society? An analysis referring to P. Bourdieu’s theory: Lab. APS et Sciences Sociales, Universite´ Marc Bloch, Strasbourg.

France Thomas C. W. (2002) The Paradox of Social Class and Sports Involvement: The Roles of Cultural and Economic Capital: International Review for the Sociology of Sport (2002). Web.

Thrane. C. (1999) Sports Spectatorship in Scandinavia: A Class Phenomenon? Norway Lillehammer College.

Sport England (December, 2010), Active People Survey (APS) Results for Cycling. Web.

[supanova_question]

Sherly Travel Group Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Executive summary Sherly Travel Group (SGT) is a newly formed company that specializes in offering tour and travel services to both individuals and corporate clients. The company has its headquarters situated in Singapore, but it has diversified its services to other parts of the world to meet the needs and the expectation of the customers.

The SGT prides itself for having employees with vast experience in the tour and travel industry and have the passion of serving their customers to satisfaction. Customers’ satisfaction that SGT practices has seen increase in the number of customers in the recent past and thus a competitive edge to the company (Clemons et al, 2007).

SGT will not only focus on the offering of luxury travel to its customers, but also the company will focus on budget travel. The target customers of the company are couples, affinity groups or individuals who go for holiday at least once per year. The customers will definitely compare their experiences with the tour companies before they make their purchase decisions.

This is the reason as to why the SGT is committed in offering the first-class tour services at the prices of budget travel. To achieve the competitive edge over its competitors, SGT has customized its services to meet the individual needs of the customers.

SGT has identified the channels that it is going to use in order to reach the potential customers. These channels include advertising its services in the media such as magazines, newspapers and television. The company will also use tour agents to reach the target market.

SGT is also committed in offering strong brand name by offering its services at a lower price as compared to the other companies in the same industry. The company has made its services accessible by offering online services to the customers.

The customers can book for their holiday destinations without having to walk to the offices and thus the services offered to the customers are convenient (Clemons et al, 2007).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Business description Sherly Tour Group is meant to offer tour and travel services to group and individual who want to travel for leisure. Some of the services offered by STG include travel consultation, pre-arranged tours, hotels booking and custom packages among others.

The aim of the STG is to position itself as the leading tour and travel company in the country (Murphy

[supanova_question]

Participative and Relationship Theories Essay essay help free

There are several leadership theories that various organizations adapt depending on its structure. This paper will be focusing on two leadership theories, namely participative and relationship theories. The participative leadership theory is a style that is adapted by an organization whereby the input of the employees is put into account by the management (Northouse, 2009).

Through the application of this leadership theory, the management team encourages other employees to participate and contribute towards various factors in the organization.

When an organization is making use of this leadership theory, the employees feel more relevant and part of the organizations decision-making process. When the employees are given the chance to express their ideas concerning the improvement of the organization, there is a high probability of the relationship between the employees and the management to be improved (Northouse, 2009).

Through the process of exchanging the ideas, the management and the employees interact freely which a positive move towards the achievement of the organizations objectives. The inputs of others assist greatly to define the areas that have problems and various ideas of overcoming the challenges are introduced.

The other type of leadership theory is management theory, which is also referred to as transactional theory. This theory mainly concentrates on the areas of supervision, organization, and the overall performance (Northouse, 2009).

The policies that require to be implemented in this theory are about the rewards and punishments that are associated with it. In most of the organizations, these policies are applied whereby the successful employees are recognized and rewarded in front of the other employees.

On the other hand, when an employee does something wrong against the rules and regulations of the organization, they are punished.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In case they are not punished, these employees are reprimanded to ensure that such a behavior is never repeated in the organization. The culture of rewarding and punishing is very important as it makes everyone to take full responsibilities of his or her actions (Northouse, 2009).

When employees are responsible and taking their work seriously, there is likelihood of improving their relationship with the management team to ensure the goals of the organizations are realized at the end of the specified period. As a result, good results in the productivity of the employees are managed by the organization hence improving the whole productivity of the organization.

Reference Northouse, P. (2009). Leadership: Theory and Practice. New York: SAGE.

[supanova_question]

Zara International Supply Chain Management Essay online essay help

Introduction A company’s management has the role of managing operations and Supplies to ensure adequate supply of materials in the company at the right time at an appropriate competitive cost. Supplies takes the form of having the raw material required for production at the right time to make the process effective and in the case of outsourced manufacturing services, the timely supply of the finished products (Cousins, Lamming, Lawson and Squire,2008).

As many Europeans companies are shifting their operation (manufacturing) base to China, African Nations and Asia, to enjoy the cheaper labor markets there; however, some companies like Zara International Fashions have opted to procure their products in Europe. The main question is why has Zara International ignored the perceived benefit from outsourced manufacturing? This paper seeks to answer the above question; it will discuss the answer from a supply-chain management angle.

What is Supply Chain Management? A business process is a well-coordinated sequential task, undertaken to fulfill certain set objectives. Every stage is managed as it contributes to attainment of the set goals and objectives. Generally, three sets of business processes they are, managerial processes, operational processes and supporting processes.

Supply chain management aims at providing goods necessary for production in a business. It starts from identifying the materials required for various processes in the company and ends with the supply of those goods. It has a period; an efficient process must be completed within a set period. A supply chain management is an internal operation whose results the internal and final consumer feels. It has the following objectives:

To ensure that there are quality and quantity supply of goods and services

To ensure that there is a Just in time delivery of goods and services

Control the supply system and attain highest efficiency possible

Reduction of transportation cost, lead time and warehouse costs

Enhance customer service through provision of high quality goods.

When a company has an adequate supply of materials, it is able to produce goods in the right time at an affordable and competitive price.

When sourcing products from another country, the approach of supply chain management moves a notch higher, companies in Europe has to contend with other logistics though in the supply chain network that companies like Zara procuring locally are not entitle to, they include:

International logistic issues

To have adequate supply, the prevailing conditions must be optimal and no external influence; when a company is procuring from abroad, it is affected by economic, political and social changes in the procuring country; this makes the business miss the confidence that they can supply when wanted. This reason makes Zara opt for local produced goods.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Complication of international procurements

When getting goods abroad, companies are seen to operate two stage complicated supply chain, they must ensure that either the foreign country gets the materials, those sent from the buying country or it has procured in the local market; to manage such a process is complicated and time consuming. Zara has opted to have a simple local manufacturing that it can manage effectively (Zara International, 2011).

The make-buy decision

When in business, the management must make the decisions whether they will use their own manufactured goods or they will buy already made goods; the decision is rather personal to a business and considers many options. When a company decides to make products, it ensures that it has the right expertise materials are available as well labor. The main factor of consideration is whether making ones products will lead to a reduced cost of production or alternatively it will lead to higher quality that will lead to increased sales.

The reason why other European countries have decided to get their products made from Asian and Chinese countries is the labor costs, this makes the goods cheap in the end; however managing the process for quality is complicated; again it is a shaky deal where a company has to worry about any change in the country of procurements stability. Zara International has opted to buy more form the market because of a variety of factors; they include:

When buying locally, it will not be given the margin to buy to be sold at an appropriate cost; this is different than when manufacturing, the manufacturer has to make some products to break even which may lead to over production.

When buying locally, the company will have the option of comparing the many varieties in the market and procure form those companies that have the products in demand. This makes the company have the best products at an affordable cost (Zara International, 2011).

Sourcing strategies and supply chain configurations

When manufacturing goods from a country different form the country of sales, the European companies depending on other companies have to undertake some suppliers/abroad manufactures. Configuration of supply chain is a procedural way that ensures that goods are delivered their place of need when they are needed to be.

Logistic management involves processes undertaken by a company to ensure that it has goods and services it requires for its day-to-day activities when they are needed. Some governmental procedures or companies processes may shape it. In an international procurement, there are customs logistics that must be adhered to ensure that commodity is delivered at the right time. It involves procuring, handling, warehousing, verifying and control of goods imported. Customs laws must be adhered.

We will write a custom Essay on Zara International Supply Chain Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is a lengthy process and thus an importing company must ensure that it has enough time for a just in time delivery. Logistics management team is given the mandate to ensure that delivery is done at the right time, right cost and the right place (Harrison and Hoek, 2008)

When Zara procures locally, then it avoids all the above logistics and it can be sure that it will get what the market is offering; in the case the above logistics are hampered by something may be special to a procuring country or applying across the board, the procuring company will have to suffer the loss of business.

However, the case is different when a company is procuring from the local scenes. Zara always has the option of selling what is available in the market thus at any one point is it on toes with the market, a move that offers it competitive advantage.

Strategic supplier selection

A company should develop a good business relationship with its suppliers, as this will assist in making sure that there is reliability in the supply of materials. When in the international arena, a company should ensure that it has good relations will all the people in the line of business all the way from the sourcing of materials to the last person who will bring the goods into the company; this is not an easy task.

When there is a good relation, it is easier to get goods at a better price and market data from suppliers whom the company has established good business relations. Maintaining the good relation with people of different personalities and companies with varying philosophies is not an easy job, sometimes it fails the manufacturing companies (Mangan, Lalwani and Butcher, 2008).

The decision of Zara International to procure locally can be attributed to avoidance of the above hassle the management is better concentrate on looking for the best commodities in the local market and ensuring that the internal businesses processes are up to date and competitive. As other businesses are looking for relationship building approaches, the company is busy developing business processes and enacting them for a competitive business.

Aligning supply with corporate strategy

Companies are guided by corporate strategies; they should align their processes, including supply management processes to the company’s corporate strategy. A Company’s procurement and supplies department ensures that production materials and equipments required for an effective production are available, in the right quality and at an appropriate price, this will meet the company’s main goal of being profitable.

With globalization, companies can procure goods and services that meet their requirements from different countries; the wide availability of materials and their markets has facilitated industrialization; however the policies and the ideologies in the international business has sometimes contradicted the procuring company corporate structure (Lysons and Gillingham, 2003).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Zara International Supply Chain Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More For example, many European companies have sustainable development agendas as one of their corporate strategies; however, they may procure from countries that have relaxed environmental laws, thus the procurement ends up violating the company’s corporate goal. Another area is in labor and its costs, different countries have different labor cost, Europeans companies have corporate goal of ensuring they have the best cared for human capital, but when they procure abroad, the standards set in those countries may be different thus the company ends up violating its own corporate goal indirectly (Christopher, 2005).

Zara International is keen on maintaining and respecting its corporate goals and objectives; when the company buys from local scenes, it is able to make sure that all areas have been looked into before making a move. For example, it will be able to make sure that it buys from companies that respect their employee’s rights and those that protect the environment. With such moves, it will be satisfying its corporate goals and objectives (Zara International, 2011)

Conclusion Having an effective supply chain management offers a competitive advantage to an organization; supply chain management has the main objective to ensuring that at any one time there are adequate supplies to a business, at an appropriate cost and place.

To buy locally available goods or manufacture goods for sale is a decision that management has to make; Zara has opted to purchase over 80% of its goods locally, instead of having international manufacturing joints that have cheaper labor. The main reason for the decision is to offer management a chance to concentrate on other business processes that will offer a competitive advantage to the company; it is also a risk management approach.

References Christopher, M. ,2005. Logistics and Supply Chain Management; creating value-adding networks. Harlow: Prentice Hall

Cousins, P., Lamming, R., Lawson, B. and Squire, B. ,2008. Strategic Supply Management: principles, theories and practice. Harlow: Prentice Hall.

Harrison, A. and Hoek, R. ,2008. Logistics Management and Strategy. Harlow: Prentice Hall

Lysons, K. and Gillingham, M. ,2003. Purchasing and Supply Chain Management. Harlow: Prentice Hall/ Financial Times.

Mangan, J., Lalwani, C. and Butcher, T. ,2008. Global Logistics and Supply Chain Management. Chichester: John Wiley

[supanova_question]

Security of Your Computer Essay college essay help: college essay help

Introduction A computer is an electronic machine that is vulnerable to many risks. The computer ought to be protected from risks such as viruses that may affect their normal functioning. In dealing with computer security, many scientists have come up with different ways of protecting a computer from unauthorized parties.

There are many technical areas of computer security but the main ones are initialized CIA. This initials stand for confidentiality, integrity and authentication. Confidentiality means that other unauthorized persons cannot access what is in the computer.

Integrity is used to mean that the information in the computer cannot be hacked or changed by unauthorized persons. Authentication is used to mean that the information in the computer is only available and accessible to the authorized parties (Seong 24). The main reason for enhancing computer security is protecting it from unauthorized persons who cause destructions to the computer system hence interfering with confidential information.

Another issue with computer security is privacy that is related to people who use the internet everyday and they are supposed to ensure that they protect their personal information from the websites they deal with. To ensure that these security systems are in work, some fault-tolerance methods are necessary as discussed below (Seong 83).

Discussion Most of the software fault tolerance methods are advancements of the old hardware fault tolerance methods that were less effective in performance. Three software fault-tolerance methods are in use today as discussed (Bishop 45).

Recovery blocks

Randell developed the method in which an adjudicator is used to confirm the effects of a similar algorithm. The system using this method is broken down into small recoverable blocks that build up the entire computer security system.

Each of the small blocks is connected alongside primary, secondary and tertiary case codes, which are just next to the adjudicator. According to Seong, “the adjudicator is used to show the effectiveness of the various blocks and incase the primary block fails, then it rolls backs the state of the system and tries to fix the secondary block” (76). In case of failure of a block, then it reveals that the block is not worthy for use.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More N-version software

This method works parallel to the traditional N-version hardware. In this method, there are different models that are made up of N different implementations. Each of the variants/ models returns its results after performing any action.

It is from these results that the effectiveness of the modules is determined and then the correct ones can be known. This method is more effective as it can include hardware using multiple versions of software and the results are correct (Bishop 27).

Self-checking software

This method is rarely used compared to the previous methods. It includes extra checks that are set at some checking points. Some rollback recovery methods are also installed in the computer security system. In self-checking, the correct codes are obtained and then used. This method is however not effective because it lacks rigor (Seong 98).

Conclusion The methods used to create fault computer systems have never been 100 percent effective. They are faced with some failures and most of them are 60-90 percent effective.

This means that more research needs to be done to come up with very effective and reliable methods. In addition, the methods are very expensive to execute hence the next generation must come up with cost-effective methods.

Works Cited Bishop, Matt. Computer security: art and science. New York: Addison-Wesley Professional, 2003.

Seong. H. Poong. Reliability and risk issues in large-scale safety-critical digital control systems. Washington, DC: Springer, 2009. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on Security of Your Computer specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

Cultural Pollution Essay college application essay help

Introduction Culture is the representation of the totality of all socially conveyed or learned mannerisms, views beliefs ad interactions that result from human work and activity. The cultures traditions and historical concepts of the Middle

East have over the centuries been characterised as by a distinct sense of variety that stems from a whirlwind of customs and traditions. An interrogation of the various cultural values form the comparative stand between the older and younger generation provides an adequate argument for this claim.

Argument Materialism

Once upon a time, men and women would follow their guided herds through the desserts ferrying goods and transporting commodities such as slave’s garments skins and food. The Middle East was rich with activity as its population majored on middlemen jobs. In the process, the true wealth was built on their animals and slaves that were a symbol of pride.

As it were, the Middle East society was a transportable and flexible entity and therefore had little time to invest in areas such as real estate or land. In effect, the true value of wealth was quantified in terms of animals and jewelry objects of which were movable and easily disposable.

It follows that such a society will also value the human as an asset. Given the background and setup of the slave trade, the older society culturally valued the number of children and slaves that one acquired or held. This theme is well emphasized by the biblical stories of dynasties and kings that put these material possessions as the focus of wealth.

Times have however changed, new methods of transportation have been installed and slave trade abolished. New ideas have been born into the society and the rather materialistic society has begun to ease up to the modern contemporary trends.

The new generation has dismissed the cultural kingship and value of wealth and replaced it with an aggressive sense of competition. The respect that accrued to the value holders has gradually grown out to become an avenue for competition.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Religiosity

Bluntly put the Middle East is considered as the cradle of civilizations. The world’s three largest religions -Judaism, Christianity and Islam- also have origins in the Middle East. The religious capacity of the region is by all means not restricted to these three.

In fact, the great variety of religions in the region has up to date been a source of conflict for a long period. Understanding the region’s religious affiliations inadvertently amounts to understanding the region as a whole in its particulars and preferences.

The value attached to religion transcends all other social cultural and political factors. The Middle East culture is religion driven and has been so since its early days. This has been passed on from the older generations through to the new and coming generations.

It has been embedded in their daily lives and forms a fundamental requirement for membership in the society. This is unlikely to change in the near future since the influence and value attached to religion forms the foundation of all other cultural and social phenomenon.

Attitudes towards technology and change

The appetite for technology in the Middle East has always fallen behind the modernity and world trends. Historically the conservative culture of the population leaves a slim edge on which the base for technology stands.

The older generation therefore often fell off the graph in as far as technology is concerned in the hope of maintaining a pure and historically correct mannerism and trends. They are rather justified since the changes in technology stand on the feet of culture and more often than not end up toppling these cultures.

This however will not survive long since there has been a great paradigm shift that has seen t eh newer and younger generation invests a lot of time and money in technology. The world has kept an envious eye at the sudden interest if the Middle Eastern people in the technology sector. Of even greater concern and interest ids their sudden crave for advanced warfare technology.

We will write a custom Essay on Cultural Pollution specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Gender roles

What people think, imagine or conceive of others is contemptible to their religious preferences. The Middle East is inflated with religious driven societies that perceive of social phenomenon from the religious point of view. Seemingly, the role of women in as far as religion is concerned has been belittled and marginalized to reproduction and housewifery.

This perception stems from the religious provisions for this status one that has been cordially followed by generations on end. The new generation however has bowed down to the feminist movement to create room for the women in education economics social life and yet to be, politics. This shift has taken a lot of martyrdom owing to the harsh rules as against defiance of the religious and social provisions of the role of women.

Risk-taking

From the workings of a rather barren environment the Middle East culture has preached the concept of risks across the century. Far and wide the idle east population is known to be a trading society that has mastered the art of risks.

The refined interest in business by the younger population is just a contemporary representation of the traditional cultural values that have been embedded into their culture.

The environment

Before the industrial revolution, the Middle East was a barren region with endless tracks of sand. There was little to tell of the barren region of herdsmen and nomads. Consequently, there was little if any interest in environmental concerns.

The mid 20th century saw a great transformation of the region with more interest being given to environmental exploitation. Thanks to industrialization, the world developed an appetite for energy that was good news to the Middle Eastern people.

The discovery of oil and other forms of energy created a sudden interest in the region that led to reclamation of the dessert land and the development of industries. The agrarian revolution saw the transformation of the region into a hub of activity.

These developments however were at the expense of the environment. The new generation has however responded to the call for environmental awareness and conservation. The region is conscious of global warming and has made attempts at reducing their contribution to this crisis.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Cultural Pollution by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However this has not been fully embraced since most of the nations still remain at was and continues to develop non environmental friendly weapons.

[supanova_question]

The Development of Alzheimer’s Disease and it’s Effect on the Brain Research Paper a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Abstract

Introduction

Alzheimer’s disease

Development of Alzheimer’s Disease

Symptoms

Causes

Conclusion

References

Abstract Alzheimer’s disease is a psychological disorder that does not only affect the functioning of the brain, but also the nervous system leading to poor coordination of the body. The disease is incurable and progresses slowly through consecutive four stages of pre-dementia, early stage, middle stage, and late stage that ultimately leads to death.

A patient depicts major symptoms such as loss of cognitive ability, memory loss, and physical impairment due to inability to coordinate body functions. Advancing age and genes are dominant factors that can predispose individual to the disease.

Introduction Alzheimer is a psychological disorder that affects normal functioning of the brain. It is a form of dementia that interferes with cognitive abilities and behavior of an individual. Dementia is a psychological disorder that is associated with other mental disorders but Alzheimer’s disease is an incurable and degenerative mental disorder that occurs mostly due to aging.

According to statistics, “about 4 million Americans, 90 percent of whom are age 65 and older, have Alzheimer’s disease and the prevalence of Alzheimer’s disease doubles every five years beyond age 65” (Hoffman, 2000, p.1). The statistics imply age is the major predisposing factor that leads to the Alzheimer’s disease although at some instances, there is an early onset attributed to genetic factors, but it is quite rare.

Alzheimer’s disease weakens the cognitive ability of the patient by destroying cells of the brain, unlike destruction that occurs in normal aging. Since the Alzheimer’s disease affects the brain, psychological characteristics of the disease include loss of memory, language interference, poor judgment, and change of personality. To understand psychological aspect of the Alzheimer’s disease, this essay explores literature review, development, symptoms, and causes of the disease in population.

Alzheimer’s disease As aforementioned, Alzheimer’s disease is a form of dementia that occurs due to aging; a psychological disorder that affects brain cells leading to diminished cognitive abilities and changed behavior. Over the history, the disease mostly affected the old people with the ages above 65 years.

Hoffman argues that, “Alzheimer’s disease is an irreversible, progressive brain disorder related with the changes in nerve cells that result in the death of brain cells. It occurs gradually and is not a normal part of the gaining process” (2000, p. 2). Earlier before its discovery in 1906 by Alois Alzheimer, psychiatrists considered it as an aging disease because it only affected old people. Based on the time of onset, there are two types of Alzheimer’s disease, the early onset and the late onset.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Early onset of the disease affects individual who are below 60 years and appears to be more degenerative although very rare. The late onset of the disease affects individuals above 60 years and is the most common disease. The discovery of the early onset type of the disease confirmed that Alzheimer’s disease is not an aging disease.

Research studies have revealed that prevalence of the Alzheimer’s disease is increasing exponentially due to change in lifestyles and the incurable nature of the disease. Statistics show that approximately 4 million of the Americans who are above 65 years old are suffering from the disease, which forms about 90% of the old people.

In addition, since there are more old women than men, the statistics show that about two third of the old people who are suffering from the disease are women. Based on these findings, scientists have predicted that, the incidences of Alzheimer’s disease are going to increase exponential until a cure is available.

Kantor explains that, in recent past “scientists have made great progress in unraveling the mysteries of Alzheimer’s disease; however, much is still unknown. Unless prevention or a cure is found, the number of Americans with Alzheimer’s disease could reach 14.3 million 50 years from now” (2011, p.30).

Given the 14 million patients and the nature of healthcare that the patients need, it means that government is going to spend great deal of resources in building and expanding nursing homes in order to cater for the increasing needs of the patients.

Since the Alzheimer’s disease is incurable and degenerative, the patients need special care for they do not have sufficient cognitive abilities to perform normal duties. The patients need complete attention of the caregivers in terms of feeding, bathing, dressing and washing among other basic assistance.

“Compared to non-dementia caregivers, larger proportions of Alzheimer’s patient caregivers experience employment complications, have less time for their own leisure activities and other family members, and suffer from physical, mental, and emotional stress due to care giving” (Hoffman, 2000, p. 3). The disease does not only affect patients, but also care givers thus necessitating intensive research concerning prevention and cure of the disease.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Development of Alzheimer’s Disease and it’s Effect on the Brain specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Development of Alzheimer’s Disease The development of the Alzheimer’s disease is a continuous process but there are three stages for the sake of understanding and classifying the extent of the disease. The four stages are pre-dementia stage, early stage, middle stage, and late stage, which consecutively follow the progression of the disease from its onset.

In pre dementia stage, one can easily confuse the Alzheimer’s disease with stress and aging process because signs and symptoms are not yet definitive for a psychiatrist to diagnose. Williamson argues that, during pre-dementia stage “nerve cell damage typically begins with cells involved in learning and memory and gradually spreads to cells that control other aspects of thinking, judgment and behavior, and eventually affects cells that control and coordinate movement” (2007, p.2).

At this stage, there are latent symptoms such as problem in language, slight change in behavior, and subtle change in movement. It is very hard for a psychiatrist to diagnose the disease at this stage unless with the use of diagnostic tools. In the early stage, patient’s cognitive ability continues to degenerate more as there is increased memory loss that is very evident. Moreover, there is increased language problem, poor reading and writing, impulses of aggression, instances of illusions, and irritability.

“Individuals at this stage have memory lapses, forgetting familiar words or names or the locations of keys, eyeglasses or other everyday objects, and these problems are not evident during a medical examination or apparent to friends, family or co-workers” (Berchtold, 1998, p. 5).

At this stage, the patients can feel the changes for they begin to realize that they have lost some ability to read, write, and even talk. Realizing that they have lost some abilities, the patients become dependent by asking for assistance in terms of reading, writing, and remembrance of important events. Psychiatrists can differentiate aging and the disease at this stage due to prevalence of the symptoms.

In the middle stage, the cognitive ability degenerates to the extent where the patient loses independence. Language problem become more evident at this stage as the patients have difficulties in fluency, reading, and writing.

Memory is also affected and the patients lose the ability to remember events and identity of even close relatives. At this stage, the patients also lose motor activity causing caregivers to move and guide them in their movements.

Williamson argues that, patients have “decreased capacity to perform complex tasks, such as marketing, planning dinner for guests, or paying bills and managing finances, reduced memory of personal history and become withdrawn socially” (2007, p.6). The gradual loss of memory and physical ability make the patient to become dependent on the caregivers in doing most of the activities.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Development of Alzheimer’s Disease and it’s Effect on the Brain by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In the late stage, the patient completely loses independence and begins to depend on caregivers on virtually all activities. The cognitive ability degenerates completely in that the patient cannot recall anything, speech reduces to mere utterances, and eventually reading and writing becomes impossible.

“At this stage, individuals may lose most awareness of recent experiences and events as well as of their surroundings and occasionally forget the name of their spouse or primary caregiver but generally can distinguish familiar from unfamiliar faces” (Williamson, 2007, p.7). The patients at this stage portray significant psychological and physical deficiency, as they become dependent on the caregivers until the day when they die.

Symptoms Alzheimer’s disease has psychological and physical symptoms. Loss of memory, problem with language, poor judgment, change in moods and loss of cognitive abilities are some of the psychological symptoms associated with the disease. According to American Academy of Neurology (AAN), “memory loss that affects job skills is the main symptom of Alzheimer’s disease because frequent forgetfulness or unexplainable confusion at home or in the workplace may signal that something’s wrong” (2009, p.7).

Language impairment is also a psychological symptom since the patient loses ability to coordinate speech, thus complicating effective communication. Poor judgment is another symptom that shows cognitive impairment in a patient. Due to poor judgment, the patient cannot perform simple arithmetic calculations, misplaces valuable things, or even dress awkwardly. Moreover, the patient also experiences intermittent mood swings and deficiency cognitive abilities that are evident in the change of behavior.

Physical symptoms associated with the disease include inability to perform normal tasks, change in personality, failure to recognize people or environment. Normally, the disease affects the brains cells making the patient lose ability to coordinate movement. At the late stage of the disease, the patient completely loses memory and subsequently coordination of the body.

Eventually, the patient becomes entirely dependent on the caregivers in order to fulfill daily activities such as washing, bathing, eating, and walking. “People’s personalities may change somewhat as they age, but a person with Alzheimer’s can change dramatically, either suddenly or over a period of time, for instance someone who is generally easygoing may become angry, suspicious, or fearful” (AAN, 2007, p.8).

Change in behavior is very evident to the people who are close to the patients as they depict unusual behaviors such as dressing wrongly, becoming aggressive, withdrawing from friends and losing ability to perform daily activities. In addition, the patient cannot perceive people or the environment, for example failing to recognize friends, usual places, and losing direction.

Causes Advancing age and genes are two main predisposing factors associated with the development of Alzheimer’s disease. Statistics show that the disease mostly affects older people of about the age 60 years and above. Michelle argues that, “advancing age is the most significant risk factor for Alzheimer’s disease since most people who develop the disease are over the age of 65, although the disease process is thought to begin years before cognitive and memory impairments are apparent” (2009, p.21). Therefore, old age is the most important predisposing factor of the Alzheimer’s disease because there are no incidences of the disease in young people.

Other research studies have also shown that occurrence of the Alzheimer’s disease in the population can be due to the genetic factors. The early onset of the disease in some instances is due to genetic effects while late onset may be due to aging. “The familial Alzheimer’s disease, which is passed on directly from generation to generation, accounts for only about 7 percent of the total incidence of Alzheimer’s disease” (Michelle, 2009, p.22).

Genes contribute significantly to the cases of early onset since late onset occurs due to sporadic nature of the disease. Despite the fact that Alzheimer’s disease is mostly sporadic in occurrence, studies have revealed other predisposing factors that contribute to the development of the disease in the population. These factors are unhealthy eating habits, stress, depression, smoking, brain injury, stroke, hypertension, diabetes, and inadequate exercise. These and other related factors affect production and functioning of neurotransmitters in the brain leading to impaired brain function and ultimately cause Alzheimer’s disease.

Conclusion Alzheimer’s disease is a disorder of the brain characterized by loss of memory and cognitive abilities making the patient unable to perform usual duties of life. The disease commonly affects old people of age 65 years and above due to decreasing cognitive ability. In American, the disease has affected approximately 4 million old people with a high percentage of women, while the scientists are predicting exponential increase in the incidences because it is incurable.

The Alzheimer’s disease is a terminal illness that progresses slowly through four stages of pre-dementia, early stage, middle stage, and late stage, which eventually leads to death. The major symptoms of the disease are loss of memory and physical impairment of the patient. Most research studies have established that the cause of the disease is sporadic old age and genes in young age.

References American Academy of Neurology. (2009). Alzheimer’s Disease. Alzheimer’s Association, 1-9.

Berchtold, C. (1998).Evolution in the Conceptualization of Dementia and Alzheimer’s Disease: The Journal of Mental Disorders, 1-33

Hoffman, M. (2000). Alzheimer’s Disease and Dementia. National Academy on an Aging Society, 1-17.

Kantor, D. (2011). Alzheimer’s Disease. National Institute of Health, 23-67.

Michelle, P. (2009). What Causes Alzheimer’s Disease. Alzheimer Society of Canada, 1-24

Williamson, J. (2007). Stages of Alzheimer’s Disease. Alzheimer’s Association, 1-43.

[supanova_question]

Interpretation of Hebrews 12:6-14 Report (Assessment) college essay help: college essay help

Table of Contents Following and Preceding Passages

Form Criticism and Structure

Redaction Criticism

In Relation to God

The Community

Conclusion

Works Cited

Following and Preceding Passages The preceding passages can be considered as part of the introduction. In these passages the author used an illustration to clarify his point and it is revealing that he used the concept of running a race. Interestingly, the race is a marathon and not about sprinting towards a finish line and therefore the fastest person gets the reward. Readers are made aware that the activity described herein is more likely about distance running rather than a 100-meter dash is based on the statement that endurance is the key factor that can win this race.

The preceding passages that have a bearing on Hebrews 12:6-14 is not only about the illustration of a marathon but it can even be argued that the introduction has three parts. The first one is the idea concerning the charge that the followers of Christ must develop endurance to win the race. It also suggests discipline and single-mindedness.

The second part of the introduction talks about an example of endurance and it is not the endurance commonly seen among athletes but the endurance exhibited by a man nailed to a cross. The author brought down the core of the argument by saying that Jesus did not only demand endurance and perseverance but more importantly made an example of his life. He did not only talk about the importance of “running the race” Jesus demonstrated that endurance means to die for the cause if necessary.

Finally, the last part of the introduction provides segue way to the main text and yet it is not less important. In this portion the author said that God disciplines his followers not because they are athletes competing in his honor. God disciplines his followers not because they are soldiers that are supposed to be trained, to hone their skills and to make them an invaluable part of God’s army.

There is only one reason why the LORD subjects His followers to a painful process and it is based on the fact that God does not treat them as royal subjects but treats them as children.

The passages that follow Hebrews 12:6-14 also provides the reader information that can help understand the said pericope. Immediately following the verses are statements regarding: 1) sin; 2) bitterness that defile many; 3) sexual immorality; 4) godlessness; and 5) disinheritance. This serves as some form of a warning as to what awaits those who refuse be purified and even those who chose to go away.

Form Criticism and Structure The literary form can be generally described as a sermon that contains a warning (Schenck, p.5). This is based on the fact that the author carefully laid down an illustration to illuminate what he was trying to say. There are other passages in the Book of Hebrews that uses the same literary form. For instance the same style can be seen in Hebrews 6:4-6.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The purpose of this style is to warn the believers but at the same time one should see a hint of encouragement. In this case this was achieved by showing the people that there is a precedent. Jesus Christ was the best example and he can be a role model in suffering and going through the process. Secondly, the suffering of the saints produces eternal glory as well as present gains such as a higher level of maturity seen in righteous actions (Andreasen, p.28).

Thus, one can see the rationale for the structure used in this pericope. There is a parallelism used to the suffering endured by Jesus on the cross and the glory that he experienced later on. A parallelism was used in pointing out that the same thing can happen to the believers who will endure and go through the process of purification; they too will receive their reward.

Redaction Criticism It is difficult to detect any revision or redaction made to the pericope. But there are those who contend that there is something strange with the omission of the concept of repentance. Theodore of Mopsuestia argued as to how can the believers strengthen their feeble knees and lift their drooping hands if they not repent (Heen, Krey,

[supanova_question]

New and Old Wars Comparison Essay essay help

The argument that there are “New wars” dissimilar to older forms of warfare is not only generalist, but also not supported by existing scholarly and objective literature on the subject. According to Mary Kaldor, “New Wars” differ from older forms of warfare in their goals, methods of implementation and financing.

I believe, and will show objective analysis in the subsequent paragraphs, that the only difference between “New Wars” and older types of warfare exists in the manner of financing; however, the goals and methods of implementation of warfare have remained the same throughout the existence of warfare.

In Kaldor’s view, the goals of the “New Wars” are to increase economic gain and impose identity politics “which is inherently exclusive and tends towards fragmentation” (2006). Identity politics involves a “claim to power on the basis of a particular identity” (Kaldor, 2006).

The imposition of identity politics in “New wars” results in the fragmentation of communities and massive resettlement of populations and refugee movement (for example the aftermath of genocide), so much that the movement of these refuges becomes not a by-product of war, but a central goal of it.

Concerning the methods of implementation of these “New wars”, Kaldor is of the view that during the last decades of the twentieth century, a new type of organized violence that incorporated war, organized violence, and human rights violations emerged.

This includes the “privatization of violence” (Kaldor, 2006) creating a scenario where the instruments and means of war are not held by the state but by War loads, criminal gangs and police forces within a particular state.

On the issue of financing these “New wars”, Kaldor argues that the state no longer mobilizes finances for the wars, but – especially in weak Third world governments – the fighting units finance themselves through plunder, hostage taking and the black market, or independently through trafficking in humans, dealing in drugs and arms trade.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On this matter, as stated in the introduction, I concur with Kaldor’s argument that the only difference between “New wars” and older types is in the modality of financing.

To counter kaldor’s theory concerning the goals and implementation methods of the “New wars”, the first counter-argument concerns the matter of goals of the war. Economic gain has always been the paramount objective of wars, and is not a feature exclusive to “New wars”.

More scrutiny and analysis of wars in contemporary times by “academics, policy analysts, and politicians” (Newman, 2004, p.180) has served to highlight the wars, bringing out deeper dynamics of the wars, but the main objectives like economic gain have always been present.

Even the contemporary factor of multinationals selling weapons to the warring parties serves the same purpose – profiting from war. Furthermore, Identity politics and wars based on fragmenting the society along the lines of race, ethnicity, and religion are as old as war itself.

The Armenian genocide of World War I and the Holocaust of World War II are prime examples. The Rwandan genocide of 1994, a supposed “New War”, has similar features with the two previous genocides, which according to Kaldor, are old types of warfare.

In conclusion, I have presented Kaldor’s “New Wars” theory, identifying its goals, methods and financing. I have argued against its goals and methods, focusing on the argument that both goals and methods can be found throughout history in older forms of warfare.

Various violent conflicts, from the present and past, have been addressed and an analysis of the Rwandan genocide, the holocaust, and the Armenian genocide posed. Moreover, the role of the media and advances in information has been analyzed to show that just because there is much more analysis and discussion about wars nowadays does not necessarily make them ‘new’.

We will write a custom Essay on New and Old Wars Comparison specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More References Kaldor, M. (2006). New and Old Wars, 2nd ed. Cambridge: Polity.

Newman, E. (2004). The ‘New Wars’ debate: A historical perspective is needed. Security Dialogue vol. 35(2) 173-189.

[supanova_question]

Different Aspects of Culture in Hemingway, Wilson and O’Connor Analytical Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

In the short stories The Three Day Blow by Ernest Hemingway, The Man who Shot Snapping Turtles by Edmund Wilson and A Good Man is Hard to Find, by Flannery O’Connor, certain cultural features described in the fiction persist in the United States of today.

In The Three Day Blow the cultural element described that persists in American society concerns the fear of commitment that many men harbor and how that fear conflicts with their fear of being alone. In The Man who Shot Snapping Turtles, a cultural feature described in the story that still exists in American culture today is the belief that some of the animals created by God are more desirable than others.

In A Good Man is Hard to Find, the cultural feature that the story describes which continues today is the belief that the past represents a better version of American culture than the present, and that the current culture of American society is badly degraded from its former heyday.

The first story to be analyzed is The Three Day Blow by Ernest Hemingway. The Three Day Blow is the oldest of the three stories, first published 1925, yet this story describes a cultural feature very much alive in American society today – the fear of marriage and the conflict that arises in men when they must decide between getting married and staying alone.

Often the fear of being alone is greater than the fear of being married, thus marriage wins out; however the conflict never really dies. Hemingway illustrates the heart of this conflict at the end of the story, after Nick and Bill have had a lot to drink and have become more liberal with their truths.

Bill tells Nick that he was “very wise…to bust off that Marge business…It was the only thing to do. If you hadn’t, by now you’d be back home working trying to get enough money to get married….Once a man’s married he’s absolutely bitched, Bill went on. He hasn’t got anything more…He’s done for. You’ve seen the guys that get married…They get this sort of fat married look” (Hemingway 23).

This is the first mention we have heard of Nick’s former girlfriend, and in the face of Bill’s speech, the character Nick “said nothing” (Hemingway 24). Presumably Nick regrets not marrying the woman in question, not only because he is silent, but because “the liquor had all died out of him and left him alone” (Hemingway 24).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this story Hemingway describes the cultural fear – from the point of view of males, however the feeling affects both genders – of commitment and the feeling of loneliness that many single people experience persists today.

The second story under analysis is The Man who Shot Snapping Turtles by Edmund Wilson. This short story was first published in the Atlantic Monthly magazine in 1942, over 60 years ago, yet a significant cultural feature found in this story that still exists in American culture today is the understanding that some of God’s creatures are better than others.

In The Man who Shot Snapping Turtles Mr. Stryker makes a distinction between the ducks as desirable and the snapping turtles as undesirable, even though in cultural Christian understanding, God created both. “This time Mr. Stryker decided to do a better job. He came to see me again and startled me by holding forth in a vein that recalled the pulpit.

“If God has created the mallard,” he said, “A thing of beauty and grace, how can He allow these dirty filthy mud-turtles to prey upon His handiwork and destroy it?” (Wilson 257). The narrator responds that “the reptiles came before the birds. And they survive with the strength God gave them” (Wilson 257).

To which Mr. Stryker counters “how do we know that God isn’t getting old? How do we know that some of His lowest creatures aren’t beginning to get out of hand and clean up on the higher ones?” (Wilson 257).

We see this hierarchy applied to animals and perpetuated today in American society in the distinction made between so called undesirable creatures such as rats and roaches and so called beautiful and desirable creatures such as swans, horses or dogs.

The last story under discussion is A Good Man is Hard to Find, by Flannery O’Connor. A Good Man is Hard Find was published in 1955, however to this day some of the cultural aspects of American life that it describes are still in place. The most significant cultural aspect of this that is still relevant today is the belief that the American present is a degraded version of its past.

We will write a custom Essay on Different Aspects of Culture in Hemingway, Wilson and O’Connor specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The grandmother of A Good Man is Hard to Find represents the belief that Americans in the past treated each other better, had better manners and were more trustworthy. We see this belief illustrated in the section of the story when the grandmother and the owner of the diner, Red Sammy, have a conversation about how things used to be compared to how they are now.

“You can’t win, he said. You can’t win…and he wiped his sweating red face off with a gray handkerchief. These days you don’t know who to trust…Ain’t that the truth? A good man is hard to find, Red Sammy said. Everything is getting terrible. I remember the day you could go off and leave your screen door unlatched. Not no more. He and the grandmother discussed better times” (O’Connor 235).

Culturally, the understanding that the present has become worse than the past, and that morals have eroded over time, is still very prevalent in American society. Conversations such as the following between Red Sam and the grandmother could have been written today, rather than over 50 years ago.

“Red Sam said it was no use talking about it, she was exactly right. Listen, the grandmother almost screamed, I know you’re a good man. You don’t look a bit like you have common blood. I know you must come from nice people!” (O’Connor 235).

The short stories The Three Day Blow by Ernest Hemingway, The Man who Shot Snapping Turtles by Edmund Wilson and A Good Man is Hard to Find, by Flannery O’Connor all contain certain cultural features that can still be found in the United States of today, even though each story was published in the last century.

In The Three Day Blow the cultural element described that persists in American society centers around fear of commitment; in The Man who Shot Snapping Turtles, the cultural feature we still see in the culture of the United States today is the hierarchal belief that some animals created by God are better than others.

In A Good Man is Hard to Find, the story describes a belief that the American past was infinitely better than its current manifestation, and that the present culture of American society is a shoddy version of a former glorious past.

Works Cited Hemingway, Ernest. “The Three Day Blow.” 50 Great Short Stories. Ed. Milton Crane. New York: Random House, 1988. 16- 27. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Different Aspects of Culture in Hemingway, Wilson and O’Connor by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More O’Connor, Flannery. “A Good Man is Hard to Find.” 50 Great Short Stories. Ed. Milton Crane. New York: Random House, 1988. 229-245. Print.

Wilson, Edmund. “The Man Who Shot Snapping Turtles.” 50 Great Short Stories. Ed. Milton Crane. New York: Random House, 1988. 254-267. Print.

[supanova_question]

What is meant by “wicked problems of design”? Expository Essay best college essay help

In his article, Richard Buchanan quotes Rittel as having defined wicked problems as “a class of social system problems which are ill-formulated, where the information is confusing, where there are many clients and decision makers with conflicting values, and where the ramifications in the whole system are thoroughly confusing” (“Wicked Problems In Design Thinking” 15).

In this definition we get to understand that a wicked problem is a situation that confronts designers in whatever new situation that presents itself before them in their daily works.

Therefore in any field such as science of the artifact, architecture, engineering or writing this becomes a technical problem where a designer has to be creative in coming up with a design that responds to unique situations.

Therefore owning this problem is being accountable for the responses to artifacts regardless of the fact that there are numerous conflicting views which would come out from the users and which the designer can never have a prior knowledge.

This is as a result of big differences between the liberal arts, especially the old, and the new; because liberal arts no longer treats science as primary and art as secondary but saw science itself as art. This gives us an understanding as to why in design thinking will continue to expand meanings and connections in today’s culture.

But there are emerging problems in the relationship between art and sciences, industry and manufacturing, marketing and distribution and the final consumer who utilizes the final product of this design thought. There is a disagreement of the notion that design is a science but what is clear is that everyone could benefit from appreciation of design principles and thought pattern.

The contemporary culture has been affected by design in a way that can be understood when this effect is classified into four areas of analysis. The first one is the symbolic and visual communication which encompasses the traditional definition of the graphic designer.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The second one is the design of material objects which concerns itself with form and appearance of everyday product like clothing, tools, Vehicles et cetera. Third, is the design of activities as well as organized services like the traditional management concern for logistics, aimed at enabling human beings attain objectives in life.

This is where the concept of strategic planning and design thinking can be used to improve aspects of intelligence, meaningfulness and human experience. The fourth area is the design in complex systems or environment for living, working among other uses as playing and learning.

In this forth area the designer is confronted with the problem of coming up with a sustainable and ecological designs that are able to integrate man into the environment.

This is why under the knowledge of the wicked problem a designer can not predict the kind of responses the critics or stakeholders such as the consumers will make to an artifact design.

This lack of prior knowledge is very essential to a fuller appreciation of the wickedness of design and has been fully expounded by a design theorist Richard Buchanan.

Buchanan tries to develop the concept of wicked problems by evaluating the responsibility of designing and the function of the art quality in such a design and by doing so Buchanan, closely classifies wicked problem with rhetoric.

In this respect, the most important thing is that, art skill that lies behind practice brings the relationship between determinacy and indeterminacy in design thinking.

We will write a custom Essay on What is meant by “wicked problems of design”? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This design thinking is highly based on determinate problems with conditions which are definite and it is from this point that the biggest task of a designer is to present those conditions in a precise manner and then provide a solution.

Contrary, the wicked problems approach reveals that there is what can be called a fundamental indeterminacy in all wicked problems apart from the most trivial design problem; the design issues.

As designers try to articulate their artifacts, they are confronted with many needs and expectations of the people and they may be confused on what theme to deal with (“Wicked Problems In Design Thinking” 3-20)

Have we seen any in the design literature thus far (Forty or Raizman)?

Raizman and Forty have highlighted many difficult situations which are confusing information in design for instance a situation where an artifact can be critiqued in terms of its relationship with technology. The technology phenomena may not have been in the mind of the designer but he must be ready to own such an omission.

Therefore the consumers, in their analysis play a role of influencing the use of design. Another wicked problem is where consumers attach meaning to displays in shop windows.

Therefore, Raizman also engages time with the definition of a designer where both are seen to be influenced by economical factors and economic situations to appeal to designers for a number of reasons (“Declaration by Design” 91-110).

Discuss (explain) the relationships between gender, ergonomics, management science and design in the evolution of office work and corporate identity.

Today the office work has evolved to suite the different needs of the technologically advanced way of doing things. Management of human resources and other resources requires advanced design of time management, equipment and the specific requirements at different levels in the workplace.

The issue of gender in design comes in when considering the needs of different gender in their daily life and not only limited to the work plane. This factor is dominant in the clothing, furniture and the design in management.

Not sure if you can write a paper on What is meant by “wicked problems of design”? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Ergonomics for instance is the simple science of articulating how to design user friendly equipment and work places which fits well with the user and at the same time having in mind special needs with regard to other factors such as gender and work type.

This designing must be done with a clear knowledge of interactions among different elements of a system and humans as well as the profession that applies theory and principle.

Gender issue is very important for any company when doing its ergonomics because the furniture and the equipment to be designed should be commensurate with the needs of different gender. This is done with an aim of optimizing human wellbeing and therefore overall system performance.

As a part of office work and corporate identity, ergonomics is engaged in order to achieve health and productivity and thus it realizes the need for the welfare of the worker, as a stakeholder in the workplace, in coming up with safe furniture and user friendly interfaces to office machines.

For example the proper ergonomic design is required so as to prevent strains and injuries which could be caused by poor design of equipment and which have a potential to cause long term disability. When the office workers are comfortable they are able to serve clients well.

Moreover, a best design boosts the morale and confidence of the workers so that they are proud of their work and thus serve clients well. This in turn adds a mark to the investor confidence and thus corporate identity. Many people and workers like identifying with firms which have smart designs ranging from the office furniture to the architectural design.

Ergonomics help to minimize the expenses incurred in form of compensation to workers. Any work place can deploy reactive or proactive approach where reactive ergonomics is applied in case something requires to be fixed while proactive involves a process of fixing the issue before they become a bigger problem.

Therefore in fixing these Ergonomics is deployed in designing the equipment, task and environment. When all these factors are well managed workers will be safe, motivated and proud to work at a reduced cost and increased corporate identity (Forty 6-245).

Of which elements does design ability consist? To which challenges and problems are these elements a response?

Design ability involves the skill of a designer in translating imaginations, ideas and values to materials for contemplation or even appreciation. Therefore it is a skill at imagining or stipulating a combination of materials into an effective coherent whole.

For a designer therefore he or she should embrace the wickedness that a design carries and be ready to face conflicting challenges during the artifact composition. This open mind will also involve articulating dissenting discussions in perspective and trying to retain them as one in presence of numerous responses to an artifact.

This way a design ability to embrace wicked problem is the ability to accept the problem of responsiveness. The element of skill is very important because it is born of the fact that consumers, are very critical in dealing with products and therefore where skill is employed it will portend professionalism and consumers will be appealed. A designer should also consider the element of time.

This is because people like the recent developments and especially the rhetoric. For instance in the time of baroque, as discussed in the next question, what was popular in the time was the influence of the catholic church and therefore to respond to the needs of the people.

Therefore designers of architecture had to produce artifacts which reflected what the church considered ideal for the society. In addition this will be in line with what pleases the top class of the time as well as the needs of the majority consumers of the design.

A designer has the ability, however, to shape the perception of the people and the consumers because they critique artifacts based on presupposed characteristics. The element of influence is therefore common in the design and can be used to influence a thought pattern of the people; for example during the time of romanticism, art could be used to express unrealistic themes and the element of romantics.

This was used to counter the challenge posed by the former artists and designs which emphasized on rational and rendered emotional non existent (Cross 105-120)

Define the following in three columns: One column the approximate dates, another for concrete or physical characteristics of design of the period, and a third column for the ideas being expressed in style in whose interest

Approximate dates Concrete or physical characteristics of design of the period The ideas being expressed in style in whose interest Baroque Late 16th century to the early 18th century in Europe. The Baroque time got much of its influence from the roman catholic church especially when the church ruled that the themes of the art to be used should communicate direct emotional involvement. The aristocratic class of the time took the advantage of the dramatic artistic style to impress visitors and expressing power and dominance in the society. The physical characteristics of their design are seen in their architecture of the period where baroque palaces were used and applied around an entrance of courts, the beautiful stair cases with reception rooms in a way that depicted a sense of affluence and material wealth. The works of the period was characterized by excessive ornamentation or what is called complexity of lines. As seen, baroque had a lot of control from the Roman Catholic and the autocratic class of the time. The complexity of the work, the expression by massive ornamentation was to express triumphant power of autocrats and the church at the time. The religious terms baroque work would express emotional attachments and to Catholics in particular who responded to the then invading Protestant’s reformation movements. This is considered in the architecture adopted by the catholic church exemplified by the cathedral of Morelia Michoacan in Mexico. Rococo 18th-century Rococo developed when baroque artists started giving up symmetry and added on their works ornamentations, became florid and playful especially in furniture, mirrors and tiny sculptures. There were also tapestry, relief and wall paintings. The period was also characterized by love of shell-like curves and a lot of focus on decorative arts. The design was highly merged with Germany baroque traditions. It was well established in churches and palaces in southern Germany. However rococo was a more secular form of design than baroque. The ideas expressed by the design were therefore not purely religious but secular with light hearted themes. Neo-Classicism Mid-18th century In its details, it was a reaction against Rococo style of naturalistic ornaments. It denied its architectural formula’s from that art of classical Greece. The design is characterized by planar qualities rather than sculptural base relief’s and presents individual pictures as isolated. Neo-Classicism was highly characteristic of Greek and roman artistic styles. Empire Style Early-19th-Century This was a design movement which revealed itself through furniture, architecture, visual arts and other decorative arts. The themes of ancient Greek and roman empire were dominant in the art of empire style. Buildings were craftily decorated with simple timber frames and box like constructions, which were mostly vanished using expensive mahogany. It was intended to bring out the idea of Napoleon’s kingship, leadership and the French political and religious state at the time. Romanticism Western Europe during 17th century and went on till the second half of 18th century (1835 to 1925) It emerged as a reaction to neoclassism and was characterized by the ideas and ideologies especially the love of nature, the emotions against rationality. The forms and designs emphasized on the emotions and the positions of and the role of artists. The designs were also characteristic of unreal and supernatural features and portrayal of the world in a new light. The romanticism put the artist at the centre. At the beginning it was meant for high class educated people but later it became an interest for everyone in the period. Gothic Revival Originated in mid eighteenth century This movement sought to revive medieval forms which were to be different from the classical styles. It was characterized by detailed English furniture which employed glazing patterns. They were found on the carpet design and laces. It was also characteristic of candlelight and wall paintings. It had church connotations especially the catholic church which deployed these designs in their buildings. Respect for materials

In design materials are not just another idea but part of the art itself. Without materials there is no design and therefore respect for materials involves engaging them in the design discourse. We can not have a complete design from immaterial things or ideas and thus real things must be involved.

Suppressive design strategy

This is a design strategy that does not emphasize emotions but rationality. It involves a counter attack design theme, situation, occasion or an event put into a design. There are thousands of strategies used across all realms of life today like the fire fighting design for fire suppression and a drug design for suppressing a disease.

Archaic design strategy

In this strategy a design artifact is used which belongs to ancient or historical times in details. Thus appreciating the artistic design becomes both difficult and redolent of ancient art experience thus draws nostalgia. The design strategy however, unlike the theme brought about by the word archaic is very rich in artistic touch.

Utopian design strategy

This design strategy is used to produce artifacts whose themes emphasize perfection in society. When closely analyzed, an artifact design would bring out a flawless society in a way that is far from real experience. The design therefore will take one’s mind into another unreal world full of perfection. (Raizman 1-78)

Relative to discussions in lecture assesses Lidwell et al’s discussion of “form follows function.” How do their examples suggest a broader set of categories than alluded to by “form follows function?”

This phrase originated from an American sculptor Louis Sullivan whose thinking was ahead of the architectural approach. Sullivan actually talked of form ever following function and to him; this was a distilled wisdom in form of an aesthetic credo.

In the area of design, form follows function principle is used and seen as a sensible thing but when closely examined, the principle becomes a Pandora’s Box which is open to numerous interpretations.

Most critics reason that, a complete design solution can not be achieved by merely articulating the relationship that exists in form, purpose and the intended use. Therefore there is always a question of design integrity and this comes to be an important and lively debate in art and design.

The usual meaning of form follows design is very shallow however; and for that case, there have been developed applications of the principles in different fields. In architecture the modernist architects after the 1930s took the ornament decorative elements and incorporated them in the modern buildings.

Many architecturers of the time used decoration in buildings as their signature and the most famous of these is the “writhing green ironwork that covers the entrance canopies of the Carson Scott in a department store in the south state street in Chicago” (Lidwell et al. 5).

The principle can also be used in relation to product design and this can be seen in a remarkable episode of the 1935, when an American auto industry delayed the attempt to introduce what was referred to as optimal aerodynamics forms into mass production.

This principle therefore has been used by many industries in design to advance their client’s requirements. A good example is the streamlined Ferrari F430 meant for car race which is made to conform to its functions.

In software engineering this principle is applied in the structure and the quality internal to a working software artifact that tells a lot about the requirements of its construction and not the process.

Even if this fails to leave out the element of process, the requirements for any design are thought to lead to the similar end. In evolution theory, anatomy has modeled entities according to their requirements. A good example is the giraffe whose taller neck enables it to reach leaves of tall trees.

Most works that discuss the topic of form follows function analyses about how everyday objects communicate, how man uses them and how the design is affected by the form and the function.

The authors explore numerous occasions when for example products develop in line with technology and the amount of function that a design product has increases. As the amount of function increases, the way a product communicates on these functions tends to be forgotten and thus the form follows function.

This would means that it is harder to use a forgotten or misused design and a good example is the telephone. When a team of people invented the telephone they invented what seemed to be plausible ways of controlling the details of the phone.

In most cases these features may not have gained much thought and thus the technology had designed such questions as, how do I answer this? And so forth.

The design for everyday object dictates that when designing for people, two fundamental principles are core: provision of a good conceptual model and making things visible.

This means that, a product may not have a visible function but how the product communicates matters; and this refers to the form of the design. Therefore the law here is that form is very essential because it is a way for any design to communicate with the user and that any product must make a connection and be in a position to be appreciated.

Why would students of design be interested in communication and media studies? Why should students of media and communication studies be interested in the history of design?

Communication studies involve studying on how a system of interaction is realized between the sender and the receiver. Specifically communication involves sharing of meaning for mutual understanding and for the purpose of soliciting a response.

Therefore communication between the sender and the receiver of the message brings out the meaning between the two and this must be viewed as having one’s informative intention.

Design process involves communication and information as an end and is seen as a continuous process of change that has to be perfect because many stakeholders are to be involved. For this case, it should be remembered that consumers of design artifacts are key stakeholders in determining the meaning of the artworks.

The design process should have a high level of concurrency and design. Information should be well structured so as to acquire the right status, version and information. Creators of such designs should also get overview and transparency on the recent design in process and progress.

For this case the designer requires information, updates and feed back from other specialized designers who can give guidance and directions to prevent mistakes that many occur when working with outdated information. We saw one of the wicked problems of design is that consumers can determine the need for a design.

This for commercial purpose can turn out to be a tragedy to a designer if he is not in line with the rhetoric of the day. Communication and media studies will greatly be needed in enriching skills, information, function and form of a design which will appeal, to the needs and the interest of the consumers.

The history of design on the other hand is very essential to the students of communication studies. This is because for one, the history of design gives basis of the way meaning has been conveyed over time and how design as a media was used as a way of communicating information.

On the other hand media and communication studies are not separable from rhetoric. Therefore instead of these students learning rhetoric as a simple verbal discipline, they could also study the changing conceptions of the subject matter. This way interpretation of design forms can apply in the interpretations of communication and media studies (Raizman 6-245).

Which material realizations of ideas and agendas drove “Design Reform” through out the 19th century in Great Britain?

Design reform has occurred especially in the realization that design relates very closely to production technologies, innovation and new materials. The fact that Great Britain tried to use industrial design to showcase its industrial superiority is evident of how design can reform to suite a purpose.

The wave of industrial revolution was sweeping throughout the Great Britain in the 19th century and so this was the rhetoric of the century. The idea of political superiority therefore called for a need to express to the rest of the world, the ability and the breakthrough of the Great Britain. Since design is a media of such expression, much of it was used.

Apart from this political role, there was a real economic agenda in the reformation of design as expressed by William Morris whose ideas were influenced by the pre-Raphaelite Brothers.

He and his friends established a company which made decorative objects for homes including wall paper, textiles, furniture as well as stained glass. This design reform to commercial purposes was to spread during the 19th century and the late twentieth century and influenced the establishment of numerous associations and craft communities (Forty 6-245).

Works Cited Buchanan, Richard. Declaration by Design. Design Discourse. By Margolin Victor. New York: University of Chicago Press, 1989. Print.

Buchanan, Richard. Wicked Problems in Design Thinking. The Idea of Design, A Design Issue Reader. By Margolin Victor. New York: MIT press, 1995. Print.

Cross, Nigel. Exploration in Design Studies. Discovering Design: Explorations in Design Studies. By Richard Buchanan, et al. New York: University of Chicago Press, 1995.

Forty, Adrian. Objects of Desire: Design and Society since 1750. New York: Thames and Hudson, 1992. Print.

Lidwell, William, et al. Universal Principles of Design, Revised and Updated: 125 Ways to Enhance Usability, Influence Perception, Increase Appeal, Make Better Design Decisions, and Teach through Design. 2nd ed. New York: Rockport Publishers, 2010. Print.

Raizman, David. History of Modern Design, Laurence King. 2nd ed. London: Garamond Press, 2010. Print.

[supanova_question]

Psychopathologies: Co-occurring Diagnoses Analytical Essay a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Co-occurrence

Disordered personalities versus normal personality

Not Otherwise Specified (NOS)

Mixed anxiety-depressive disorder

Categorical and dimensional models of classification

Potentially more useful model

Failures of categorical models of classification

Reference List

Co-occurrence Comorbidity is a term used to describe the existence of one or more distinct disorders other than the primary disorder with each having its own pathology, etiology as well as treatment implications. Some authors like Israel, Lilienfeld and Waldman have proposed that the term comorbidity be abandoned and be substituted by the term co-occurrence (Samuel

[supanova_question]

A Practical Proposal Addressing a Local Problem Essay online essay help: online essay help

The following is a paper on a practical proposal addressing a local problem. This paper is a summary of my research on the employees’ rights violation at the giant Wal-Mart retail stores.

The paper has information on how the rights of the employees have been violated (low salary, poor working conditions, employee discrimination and inadequate health care).

Due to the employees’ violation at Wal-Mart, the information in the paper provides guidance on how workers can go about resolving their issue (by forming or joining trade unions). It goes in depth to explain how these unions work and finally gives a justification on the whole issue.

Wal-Mart is the largest retail store in America and the world. The retail store is still spreading its dominance worldwide, starting in Asia where it has its stores in over ten countries, Europe and South America. The giant retail store is still planning to expand its business dealings on an even wider scope in the near future.

The giant store possesses incentives that are geared towards profit making, due to the recent recession though, the incentives tend to hurt its workers. With Wal-Mart’s effort to make a way into hypermarket cultures all over the world, lots of severe setbacks have come into play.

What is more, low-wages, low benefits, employment discrimination, poor healthcare, anti-union policies, and bad working conditions have made Wal-Mart an evil business in the eyes of their employees. This paper will therefore concentrate on Wal-Mart’s employee violations, propose a solution to this and finally find a justification on the whole issue.

“With about two million employees worldwide, Wal-Mart has faced a torrent of lawsuits and issues with regards to its workforce. These issues involve low wages, poor working conditions, inadequate health care, employee discrimination, as well as issues involving the company’s strong anti-union-policies” (Keil

[supanova_question]

Concept of Industrial Psychology Essay essay help

Industrial Psychology also Called Organizational Psychology is an emerging branch of psychology and has also attracted keen interest to psychologist due to the role it plays in the current day communities especially in the management of organizations.

Organizational psychology also abbreviated as IO is the branch of psychology that is scientifically studies the behaviors of employees, workplaces, how the employees interact with their workplaces, the workplace environment and its effect on the employee’s behaviors as well as organizational behavior.

From this definition it can be concluded that organizational behavior is divided into two sub branches: human (industrial) as well as organizational psychology. Many psychologists argue that the two sub genres overlap and cannot be easily separated.

Industrial psychology is interested in the way in which employees behaviors and attitudes can be enhanced. The birth of this branch of psychology can be traced back to the early 1990. Initially it was referred to as business psychology with the term industrial psychology coming into use during the First World War.

The terms business and industrial were co-opted in the post war period to give birth to business and industry’s psychology. However, the term business was dropped from the definition and as such it only remained as industrial psychology. This means that this branch of psychology was only interested in the industrial (human) aspect of workplace psychology.

The organizational bit of psychology was later co-opted and thus the discipline became industrial and organizational psychology in the 1970s, but the two terms have increasingly become intertwined such that the discipline is currently known as industrial/organizational psychology. Today it is both an academic and a professional discipline (Freedheim, 2003).

Industrial Psychology differs from other branches of psychology in that it is more application based than theoretical. This discipline unlike many other branches of psychology is diverse as it borrows heavily from other non psychology disciplines such as organizational management and leadership.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Furthermore industrial psychology studies scientifically, very specific issues that are associated with the workplaces. Such issues include on the job training, staff development tests among others (Freedheim, 2003).

Business leaders, managers, administrators, business owner as well as human resource practitioners have found the place of industrial psychology indispensable in modern organizational management. This discipline has helped these professional top expand their knowledge as well as skills and as such are able to comprehend the thought processes attitudes as well the minds of workers especially in the workplace environment.

Such knowledge other than improving organizational management efficiency also helps in bridging the understanding gap that exists between workers and their employers. Furthermore, industrial psychology has also helped bosses to understand the different types of personalities who work under them and as such are able to match job roles and responsibilities and the specific personalities that exist in these organizations. Understanding of the personality’s types and what job each type of personality is suited to is crucial during recruitment.

Recruiters are able to determine what job applicant’s posses the necessary personalities to fit in the specific vacancies that exist in those organizations. Industrial psychology also borrows from Maslow theory of human needs and uses this thru to develop motivational mechanism for employees.

As such using the Maslow’s theory, human resource practitioners are able to motivate employees to self actualize using such motivations factors as money (salaries, allowances and bonuses), job security, promotions and socislistaiosn aspects such as social outing as well as team working.

In borrowing from Sigmund Freud human personality theory on id, ego and super ego, Industrial Psychology has been useful in helping managers to understand the parent-child type of relationship. When an employer reacts like a boss an employee is likely to react like a child and as such be lees productive. To avoid such occurrences, industrial psychology helps manger to avoid parent- child interactions and employee a more professional approach to management (Landy

[supanova_question]

Just War Revisited: Why Pacifism Qualifies as a Viable Alternative in the Modern International Realm Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Pacifism, which implies that no war is or could be just, has in recent years received considerable attention from academics and war theorists as the world seems to reel from one armed conflict to another. The doctrine, however, has received loads of disparagements from critics, who advance lopsided discourses and justifications of going to war under the tenets of the just war theories (Charles 336).

Although there are diverse conceptions of pacifism which seems to ignite diverse reactions from professionals and the general public, ranging from outright impracticability to differences in geopolitical realities, this paper will argue from the standpoint that pacifism is indeed a viable alternative in the modern international realm.

Although some nations have been noted to progress unorthodox activities such as state-sponsored terrorism and actions of sabotage, the kind of violence and killing that armed confrontations instigate in the name of military interventions is insurmountably objectionable (Alexandra 590).

When war is evaluated against the backdrop of the proliferation of weapons of mass destruction currently in the hands of state actors as well as non-state operatives, it will dawn on many that searching for peaceful means to resolve the conflicts that continue to affect the modern world is the only way to go as doing otherwise, especially engaging the military to use such weapons on civilian populations, is intrinsically immoral (Charles 336).

One of the strong areas of pacifism is its “…commitment to peace-building and to finding alternatives to war and violence as responses to social and political conflict” (Atack 1). On this account, according to this author, pacifism strives to abolish armed conflicts through the employment of absolutely nonviolent methodologies to decisively deal with social and political conflict, whether arising internally or between nations.

Peace-building is an inherent good, while war is seen in the eyes of many as not only unfair, but also costly in terms financial, emotional, demographic, and practical variables (Alexandra 595). What’s more, peace is more conducive to the welfare of people than the employment of any violence or forceful means under the disguise of promoting world peace. In consequence, major players on the world scene must look for peaceful mechanisms, including arbitration and sanctions, to tame the aggressors of peace, and in no time should human interactions be governed by violent or belligerent relations.

Arguing from a consequentialist or utilitarian perspective of pacifism, it is clear that the world should embrace nonviolent means to deal with conflicts by virtue of the fact that the benefits brought by engaging in violence, force or war are far much less than evils that such engagements may bring to the participants as well as to the civilian population (Mosley para. 25).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The lessons learnt from the U.S. invasion of Iraq under President Bush preemption and prevention strategy are still fresh, and the consequences of using such strategies will go down the annals of history as one of the most inhumane by virtue of the fact that the war has shattered many families, not mentioning the casualties involved.

Exercising peaceful means to solve the Iraq problem, if there was any, could have prevented such odious bloodshed. Today, many political analysts are of the opinion that America is now less safe than it was before the invasion, courtesy of using a conflict resolution approach that occasioned more harm than good. This observation demonstrates why world players must employ pacifism as a moral alternative so as to maintain and safeguard world peace.

Works Cited Alexandra, A. Political Pacifism. Social Theory

[supanova_question]

Globalization in Australia Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Globalization involves an increased unanimity of the global economic activities through eradication of the common barriers such as tariffs, and import duties. Globalization may also involve an improved way of sharing ideas, languages or culture among nations.

Any aspect or attribute that has managed to move and be shared among nations leads to globalization. The aspect of globalization has both negative and positive impacts to the nation. Globalization has changed various ways of doing things in Australia. For instance, through globalization most of people in Australia have improved their ways of travelling, their eating habits, and generally their living standards.

The major part that has been affected by globalization in Australia is the economic sector. Australia has been able to enjoy a free and open markets, whereby the importers and the exporters are subjected to a less tax.

Through globalization, Australia has realized a rapid growth of industrial competition hence increasing both the quality and the quantity of production, and the consumers are left to enjoy the lower prices for the goods they are consuming. Globalization has come with many changes in Australia and the whole world, changes such as even the impacts of terrorism.

The Australia was found through the globalization of the 19th century. The focus of this globalization was moving from Europe to other corners of the world as people used to describe it. The globalization of that period was very slow as things used to happen through the longest route, as there were no otherwise.

In terms of communication, there were very slow means of conveying the intended messages. It was an era whereby the letters were used in various places to pass the messages. There were no quick means and hence a delayed response. In terms of transport, the means were also ineffective and people could take ages to reach their destinations.

Economically, Australia suffered a great deal due to the presence of many barriers of trade. For them to import some commodities, this would cost the country much money due to the import duties imposed on the cash transactions. When the country would be preparing to export some of their commodities to other countries as a way of boosting their economy, these barriers prohibited. When exporting, the commodities would sell at a very lower price due to the export duties hence realizing a very little profit and sometimes even a loss due to several expenses incurred.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As far as globalization is concerned, Australia has also developed greatly in terms of culture. In the past, the country survived mostly on the cultural practices and beliefs. People could not interact freely as they are doing these days.

People relied on some specialists for important information, unlike these days when globalization is advancing day-by-day. In the past, people from a certain community would just live together without interacting with others. This was because of minimal migration of people from rural areas to urban areas.

There were specific places for particular group of people. Through this separation of various communities, there were no chances of people to learn from each other especially exchanging ideas of different cultural groups. The fear between different communities existed and that is why people could not interact with one another well.

The political aspect of Australia in the past was also of low quality before the globalization. There were traditional ways of campaigning that most politicians used to apply. The citizens could not have a good chance of choosing the right leader as people relied on the cultural ways of doing politics.

The citizens were not enlightened as they are these days of a globalized society. Australian citizens believed on leadership of some specific individuals due to lack of enough information that would aid in their processes of decision-making. In the past days, limitation of information sources made people to make uninformed decisions and hence there were some limitations for the development of the country as a whole.

For the country to develop in all sectors especially economically there is need for the citizens to have access to various sources of information to enlighten them. In terms of business, Australia was ranging behind due to lack of business knowledge and many limitations as one is conducting his or her businesses.

Several doors to business were locked waiting for globalization. For instance, people could not have access to raw materials outside the country as the international businesses were not available, and even citizens were not aware of how to conduct international businesses.

We will write a custom Essay on Globalization in Australia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The few people who were conducting domestic businesses in Australia could not prosper very well as they were contained within the country hence minimal business knowledge. The business sector whether a private or public is relied much to earn some profits for the government through taxation, but in those days the government could not earn much from these investments due to the limitations that existed.

Among all the histories of globalization in Australia, technology was the worst hit. The things that people are doing and accomplishing within a blink of a second took people hours or days to accomplish. Almost in every sector of the country, there is need of applying some technology to make the work easier for the people who were involved

For instance, several industries like transport and communication, health industries, education industries, and many more all work effectively and deliver their services to the public by technology. In the past days in Australia, such industries could use more resources both financially and human labor to accomplish their missions as the technological knowhow of the nation was low and needed some advancement.

The citizens of Australia suffered a great deal in the processes of getting some problems solved especially in the education and health industries. For instance, a major change of technology in Australia came in 1975 through the emergence of Australian Academy of Technological Sciences and Engineering. This Australian academy majorly focused on the policies of technology. Through this academy, the famous engineers and technologists were recognized due to their efforts..

Through welcoming globalization, Australia is now in a position to live in a borderless world. The main activators of globalization are the sharing of goods and services among nations, interaction and sharing of ideas and cultures among people from different nations.

Recently the level of globalization has developed to the point advancing the technological levels, and removing the trade barriers. Through these latest improvements of globalization citizens of Australia can now trade internationally faster than before. Although globalization comes with both advantages and disadvantages, the benefits are more as its effects are reflected in the economic development of Australia.

Globalization in Australia has resulted to bigger markets, hence increased profits, which improves the wealth status of a nation. Through this Australia has been able to invest in several development projects that would make it to reduce the level of poverty among its citizens. For Australia to benefit fully from the advantage of globalization especially the opening of international markets, the country has put some extra efforts to ensure it gets full benefits.

For instance, Australia has come up with strong domestic policies, reliable institutions and infrastructure to be able to take full advantages of the globalization changes. Australia has so far managed to come up with suitable policies and informed decisions to maximize the benefits of globalization and to minimize fully the challenges.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Globalization in Australia by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Since the time when Australia opened itself to globalization, several benefits have been realized in the country (ABS, 2005). Through engaging with the international economies, the economy of Australia has grown faster compared with some countries that remain closed to the forces of globalization.

According to some researches done, the economy of Australia has proved to grow with 2.5 % more than the closed economies to the effects of globalization. Through the advantage of faster economic growth, Australia has been able to improve the living standards of its citizens as well as reducing the poverty rate.

For instance, Australia has managed to cut its poverty rate in almost a half for the last two decades. Through the availability of cheaper imports, the citizens of Australia are in a position to have access to various types of products and hence they can compete effectively with other traders and increase their productivity.

The economic gains through the forces of globalization have also resulted to the availability of improved health services and availability of clean water in Australia. Citizens have a right to a good health services, as it is in the United Nations declaration of human rights.

By reliable health services the life expectancy in Australia has also improved, which is a good ground for the future developments of the nation. Even in the whole world the increased life expectancy has resulted to 85% of the population in the world to have an increased probability of attaining approximately sixty five years, which is regarded to be double compared to how life expectancy was a hundred years ago (Gough, 2003).

Through the increased global income because of removing, the investment barriers have some benefits like Australia having increased foreign direct investments, which has accelerated much growth in Australia. Globally the total of foreign direct investment was us$23 billion which shoot up to US$575 billion in 2003 which was a dynamic positive change realized due to globalization.

Globalization in Australia has also come with environmental changes whereby, there is improved environmental awareness that is encouraging the use of more reliable and less polluting materials. Australia is also in a position to import renewable matters to be used in place of the locally available natural resources, as they are still scarce.

Pollution is one cause of the air borne diseases that should be avoided. The United Nations declaration of human rights requires the nation to put measures on such sensitive issues to ensure citizens are living in safe environments. The availability of good materials that can be reused is advantageous to the nation as less pollution is realized and the citizens would be able to live in a conducive environment.

Through the increased interaction of Australia with global institutions like WTO and World Bank has benefited this nation a great deal especially in cases of solving the government-to-government conflicts.

In cases where the nation has some conflicts with another, the disputes are solved depending on the rules of the global institutions, rather than the traditional ways of favoring the more powerful among the victims. Through this, most of the countries have managed to maintain peace within and among other nations.

In the past, the trading partners were encountering some challenges that were hard for them to solve, and this led to the most powerful nation among the two winning the case. Nowadays the global institutions have the rules regarding every type of trade conflict to guide the member nations (AEPAC, 2003). Through this provision, members solve their conflicts well hence reducing their poverty level, which is believed to be the breeding area for terrorism.

The international interactions between Australia and other nations, has led to increased recognition of diversity respect for different cultural practices. Through this type of respect among various cultures, the level of democracy of the nation is improved and the application of human rights to the citizens is made possible.

The global companies have some working standards to be followed in production of commodities for international trade. This has the countries to adhere to the labor standards especially the countries that tend to ignore the rules of labor. There are set levels of wages that the workers are supposed to receive, which an advantage to the citizens as it protects them from any form of discrimination from the employer, as it is required by the United Nations declaration of human rights.

Australia serves as a good example of the countries that have derived much benefit from globalization. Australia has benefited in both exports and imports. It is well known in production of wool, wheat and minerals. Its level of living standards has gone high due to its ability of taking the advantage of open economy a status that made it more competitive in both domestic and international trade.

Australia is in a region whereby the neighboring nations are the developing ones, and most of its exports are destined to these developing nations or must pass through them. The country is famous because of its aid program whereby it offers technical support, reliable building initiatives, and various ways of passing the information globally to ensure there is active participation for all in global developments.

Australia is in the front line to offer technical advice to its neighboring developing nations to take part in trade movements that would open their trading standards through provision of more and advanced trade regulations. Australia is assuring these developing nations of the availability of ports that are efficient for their commodities, customs and quarantine schemes.

This country is also assisting the developing nations economically, on the best tactics to apply for them to acquire full benefits of free trade opportunities for instance by revising their domestic policies regarding the trade. As long as these developing nations have a right to work, as it is required by the United Nations declaration of human rights, Australia does not understand why these nations would prefer to be left behind.

References Australia. Economic planning Advisory Commission (AEPAC). (2003). Globalisation: Issues for Australia: papers and proceedings from an economic planning Advisory commission seminar held in Canberra. Canberra: Australia Govt.Pub.Service.

Australian Bureau of Statistics (ABS). (2005). Year book, Australia. Michigan: Cengage Learning.

Bessant, J. (2002). Sociology Australia. London: Allen

[supanova_question]

Integration of information systems in HCOs Essay college essay help

Healthcare organizations need to have a well integrated and managed information system for proper running. Adequate data and managed information is useful to the healthcare personnel in making appropriate decisions. This is required when caring for patients and when running and managing healthcare organizations.

It is required in filing of documents, in meeting the regulatory requirements, communicating with the organizational plans, as well as in accrediting the organizations.

With proper accessible information systems, clinicians are able to easily assess the status of the patients, give proper treatment, have a proper plan for patient care and educate the family members and the patients on how some medical conditions are managed.

The quality, medical outcomes and healthcare services cost can be well evaluated by medical directors using the patients’ information. The major purpose of integrated information in the healthcare is to enable effective and efficient job performance by the health professional and practitioners through proper management of the information.

However, this has not been the case and information in the healthcare organizations has been inadequate and not integrated.

The paper gives situations in which lack of integration of information systems with clinicians’ workflow can lead to inadequate patient care, reduced physician productivity, or poor patient satisfaction with an HCO’s services. It also identifies and discusses the challenges and limitations of two methods for improving process integration.

When a patient’s medical records are not integrated in the HCOs, this can lead to inadequate patient care. During an emergency the information of a patient’s treatment records and status may not be available to the physicians.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The patient may be unconscious and in need of immediate medical attention. A patient’s treatment records and allergies history may be unavailable to the doctor administering the treatment (Waegemann et al, 2002).

This may cause complications if the patient is given medication or injections that are allergic to them compromising the physician productivity as well as the satisfaction of a patient.

Inpatients usually receive medical attention based on the availed medical report. However, a patient may be taken to a rehabilitation center or a nursing home where the medication that was administered is cut off because of lack of integrated medical information.

This jeopardizes the health of the patient as well as the ethics of the medical practitioners. Some patients require medical follow up if they have medical conditions that are complicated like cardiovascular disease or diabetes.

If the patient’s medical history is not available and the patient transfers to another state, a physician’s efforts may be compromised leading to poor productivity. According to Waegemann et al (2002), the safety of a patient can be affected adversely if there is no proper documentation of patient medical records.

For example, if two patients in the same institution share the same names, there is a high chance of giving the wrong medication to either of the patients. This occurs when there is no proper identification of the patients in question and their individual medical history.

The integration process can be improved through the adoption of information technology in the HCOs. However, there are challenges and limitations associated with the adoption of information technology. According to Bansal (n.d.), clinicians fears the risks associated with the adoption of information technology in the health care sector.

We will write a custom Essay on Integration of information systems in HCOs specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For example, some of the fears include data anomalies, computer crashes, and vulnerability of patients’ data as well as programming errors that may occur. The failure of these systems can cause catastrophic results because of their dependence on machines (Bansal, n. d.).

These are challenges and fears that are associated with the use of healthcare information technology. Another method of improving the process integration in HCOs is by encouraging the small health care organizations to adopt electronic health care systems instead of the traditional handwriting method.

This would ensure that data is stored electronically and hence easily accessible. The challenge is that electronic health care system is expensive to install and manage thus making it unaffordable. Bansal (n.d.) notes that clinicians find the process of data entry as inadequate in terms of recording the office visits of a patient.

There is also the issue of dehumanizing the office visits thus affecting the doctor patient relationship that initially existed. Lastly there is the fear of patient’s information landing into the wrong hands thus breaking the patient’s doctor’s medical ethics of confidentiality.

In conclusion, HCOs need integration to ensure that efficiency and effectiveness is realized by the medical practitioners. The patients’ information should be availed to clinicians and other medical practitioners to ensure healthcare integration process.

Some situations like emergency, inpatients’ transfers, medical follows ups, and sharing of names in same institutions may have implications to clinicians’ workflows if not well integrated. These situations may cause inadequate patient care, reduced physician productivity, or poor patient satisfaction with an HCO’s services.

Adoption of health information technology and use of electronic health care systems are some of methods of improving the integration process. The limitation associated with the two is that they are expensive, are prone to errors and clinicians fear the dehumanization of office visits thus breaking the patient doctor relationship.

Reference List Bansal, A. (n.d). Health Information Technology and Telemedicine in the 21st Century – a Survey. Malvern, USA: Penn State Great Valley.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Integration of information systems in HCOs by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Waegemann, C. P. et al. (2002). Healthcare Documentation: A Report on Information Capture and Report Generation. Retrieved

[supanova_question]

Vodafone: developing a total communications strategy in the UK market Term Paper writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction In the face of competition, this report presents Vodafone’s strategy aimed at having a competitive advantage over its current and future competitors by adopting several measures aimed at giving consumers greater value for their money.

Michael Porter (2004) put forward two fundamental forms of competitive advantage: cost advantage and product differentiation advantage. In cost differentiation, a company lowers its product costs than the prevailing market costs for similar or related products.

However, in product differentiation, based on a market analysis, the company chooses a strategy that will give it a unique position among competitors and enable it to have an advantage over competitors.

Differentiation frequently entails delivering benefits that surpass those of the competitors, and enables it to create superior value for its customers and establish itself in the market.

In this case study, Vodafone seeks to adopt strategies for enabling a competitive advantage over its competitors but contemplates whether it should build its own network to provide the required services or provide them through partnerships and/or acquisitions.

Summary This case study on Vodafone, the world’s largest mobile telephone operator by revenue, presents the company’s strategy in its attempts to emerge out of competition from companies offering similar products in the UK home market in 2009.

During the said year, Vodafone faced competition from a number of companies in the rapidly expanding market for high-speed internet services in the home market.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The increasing demand for these products had attracted not only Vodafone’s traditional competitors such as British Telecom (BT), O2, and Orange, but had also drawn attention from other communication firms such as Virgin Mobile and Sky Broadcasting.

New competition also arose from arose from Carphone Warehouse and suppliers such as Nokia and Apple. Other firms were also contemplating moving into the high-speed internet services market.

Besides changes in competition, Vodafone and other providers faced challenges from rapid changes in technology and regulatory changes in the UK communications sector.

Consequently, many operators adopted their own strategies around the consumer’s need for ‘converged services’, meaning that companies could provide two or more services making up the ‘quad play ’ offered by Virgin Media (fixed line telephony, mobile telephony, television, and broadband internet).

While most of the competitors offered a combination of the services, Vodafone focused mainly on mobile services and this caused concern to both shareholders and the management. The challenge was to decide if they should provide any of the other services, and if so, should they build their own networks or through partnerships or acquisitions.

Analysis of the Major Facts PESTEL Analysis

In order to determine the best strategy that should be adopted it is imperative that we determine the roots of the intense competition in the high-speed internet services. A PESTEL analysis shows that the source of competition in the communications sector originated from a number of macro-environmental factors.

Political factors had been due the regulatory changes undertaken by the government, specifically the Office of Communication (Ofcom).

We will write a custom Term Paper on Vodafone: developing a total communications strategy in the UK market specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More These changes included the privatization of the national telephone company, BT, forcing it to allow access to its services at competitive rates, licensing more mobile-operators and allowing virtual operators (MVNOs), and supporting competition in television and internet sector to improve service delivery.

Economic factors arose from the global financial crisis that had heavily impacted the UK economy, just like all developed nations. The UK was expected to recover more slowly than other countries due to the important role of financial services to its economy.

Economic factors also affected sociocultural factors as it affected income distribution and spending patterns. Technological factors arose from the changes in technology with the development of internet protocol (IP) technology, emergence of new broadcasting technology, and the ongoing upgrading of speeds over fixed and mobile networks.

Environmental and Legal factors did not seem to have a significant role of the competition. In adopting a strategy to emerge out of the competition, Vodafone had to address each of these issues (Johnson et al, 2010).

Competitor Analysis

A number of competitors were already providing at least three of the four services in the high-speed internet market, however, Vodafone mainly focused on mobile telephony. Therefore, to gain an edge over its competitors, Vodafone had to adopt either the ‘triple play’ of the ‘quad play’.

In order to do this, the company has to analyze its competitors and determine the methods they used to roll out their service to come up with the most cost effective method.

The fixed line telephone network had been developed by the government through BT, which had subsequently been privatized, hence BT was the initial sole operator of the fixed line telephone, however, Ofcom introduced a process referred to as local loop unbundling (LLU) which required BT to allow other operators to install their own equipment in the existing BT network to provide voice and broadband internet services to their own surrounding customers.

This meant that operators such as Vodafone could provide these services without building their own network.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Vodafone: developing a total communications strategy in the UK market by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Mobile telephone was Vodafone’s core competency, being the world’s largest mobile telephone operator by revenue, therefore, it did not require any acquisitions or partnerships to create an advantage over its competitors.

However, the failure to create a ‘total communications’ strategy could lead to user migrating to other operators, especially with the introduction of number portability in 2007 and competitive approached adopted by operators.

The television segment is dominated by five ‘public service broadcast’ channels: BBC1, BBC 2, ITV 1, Channel 4 and Five. These channels are supported by annual license fees and advertising.

The rest of the market is taken by ‘multichannel operators’ led by BskyB, UKTV, Viacom and Virgin which are mainly supported by a mix subscription and advertisements. Ofcom reports that there were 495 channels by the end of 2008.

BBC (all channels) had a dominant share of the market with 31.8%, up 0.8% the previous year and up 1.2% in 2006, ITV and Channel 4 followed with 22.6 % and 11.7% respectively, both companies had registered growth in the past two years.

Going by this trend, the three companies, with a total share of 66.1%, will continue to dominate the market for the foreseeable future (Johnson et al, 2010).

The fourth and final section of the ‘quad play’ services is broadband. Fixed broadband was available in 65% of UK homes in 2009, most of which were served by their existing phone lines using DSL technology, the rest are supplied with cable broadband.

Analysts have predicted that this figure is likely to rise with DSL technology occupying a chunk of the market. wireless broadband is also provided by all major operators through 3G cards for laptops, however, most of the users have a DSL connection and see the mobile connection as a supplement.

In addition, there are more than 12,000 Wi-Fi hotspots in early 2008, the largest operator being The Cloud (58.3%), BT Openzone (19.3%) and T-Mobile (10%) (Johnson et al, 2010).

Together, the three Wi-Fi operators have a market share of 88.2%. The growth of the broadband sector has been encouraged by local loop unbundling, consequently, the five largest providers had 91% of all connections in 2009, with BT (26%), TalkTalk (25%) and Virgin Media (23%) leading the pack.

Alternatives

Owing to its dominance of mobile telephone, Vodafone is left with the other three options (fixed line telephone, television, and broadband).

The local loop unbundling process allows companies to install their own equipment in the existing BT network to provide voice and broadband internet services to their own customers, therefore, Vodafone would only have to purchase the necessary hardware and have their fixed line telephone and broadband running, rather than build their own network, which would be very costly (Yip, 1995).

However, it could acquire Wi-Fi operators or build its own network and increase coverage in other parts of the country. The only segment that would require a major partnership or acquisition would be in television as it is dominated by three major companies.

Recommendations After a detailed analysis of the competitors, it is observed that the most effective measure for Vodafone would be to provide a ‘triple play’ strategy in which it would provide mobile telephone services, fixed line telephone, and broadband (Yip, 1995).

The company already has well-established mobile telephone network while the installation of fixed line telephone and broadband would require less capital outlay because, by using the local loop unbundling as provided by the Office of Communication, it will rely on the existing BT network.

Works Cited Johnson, Gerry, Whittington, Richard, and Scholes, Kevan. Exploring Corporate Strategy. NJ: Pearson Education, 2010. Print.

Porter, Michael E. Competitive Strategy: techniques for analyzing industries and competitors. New York: Free Press, 2004. Print.

Yip, George. Total Global Strategy : managing for worldwide competitive advantage. NY: Prentice Hall, 1995. Print.

[supanova_question]

Analysis of the Solitary Reaper Essay online essay help

As an introduction to the book, Wordsworth catches the readers’ attention by pointing to a beautiful girl working alone in the field reaping and singing by herself. The girl does not want to be interrupted and alludes to the valley being full of songs.

The first stanza of the song heaps a lot of praises on the girl’s beauty and the extent of loneliness she is in. The speaker is not able to comprehend the words of the song that the girl is singing, but only guesses what she could be singing about.

The numbers in the third stanza may be flowing, but for the old and unhappy people this could be far-off things and battles that were fought in earlier years.

The reader is not sure whether the song is a more humble lay characteristic of today’s life, and wonders whether the song would be a manifestation of a natural sorrow, loss, or pain that occurred and has chances of recurring.

The song that the maiden was singing remained in the speaker’s heart as he climbed up the hill despite the fact that he did not understand what she was singing. It is difficult to understand whatever it was that stayed in the heart of the speaker if he could not understand the actual song.

Could be there is something that attracted the speaker other than the song? Probably the maiden’s voice. What else could have made him motionless and still if he could not articulate the words that were used in the song? The song remained in his heart until he went up in the hills, where he could hear of it no more.

The Solitary Reaper has four stanzas that are arranged into eight lines each, bringing the total number of lines to thirty-two. Its rhyme scheme alternates between abcbdde and ababccdd. The opening and the closing stanzas do not rhyme, in contrast, the other two stanzas, that is, the second and third, have a matching rhyme scheme.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Most of Wordsmith’s works are influenced by the experience that he had gone through. However, Solitary Reaper is unique in the sense that Wordsmith writes about one Thomas Wilkinson’s Tour to the British Mountains as evidenced in the books passage that talks about passing a female who was reaping alone while singing in Erse.

The poem is so intriguing because the speaker barely understands what the woman is singing about, and relies heavily on imagination. He harbors a feeling that the lady may be singing about history.

When the speaker talks about carrying the music of the young lady into his heart, attention is drawn to typical Wordsmith poetry that is underlined by heavy romantic undertones. No wonder the speaker finds it strange that the young lady reaps and sings by herself (James, pp. 68).

The poet warns anybody passing the solitary lady who is reaping to avoid disturbing her, but either to ‘stop here’ or pass gently. Her sound is beautiful and overflows through the valley. Her sound is received more than the nightingale tune to worn out travelers in the desert.

The poet says that her voice is so thrilling and by any standards, cannot be matched with that of the cuckoo-bird. Impatience prompts the poet to ask whatever the young lady could be singing about. Wordsworth testified that most of his work was inclined observation of nature and hearing of music.

However, this specific piece is all about human music encountered in a lovely rustic scenery. He appreciates the tone of the song, its beauty, and the kind of mood the song creates in him. Not so much credence is given to the songs explicit content, which the speaker simply guesses.

Despite the limitation of language exhibited in stanza three, the poet still marvels at the beauty of the music, the fluid expressive beauty. Wordsmith is so tactical in the way he places praise and beauty in a natural setting. The source of this beauty is a simple rustic girl.

We will write a custom Essay on Analysis of the Solitary Reaper specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This puts this artistic piece on a Lyrical Ballad’s pedestal. The language of the piece is unforced and natural and its structure simple. The first stanzas sets the stage for the rest of the lines while the second stanza highlights comparisons between the two birds, the third stanzas tries to interrogate the content of the songs, and finally, the fourth stanza talks about the effects of the song on the speaker.

The final two lines of the Solitary Reaper focus on the theme of memory and the soothing effects of memories on someone’s thoughts and feelings. State of solitude is very important as it makes one’s soul to concentrate on his/ her elementary feelings.

The young lady is said to be single, solitary and all by herself. From the notes, the speaker is in a position to detect the emotional impact of the music the lonely girl sings. The notes of the song are welcome to the speaker (James, pp. 68).

Works Cited James, G. Ingli. Wordsworth’s Solitary Reaper. Essaya in Criticism, Volume 15, Issue 1, 1965. Pp. 65-76.

Wordsworth, William. Solitary Reaper. New York: Amazon, 1805. Print.

[supanova_question]

Steroids in Baseball Essay college essay help near me

Table of Contents Mass entertainment sports

Economic motivation

Steroid use and the affected victims

Test for steroids by MLB

Economic punishment and benefits of steroids use

Works Cited

The habit of steroid use among professional athletes is not uncommon in sports arena. Over the past decade, athletes have been charged with the use of performance enhancement drug namely the anabolic Steroid. The reputation of these athletes has been tarnished after they openly admitted to the allegations.

However, it is common knowledge that the use of performance enhancement drugs in competitive sports has been perceived with a lot of negativity (Frounfelter

[supanova_question]

Unilever Strategic Analysis Research Paper online essay help: online essay help

Table of Contents Strengths

Weakness of Unilever

External analysis of the company

Recommendation to remain stronger amidst the changing market

References

Unilever is an international consumer product manufactures like foods, personal care products, cleaning agents, and beverages; the company is listed in Rotterdam stock exchange in Netherlands as Unilever and London stock exchanges in the United Kingdom Unilever PLC, the company was founded by Samuel van den Bergh, Antonius Johannes Jurgens, and William Hulme Lever Viscount Leverhulme on 1st January 1930.

To remain competitive in the changing business arenas, the company has enacted a number of strategic management tools aimed at creating competitiveness in the company.

Current chief executive officer and non executive chairman Paul Polman and Michael Treschow are keen on developing strategies that are responsive to changes in the international business environment; the company’s main competitors are Nestlé, Reckitt Benckiser Henkel, and Procter

[supanova_question]

“This Compost” Gives Hope and Makes People Think Essay essay help site:edu

Walt Whitman is one of the greatest poets who make people take notice of all wonders of the world. In his poem “This Compost” Whitman reveals the miracle of renovation of nature which is taken for granted by most of people. Moreover, this optimistic work gives hope to all those who fail to believe in the future of humanity on the Earth.

In the first place, it is important to point out that Whitman considers issues which are ignored by many. Even the poet himself admits that he did not pay attention to one of the most startling miracles of nature: “Something startles me where I thought I was safest” (Whitman 512).

Nonetheless, his unique perception of reality draws his attention to a great puzzle – nature regeneration. Many people do not even think of the paradox – many rotten substances (like dead plants or carcasses of animals and human corpses) go into the Earth, but instead of total contamination and decay of the planet there is flourishing of newborn organisms. Only few people admit that it is a great wonder.

Perhaps, humanity is accustomed to such a phenomenon as filter. People simply think of the scientific part of the issue. Whitman who has the sixth sense notices the wonder in it and exclaims: “What chemistry!” (513). His poem which reveals the mystery and beauty of renovation of the Earth makes people cherish their planet.

Apart from this Whitman gives hope to those who think that humanity has no future. He describes terrifying things noting that millions of dead and thick organisms are “swallowed” by the earth. Whitman expresses an idea, shared by many, that the earth should be contaminated by various illnesses.

Surprisingly, it is “clean forever and forever” (Whitman 514). The poet praises mysterious ability of the earth to regenerate and give new life. He is very optimistic stating that the earth absorbs sickness and transforms it into the background for new organisms to come.

In the end of the poem the reader becomes sure that there is nothing to be afraid of – the planet will regenerate. Of course, at this point it is essential to note that Whitman does not promulgate the following idea: people can pollute the planet (with various wastes and emissions) as it will renovate anyway.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The poet only depicts the natural cycle when some organisms fade away and new ones come into existence. The earth can filter this natural “contamination”: sickness of dead organisms. This ability of the earth should be praised.

Unfortunately, people forget about that miracle and do not stop exhausting the planet. Hopefully, Whitman’s poem can make people think and stop their unreasonable actions.

On balance, “This Compost” is one of those poems which can change the world. In the first place, the poet makes people notice the miraculous nature of the process which is usually taken for granted. On the other hand, the poem gives hope to those who are afraid of the future.

Whitman states that the earth regenerates. It can turn illness into a new life. There can be no decay on the Earth, so humanity has the future. Of course, the poem still makes people think of those unreasonable actions which pollute the planet. Praising regeneration of the planet Whitman’s poem makes people understand that natural cycle will not work when it deals with pollution.

Work Cited Whitman, Walt. Leaves of Grass: First and “Death-Bed” Editions. Ed. Karen Karbiener. New York: Barnes

[supanova_question]

Human services agencies Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Introduction Human services agencies can be defined as institutions formed with an aim of providing services that improve the well being of their clients. They are basically involved in providing or assisting in provision of support to people who are in needs in a particular community.

The support may be in terms of basic requirements such as food, housing, clothing as well as health; physical or mental. Members of a community usually turn to Human Services Agencies for help especially when the situation is beyond their capability.

In this case the agency is responsible for bringing back the situation into its normal state. In other word, Human Services Agencies provide physical and emotional needs to people.

In order to achieve this, the agency uses the best strategies to address the situation. The most common being mediation and advocating which in most cases they are used together (Umbreit, 2000).

Mediation can be defined as a method of resolving disputes between people by introducing a third party to intervene between them. In this case, the two conflicting parties are assisted in finding a common ground. The third party does not take sides and is required to hear from both parties. Advocacy on the other hand involves a third party who speaks for this/her client.

Existing Integration of Mediation and Advocacy within a Human Services Agency U. S. department of Air Force is one agency that integrates mediation and advocacy in conflict resolution. They use their web site to offer information for the human services through Alternative Dispute Resolution Program. Their target population includes researchers, government and members of the Air Force.

Through this program, the agency meets the needs of the people using the Air Force resources. In addition, it provides training and professionals who provide support to other people and the government.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More National center for state courts is a Human Service Agency that operates on court basis in relation to alternative dispute resolution. It seeks to address issues from a wide area of contexts including schools, government and members of the public.

The core method used in conflict resolution by this agency is mediation. Since it deals with courts, advocacy and mediation are employed especially in civil and criminal cases.

U. S. department of justice office of dispute resolution is another human service agency that uses both mediation and advocacy.

Their target population is the entire community. It seeks to provide justice for people who have been oppressed. Moreover, it emphasizes on using the best methods in solving the conflicts among people as well as those involving government states (United States Department of Justice Office of Dispute Resolution, 2010).

Merits of Mediation as a Method of Conflict Resolution Mediation is the best method of offering human services to the parties discussed in the agencies above. This is because mediation employs dialogue in which a given population is given an opportunity to present his/her argument.

In this case both parties come up with a solution that favors both sides. It is the best because parties involved are given the power to make decisions unlike other methods in which a third party make decision for them. Mediation provides a win-win situation (Haley and Jacqueline, 1998).

Conclusion Methods employed in providing human services should be effective and efficient. Since at the time of employing them the situation is usually worse, they should thrive to better the situation.

We will write a custom Essay on Human services agencies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They should therefore improve the situation without creating a win-lose situation. Mediation and advocacy method of providing human services ensure that the lives of affected people are made better without exploiting the other party.

References Haley, N.

[supanova_question]

Max Weber – The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Protestant Ethic

Criticism

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Max Weber in his book the protestant ethic and the spirit of capitalism sought to explain the emergence of the modern capitalism and the origin of the modern secular and industrial society.

According to Weber, the source of work ethic and material success that is considered the beginning of material success is found in the premises of business strength. To him, even the modern day capitalists are unable to explain its origin.

According to Weber, the spirit of the present capitalism developed out of protestant ethic of the 16th century of the puritan churches and even sects: these are mainly the Calvinists, the Methodists, and the Quakers etcetera.

These Protestants prioritized work over material success and nothing else mattered according to them whether their families, leisure or hobbies, and therefore capitalism was argued to have roots in the protestant denomination (Protestant Ethic 14).

The Protestant Ethic According to Weber, capitalism was the accumulation of wealth and deeply rooted in rationality; to him capitalism emerged victorious over tradition and was as a result of a disciplined labor force. This scenario was only evident in European countries and more particularly in protestant nations.

Weber arrived at the protestant ethic and spirit of capitalism by analyzing the three religions; the Catholicism, Lutheranism and the protestant denominations and related the analysis to the extent they could bring psychological rewards.

The Catholics argued that placing wealth before God could jeopardize the soul and also that was against the kingdom of God as nothing as nothing ought to come before the kingdom. Weber agreed that individuals explained human behavior in reference to religion and not economic power in connection to religion.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He furthermore agreed that human beings did not view the supernatural as a causal factor but instead they considered the structural factors as causal factors. These structural factors include economic, political and social forces. Max Weber believed that religious belief has a lot of influence in the daily life of every individual.

What Weber sought to explain is evident in the modern society; among the Americans, for example, dedication to work and success in life is derived from protestant beliefs or the tradition of the protestant people.

This was evident in the year 1999 when the USA replaced Japan as the global leader in the number of hours worked per year. Hard working people in the society are often appreciated and praised. If Weber could have been alive, he could have regarded these features of the American society as true reflection of his thesis.

When Weber discussed capitalism that was characterized by profit maximization and mass production, he analyzed so devoid of the principle of human rationality.

Weber failed to recognize that any human being is bound by the principles that govern every society and it is a matter of duty rather than religion that makes an individual to exploit its labor (Etzrodt 4).

The constant and consistent capacity to work hard is associated with one’s religious indoctrination and one’s desire to work hard is assumed to be a favor from God.

Weber assumed vocational calling as a sign psychological motivation from God and the values of restlessness and systematic work in vocational calling were the best demonstration that God’s power was in that individual.

We will write a custom Essay on Max Weber – The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Those in modern business tirelessly strive for wealth and profit since this gives them assurance of salvation because doing so is sanctioned by God and hence a fundamental source of the protestant ethic.

Profit and wealth in business was linked to God’s favor for an earthly kingdom of abundance and a massive production of wealth and generation of profit by an individual was an indication that God favored that individual.

Also the opportunity to compete by those in business was not by chance but was considered an opportunity provided by God to generate wealth.

Weber argued that the acquisition of wealth was an end in itself; similarly, he argued that the urge to acquire riches for the sake of living well and luxuriously was in itself a sin and was to be condemned since it went against Gods intention that only good and pleasant life was found in heaven and not in earth.

Also to him, the hardworking and business oriented individuals could not boost of their status of their accumulated wealth or profit as a sign that they were among the chosen few and instead they were to link it to religious significance and view it as an indication of salvation (Weber 8).

The greatest impact of this spirit of capitalism was that any person who was involved in the acquisition and accumulation of wealth was to perform that with the main desire to place himself/herself at the core of life.

Weber was against the motive of accumulating wealth for greed or the accumulation of wealth for sole purpose of bodily or earthly comfort but was for the idea that it ought to be saved, accumulated and later to be re-invested in worthy enterprise.

Criticism Weber is highly criticized due to his argument that capitalism neither could nor has been possible and without ethic or rather a spirit. Instead the critiques argue that capitalism can in the case of Catholicism just like Protestantism since capitalism could occur not only based on ascetism but also on rationality.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Max Weber – The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More A critical analysis of Weber’s work indicates that it was a misinterpretation of other churches and sects, indeed there is an inclusion that Calvinist ideas were not capitalist in form. There is also an utter misrepresentation of the Catholic Church. Contemporary arguments are that Catholicism is manifestly capitalistic and their ideals favor capitalism.

Weber failed to explain the fact that the reformation by John Calvin and Martin Luther king was a reaction towards the capitalistic tendencies of the Catholic Church as opposed to his explanation that it was a way of allowing protestant capitalism to develop.

This is the position of Weber that suffer from the heaviest criticisms since it is well understood that the motive of the reformation was due to the fact that catholic was participating in the accumulation of wealth.

Furthermore, Weber’s work has been criticized due to his failure to factor in two historical features; first was the prosperity the cities of Venice and Genoa which were prosperous and economically wealth in Europe during the time Max Weber was writing his thesis.

Consequently, during the same time, there was rivalry between Austria and Prussia and during their war; Prussia was dominantly supported by the catholic France which was the powerful state in Europe at that time. Weber also failed to factor in this catholic factor and the sources of this catholic wealth and this is considered the missing link in his arguments (Pierotti 1).

In the contemporary world, developments and prosperity of states do not conform to the assertions of Weber. The recent development in the East Asian region is an evident that capitalism does not follow the line of religion since these countries are not Protestants.

Consequently the modern prosperity that is witnessed in countries like Spain and Italy which are predominantly catholic and yet they subscribe to capitalistic ideologies totally contradicts Max’s assertion that capitalism is synonymous to the protestant doctrines.

This example is a clear indication that capitalism is influenced by factors like geography, political and secular orientation and not Protestantism per se (Parsons and Weber 35). The association by Weber of capitalism to the age of reformation has also been highly criticized.

This is because capitalism existed before the age of reformation and Europe practiced capitalism before the protestant revolution and if Weber’s assertion that Protestantism is linked to capitalism then the emergence of the protestant revolution only perpetuated the already existing capitalism.

Conclusion The fact that Weber introduced the theme of the protestant ethic and the spirit of capitalism to understand why the west was developing faster than other regions and yet other societies had the necessary materials yet they were not developing led to a conclusion that there was a phenomenon that sparked this development which could also make them to abandon their traditional ways.

The big question that Weber failed to answer was whether all countries in the west were subscribing to the protestant ideals? If the answer was yes then he definitely was wrong and his thesis was incorrect since there were countries like Spain, England, Poland and Italy which were dominantly catholic and yet their level of development and prosperity was at par with that of other western countries.

If his answer was no, then he would have totally contradicted his work and his thesis. Therefore the argument by Max Weber does not seem to hold much truth.

Works Cited Etzrodt, Christian. Weber’s Protestant-Ethic Thesis, the Critics, and Adam Smith. MaxWeber Studies, n.d. Web.

Parsons, Talcott and Weber, Max. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. New York: Prentice Hall, 2003. Print.

Pierotti, Sandra. Backup of the Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. Criticisms of Weber’s Thesis, 2003. Web.

Protestant Ethic. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. Soc, n.d. Web.

Weber, Max. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. RoxBury, 2011. Web.

[supanova_question]

Visual Communication Essay custom essay help

There are many ways to communicate and Visualization is one of them. It is a powerful tool that aids communication as it acknowledges the power of visual skills. Visual communications, as the name indicates, is the type of communication that uses visuals to relay information.

As such information, data and knowledge can be relayed in a manner that it can be looked upon. Therefore visualization is one of the knowledge management techniques. The use of visuals media make information more meaningful to people. There are several visual communication tools that are used to make communication more meaningful.

Among the visual communication tools are: information graphics, symbols and signs, shapes and colours, charts and graphs, and typography. Each of these visual media tools is useful for presentation of specific type of information. Graphs and tables, topography and use of colours are important visual tools that aid the presentation and comprehension of data.

Graphs and tables are the crudest form of visual communication. This is because the technologies and techniques used in formulation these types of visual mediums are simple and easy to use. Graphs and tables are used to add more meaning to quantitative data.

Graphs help to highlight the relationships between values being described by giving them size. While using graphs and tables it becomes easier to discern how the variables are related in terms of the trends and pattern.

For graphs and tables to be effective they must be minimal obstructions that obscure the information being relayed. Features such as 3D effects and background pictures should be avoided in construction of graphs and tables.

However, colour can be used to enhance meaning. Colour helps to highlight the actual differences in the variables being compared as well as showing the correlations between those variables (Few, 2006).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The advantage of graphical representations over tables is that graphs help readers to interpret data in form of shapes and colours, which is not possible while using tables.

Tables are graphical methods of presenting data in form of numerical values. As such, it becomes easier to locate specific values. The figure below shows an example of a simple graph that uses colour to contrast a number of variables

Source: Few 2006

Other than in graphs colour can be used in photos and pictures. Colour is useful as a form of visual communication tool as it is known to affect human behaviour. This is because each of the colours has a specific meaning. Black colour represents mourning, while white colour may be used to reefer to peace and purity.

In most of the cultures across the world, red mean danger. Due to the varied meaning of colours across cultures, they are therefore used to express connotations about reality. Furthermore, colours are sued to express feelings and emotions such as joy, anger, love and fear.

Colour should also be used sparingly as the more the number of colour used in a graphical representation the more chaotic the presentation becomes. However, the use of colour has a number of advantages.

It increases comprehension of the information being relayed as it increases recognition of specific data of colour is that it increases the comprehension of can be used to link related data, improves learning and reduces error of interpreting data. As such colour is effective in aiding the recall of knowledge.

We will write a custom Essay on Visual Communication specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For colour to be effective as a visual tool it must be used with space around it to show separation. Bright colours should be used to indicate priority information (Hostetler, n.d.). When colour is used on photos and pictures it helps to enhance reality as opposed to black and white images.

Colour also adds meaning to identity of the photos as it rouses the sense of perception (Douglis, 2004). The graph below shows how colour indicates trends and relations between the EURO against the US dollars and Japanese yen exchange rates

Source: Bank of Finland 1999

Topography is another of the visual communication aids that is used to aid communications. Topographical forms are used effectively to evoke feelings and emotions from the audience. This is achieved via combining physical form with textual forms.

Topography is used to convey one of the most useful attribute of than existences: motion. Through the use of topographical a sense of direction is achieved. The use of topographical forms is combined with technological innovations resulting to visual communication referred to as topographical animations.

Topographical forms can also be used to relay the essence of time. Using visual topographical forms in motion, objects may be made to appear and disappear into space thus indicating a sequence of time. The figure below is a topographical representation of visual punctuation that evokes human feelings of thrill, hope or apprehension using the exclamation mark (Hostetler, n.d.).

Source: Hostetler, n.d.

The use of visual communication tools has therefore been used facilitate better relay of information. Visual communication tools such as images, colour pictures and topography are used to add more meaning to a message as they aid the comprehension of information.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Visual Communication by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Visual also enhance the meaning of a message as they evoke emotions from the reader. Moreover, visuals can also be used to express other dimensions such as direction, space and time. As such communication is effective through visual communication tools.

Reference List Bank of Finland (1999). Euro exchange rates. Web.

Douglis, P. (2004). When color makes the difference in conveying ideas and meaning. Communication World, 21(4), 52-53. Web.

Few, S. (2006). Stephen Visual communication. Web.

Hostetler, S. (n.d). Integrating Typography and Motion in Visual Communication. Web.

[supanova_question]

Doing the Truth in Love by Himes, Michael Edition 95” Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Sacramental Vision

Eucharist: Covenant, Thanksgiving, and Destiny

Doing the Truth in Love

Works Cited

The Christian religion has some values that can be seen to follow the line of ethical conduct in the community; Himes Michael in the book “Doing the Truth in Love by Himes, Michael Edition 95” discuses the religion of Christianity from the angle of a catholic. This short paper reviews chapters seven to nine of the book and discusses some of the aspects brought about.

Sacramental Vision When discussing on sacramental vision, the writer elaborated on the attachment that Catholics had with sacrament; they believe that sacrament is the body of Christ thus they perform the ritual as a form of remembrance of the father of the religion.

The sacrament is aimed at renewing relationships with Christ and offering the Christians a chance to repent their sins and connect with the fathers of the religion.

From the ethical perspective, the issues of renewing once visions and keeping the vision that one has is reinforced in the chapter; whether in business or community, it is ethical to be focused on once vision and have policies to keep track in the case the vision seems burred.

The chapter was significance as understood that human beings can fail in their promises however it gives them hope that when they fail, they should not keep on the broken situation but should arise and repent and move on with life.

The most interesting thing about the topic is how understanding and forgiving Christ it; the virtue of accepting once sins and repenting them has also been emphasized.

When reading the chapter the questions that lingers in the mind is how many time can someone seek repentance?

If forgiveness is guaranteed are there chances that people will become reckless with their actions

Is there an ideal situation in the world?

Eucharist: Covenant, Thanksgiving, and Destiny When the writer was reflecting on the topic he was of the opinion that in life its ethical to show your gratitude and offer some thanks to those people who do good to you; the approach as taken by the religion shows the need to value the little things that other people do to someone and being willing to pass a vote of thanks.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In Christianity, Eucharist is a show of reunion with the Christ whom the Christian has a covenant with, they do this through thank giving, repenting and keeping focused to their destiny.

When reading the chapter, the most important aspect that came out is the need to offer thanks and appreciate other people who have done something good to use; on the other hand, the chapter reinforces the need to keep our promises with other people and suggest that people should have a way that they should remind themselves of the promises they made and keep them.

When reading the text, the most interesting thing that comes in my mind is how well the Christians with catholic faith have mastered the art of repenting and thanks giving however the question that lingered in my mind is how sincere the believers are?

Should Eucharist and thank giving offer them a leeway that they can behave unacceptable then repent to save their relation with God and keep their destiny alive?

On the positive side of it, the chapter was challenging me to look into the promises that I have made and consider if I have enacted adequate strategies to them work.

Doing the Truth in Love The religion of Christianity is called the religion of love; love is in the center stage of the religion as people are expected to love each other as they love themselves.

In chapter nine, the writer emphasis the need to do the right thing and be truthful in what they do, love should be the center stage when deciding how to treat someone or the measures to take in the case that an issue has arose.

We will write a custom Essay on Doing the Truth in Love by Himes, Michael Edition 95” specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More When reading the chapter the most interesting thing was to the extent that the bible requires people to love each other, the love should be as much as someone loves himself; the chapter seemed exaggerated however it is the bible that states so, thus Christians have no option than obeying the commandments.

The chapter was significance in the study and understanding of ethics in societies either among people or in businesses, according to the chapter, there is increasing need to have loved and thinking of the other person as you would like him to think about you. The thought will yield good result and develop the society as a whole (Himes 78- 145).

When reading the chapter, I was feeling a deficiency that I have to love and cherish others; it was challenging to adopt the levels that it seemed to advocate however the following questions arose as a result:

Is the love advocated among Christians practical?

Can someone be able love other people equally and treat them right always?

Are there no situations that love can fail to work?

Works Cited Himes, Michael. Doing the Truth in Love. New York: Paulist Press, 1995. Print.

[supanova_question]

Analysis of media coverage of president Obama’s activities Essay writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Positive, negative neutral or biased coverage

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction The topic of Obama’s media coverage has sparked numerous debates in several media houses in America. Many of these arguments have taken a comparative study between the previous regimes, for instance the Bush and Clinton reign. A comprehensive research has been carried out and divided into three categories.

First was to establish if the media has been biased, secondly is to identify whether the media has taken a neutral stand and thirdly to establish if the media has taken a negative view.

Lastly, if the said research has been biased; it is imperative to note that the American media since the presidential campaigns in two thousand and eight has been in favor of president Obama.

Positive, negative neutral or biased coverage The media is expected to be fair and balanced but it is said to have grossly deviated from such norms. The gravity of the allegations of bribery was stated but none has so far been proved; hence confrontations and blame has been levied on the media houses up to the casting of the ballot when the democrat candidate took an early lead.

The media was labeled biased in its opinion polls even before the polls. The swearing into office of president Obama was highly captured by the media and accordingly the media had no option except covering the event for the sake of their faithful viewers and listeners.

It would be unreasonable to suggest or imagine less coverage of such an event since it would have had a negative commercial effect on the media further the fear of being termed the governments enemy couldn’t be ruled out at that stage (Calmes, p.40).

The only option seen as the last resort was to sufficiently cover such an event. It is without doubt to state that what happened in the campaigns was reflected in the white house when Obama took office.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This reflection by American media serves as a great detriment to America and the consequences are felt by the citizens who mainly rely on the media for first hand information. If the media feeds its respondents with one-sided stories it means that the truth will be kept hidden.

The only unfairness is to have the media which purports to be neutral and independent but instead it turns out to be the fourth arm of the government (Obama, p.47).

The media seemed to have given the Obama’s administration a positive coverage from the first day in office in what they famously called the hundred days in office. A policy started by the former American president Roosevelt who measured his achievement from the first day in power up to the hundredth day.

Compared to Clinton and Bush the Obama administration received a positive tone from the media. Editors are said to have positively covered Obama’s government as early as the first hundred years in office.

Media was said to give Obama, by then a democratic presidential candidate, more coverage than his republican counterpart John Mcain.This criticisms were strongly hurled on almost all media houses but much of the criticism was directed towards CNN (Phillips, P. 12).

However, many media houses can defend their positive image by stating that president Obama took power when America was experiencing tough economic crisis which president Obama seems to keenly take interest and positive response which was not the case in nineteen ninety nine when Clinton came into power and the two thousand and one during the Bush regime.

What appeared as a bad time for Obama to come into power gave him the admiration of the media.

We will write a custom Essay on Analysis of media coverage of president Obama’s activities specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There is no doubt that the popular nature of Obama than his predecessor has made him more irresistible by the media. His eloquence, charisma and sensitivity to the felt needs of the majority population of Americans.

The low and unfavorable coverage of President Bush gave Obama a savior admiration. Its should be remembered that Obama had to set aside some of his policies to build the image of America in the outside world which included the closure of the Guatanamo Bay and improving the American relation with the Arab world and more specifically the Iraq issue.

Obama’s move to withdraw American troops from Iraq to let the Iraq people form their government was highly welcomed by both American and Arabic media (Ahrens, P.8).

No wonder his favored coverage has been based on his policies and the mere believe that he is a symbol of change because he is the first black American president.

Media bias has been said to be one of the greatest contributor of Obama’s victory. For instance, it has been alleged that Obama is a smoker but the mainstream media has never stated that in their news.

The mainstream media has been blamed for handling Obama with kids gloves instead of perceiving him like any other politician who makes promises and can later break them. The independent investigative role of journalists is being quickly replaced by a worshipful media (King, p.54). Such biased coverage can be traced from the forty two million dollars on budget set for Bush inauguration.

This was criticized by the media bitterly but when such amount was set for the Obama’s inauguration it seemed to be accepted by the media and the media did not raise a finger to question that act; while during the time of the Bush he was said to remind the American population of the French extravagant Lois XVI.

We can not sit and wish away this partisan news presentation while it’s rumored that a photographer in Times Magazine works for both the magazine and for the white house. Such conflict of interest in the media will always lead to news being one-sided.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Analysis of media coverage of president Obama’s activities by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The once respected voice of the needy and the opposition during the past regimes has now changed into a praising tool of the government. Still in the same economic crisis, troops still in Iraq and the rarely talked of Guatanamo bay Issue is pending.(Phillips, P.61).

There seems to have been a love affair between the press and Obama. In fact one journalist is said to have said that he had seen many presidents but he couldn’t find fault in president Obama and he didn’t know anyone who hates Obama.

The Whitehouse is criticized for choosing the journalists to ask questions in a press conference. The pro-government journalists are selected while others are left (Philips, p. 64).

On a critical point like the May first killing of Osama Bin Laden, the mainstream media wasted its time to promote its partial news reporting when they kept showing how the killing of Osama would boast Obamas popularity.

The media ought to have looked at that invasion of Pakistan as a serious breach of international law since that was a direct interference with another country’s sovereignty which will for sometime affect the relationship between America and Pakistan.

Furthermore the media should have cautioned the honorary American citizens of the dangers of a terrorist threat by Al Qaeda in a move to revenge the death of their leader.

Obama is enjoying a messiah treatment in Whitehouse and he must have learned the essential use of media in politics. He seems more smart instead of using force to get their support he instead manipulates them by inviting them for dinner.

For maintenance of checks and balances in any country, the government must respect the vibrant role of the press. This marriage of the press by the state can not facilitate a healthy state (Calmes, p.44).

Despite the major criticism against the mainstream media, the first hundred days contained in depth analyses of the issues ahead of the Obama’s presidential road. For instance, Fox news fully covered the hundred days in office in office by showing the priorities and the challenges facing the Obama’s administration.

The BBC world service seemed to make a neutral analysis by conducting an opinion poll to show the high hopes of the American relations being improved. The passing of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 was impartially covered with factual details on how the Act would help in American economic crisis.

It is important to state that at this point the media sufficiently covered the events in a more analytical way to give an educative role which assures a grain of hope in a neutral media (Reid, p.77).

The passing of the States Children Health Insurance Program also was faced with much scrutiny by the mainstream media. The direct comparison given of the earlier regimes health care programs portray less partisan mass media.

Furthermore, the Led Better law which erupted into major controversies was also considered in its distinct stages before it was passed into law.

The media has also taken a fore role to capture the Iraq issue putting a reminder on the Obama administration that the withdrawal of the American troops from the Iraq was to take part during the first hundred days of his coming into power a thing which Obama administration is depicted by the media as shifting the goal posts to be able to convince American citizens that they have not failed.

At this point we consider the act of the New York Times to cover the one hundred days achievement in a five days series containing a substantial framework of what was promised within the hundred days and so far what has been achieved (Reid, p. 79).

The few neutral media coverage has been seen as a drop of water in a sea considering the coverage of the ABC channel which has been dubbed “All Barrack channel” since the channel seems to have mainly taken a side of being pro Obama in all aspects which leaves the listener with a nagging question of whether the Obama government is all that perfect(MSNBC.com, Para 4).

When the prices of gas in U.S were going up during the Bush regime the media was very active in its criticism but a time like today when the gas prices are soaring high no meaningful scrutiny is taking place and the media has feigned blindness hence causing all levels of inference to be drawn on the exact role of the media.

The media while pretending to be liberal has tried to paint the obamas regime as facing a hard task hence playing and negotiating the role seeking sympathetic perception. Just like telling Americans to understand that the government cannot deliver since it is in a can’t-help situation.

The media is portraying the Obama administration as helpless as per the circumstances. Lots of strong sentiments have been put forward calling the Obama administration a manipulator of the media.

The sad story is that the mainstream media has been crippled and hence giving the Obama governmenment a chance to not only control the media houses but also divide and rule them.

We finally experience the shifting blame game between the different media houses. On the reality part of it, the citizens are forced to watch a media with two sides not knowing which side to support (Calmes, p.49).

Still shocked of how the Israel prime minister visited white house and left unmentioned. If the coverage was prohibited the media should have reported that to their listeners but of course it would have changed the view that the government has on the media; a thing that the media could not have risked doing.

They prefer breaching their relationship with the listeners rather than reporting what the government doesn’t approve. A decision is already made that if there is a conflict between the government and the interests of the citizens who are the listeners the government’s interest is to prevail.

To be critical enough, the much appraised tea demonstration coverage has presented a temptation to the effect that the media is unbiased but the twist awakes great surprise when we learn that the founder of the organization is a great ally of president Obama. It now leads to a very interesting conclusion of the media being the fourth branch of the government (Calmes, p.52).

President Obama seems to have gone against the very principles of freedom of speech and the independence of the media ideas he advocated for. Maybe they were sweet words said to win the audience and in turn translate into votes.

During his campaign trail he used the press conferences, a thing expected to be reciprocated after him taking office but it took everyone by surprise when he cut the conferences and begun selecting the journalists allowed to ask questions prior to him allowing such conferences.

In the recent gay rights demonstration which took part in the white house neighbourhood, the police were seen chasing the journalists and the reporters a thing not evident in the past. The lack of transparency and the move to suppress media coverage is very new.

Is the media trying to make whatever the Obama administration does right? The truth is if such an event occurred during the Bush days there would be much said. The media has been used and abused by the Obama administration and it doesn’t surprise anyone when the government passed laws to shamelessly prohibit and to fully limit the press covering the gulf oil spilling (Obama, p. 35).

Propaganda by the media about the recovery program has been aimed at showing not only that the program is effective but how it has already reached the recovery point. This is a great lie because the media impresses the government on a program which is on its knees.

The recession is greatly felt and it’s an insult to the American population to feed them with lies of economic recovery while the situation on ground is pathetic and unbearable.

President Obama seems to have smartly mastered some rules to play by for instance he followed the protocols of inviting the media at Oval office. His invitations to the press were to create a picture of transparency which is not there in the first place (Obama, p. 26).

The presentation of a global warming research with highlights of the dangerous economic times has been received with much praise and excitement from the usual media. Expected though but it is still unbelievable of how environmental issues were being taken lightly by the media.

The major controversies on the impact of global warming should at least have been considered and given the attention they deserve.

Presentation of the maps and chats from various government departments was supposed to be given a keen analysis to convey the real situation instead of praising the government’s effort while the effects of the environmental degradation are felt daily.

This present confusion as presented by the media is outrageous. Long before the Labor Department released their figures on the jobs created by the government, the mainstream media had given a full coverage of twenty thousand jobs created by the government for the hundred days in office.

This figure was highly questioned and when the department made its release, the results couldn’t match the ones earlier released by the press (Ahrens, p. 17).

A strong allegation on the Obama’s administration trying to shift the economic structure into socialism has been ignored by the media intentionally.

There has been a new tie between America and China and most importantly with Russsia.Does it means that the media is not aware of such a rumor? Why the loyal silence? The government of president Obama is highly protected and media happens to be the ruthless supporter of the government.

Creation of this propaganda and total denial of information can be a time bomb and the effects are tremendous. The recent uprisings in the Arab world have been occasioned by having a media which will not only sieve what to give to their listeners in favor of the government but also defend and follows everything said by the government religiously.

The results are devastating and it can take decades or eternity for a country to heal from the impacts of a revolution (Atlas, 248).

Much false hope has been implanted in the minds of the masses on the Obama administration and the media has perfectly enhanced that. After the victory of Obama it was thought to be the end of Iraq like scenarios but we can’t wish that when Libya has been invaded with a clear strategy of removing Gaddaffi from power.

The image that the Americans thought was to be improved has grossly been tainted. How does the bad leadership in Libya affect America?

It takes the world by surprise when it happens under the watchful eyes of a toothless partisan media. What the media does is to try to sharpen their criticism against another regime while their own regime is not different at all (Phillips, p. 23).

Conclusion Amidst much debate on the media coverage of president Obama’s rule, facts have beyond doubt proved that to a larger extent the media has positively covered president Obama.

It emanates from the campaign trail whereby the media was rumored to have favored him. The role taken by the press to behave as the fourth wing of the government should be condemned and the country should embark on establishing a fair, free and impartial mass media for full realization of progress in the country

Works Cited Ahrens, Frank ”Senate Passes Stimulus Bill, 61-37″. The Washington Post. 2009-02-10.

Atlas, John. Seeds of Change: The Story of ACORN, America’s Most Controversial Antipoverty Community Organizing Group. New York, Vanderbilt University Press, 2010.

Calmes, Jackie ”House Passes Stimulus Plan Despite G.O.P.Opposition”. The New York Times, January 28, 2009.

King, John, Second 100 days will be bigger test for Obama, CNN, MSNBC.com. “In First 100 Days, Obama Flips Bush Admin’s Policies, ABC News, Huma. Bush has reached an important milestone”. MSNBC.com. Microsoft.

Obama, Barrack ‘Dramatic Action’ Needed Now to Fix Economy”. The New York Times. 2009-01-17.

Phillips, Kate. “Senate Passes Stimulus Bill, 61-37”. The New York Times, 2009-02-10.

Reid, Tim “Barrack Obama lays plans to deaden expectation after election victory”. The Times, 2008-11-01.

[supanova_question]

Ways in which people are guilty of George Orwell’s complaints Research Paper college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Instances of Orwell’s complaints in today’s political language

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Political jargon is still one of the most confusing languages spoken. George Orwell’s observaions are just as true today as they were when he wrote the book “Politics and the English language’.

However, because these mistakes are based on context, then political language today has also varied. All the basic deviations exist; it is simply execution that has changed.

Instances of Orwell’s complaints in today’s political language One of the four issues Orwell talks about is the use of meaningless words. Modern writing is now characterized by words which add little to the overall meaning intended.

These are worsened by the piecing together of meaningless words to form vague paragraphs and phrases. Orwell (13) uses a well known verse from the bible to illustrate this argument.

He affirms that while the bible would state that “the race is not to the swift … nor to the strong… but time happeneth to all” (Orwell, 10), modern writers would say this: “contemporary phenomena compels the conclusion that success or failure in competitive activities exhibits no tendency to be commensurate with innate capacity”(Orwell, 10).

He criticizes this modern translation because it is not arresting enough, it also dilutes the writer’s original meaning and lacks in concreteness. In fact, Orwell’s biggest objection to modern political writing is that it lacks images. Most writers are fond of using several long and unnecessary phrases.

These mistakes are still prevalent in today’s political scene. In fact, the 2008 political campaigns were full of them. When presidential candidate John McCain attended a political rally at Moon Township in Western Pennsylvania, this is what he said

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More “You know, I think you may have noticed that Senator Obama’s supporters have been saying some pretty nasty things about Western Pennsylvania lately. And you know, I couldn’t agree with them more.

I couldn’t disagree with you. I couldn’t agree with you more than the fact that Western Pennsylvania is the most patriotic, most god-loving, most, most patriotic part of America, and this is a great part of the country” (Diakides, 15).

Senator McCain was guilty of the same misdeeds discussed in Orwell’s book. First, he contradicts himself by saying that he agrees with his opponents but then realizes the mistake he has made and corrects it in the second sentence by cliaming that he agrees with the voters.

He then affirms this in a third sentence by repeating what he said in the first sentence that he could not agree more with the audience. He did what many writers and speakers in the political environment tend to do; he chocked himself with his own words.

McCain landed himself in trouble because he used too many negatives in this quote. Instead of simply saying that he agrees with the Western Pennsylvanians, he negated his main verb by comparing it with something else but because he had not thought through that comparison then he ended up contradicting himself.

After going around in circles, the speaker then repeats the same phrase that he started with, in reference to the audience and not his opponents. Orwell (11) explains that most politicians have a tendency of piecing together meaningless words as phrases because it takes less time and effort to think about them.

The words “couldn’t agree with you more” could simply be substituted with “I agree with you”. Orwell (13) explains that this kind of English is particularly appealing to politicians because it is easier and quicker. One does not have to think about complementary words because they are already preset in these meaningless phrases.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Ways in which people are guilty of George Orwell’s complaints specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The presidential hopeful was probably trying to think of a clever way of getting a negative message across without sounding so aggressive. These instances of clumsiness hurt McCain’s campaign as the public had satirized him for it.

He would have prevented all that by thinking about what he wanted to say, gathering the right words, piecing them up in the shortest way and avoiding as much “ugliness” in his speech as possible.

Another issue that George Orwell discusses in his book is the use of operators or verbal false limbs. Here, speakers replace simple nouns and verbs with phrases made of adjectives and nouns.

For example, instead of using the word ‘involved’ a politician would rather say ‘play a leading part in’. Furthermore, these kinds of speeches tend to avoid use of the un- formation and instead replace them with endings such as –ize. In the 2008 political campaign, another political leader committed the same sin.

Sara Palin was speaking at a fundraiser in Greensoboro and this is what she said:

“We believe that the best of America is not all in Washington, D.C…. We believe that the best of America is in these small towns that we get to visit, and in these wonderful little pockets of what I call the real America, being here with all of you hard working very patriotic, um, very, um, pro-America areas of this great nation.” (Eilperin, 7)

In the speech, Palin adds what Orwell calls a false limb to the noun America when she calls the people of Greensoboro ‘pro-American’. This term caused a lot of debate among opponents and supporters because they did not agree with her intended meaning in the sentence.

By calling other towns pro-American, the VP candidate was trying to say that certain parts in America were not American. In other words, to her, Washington lacked those crucial traits that she was talking about in her campaign. Palin seemed to have been in a tight spot; she was trying to look for the right words to thank her hosts but appears to have messed that up.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ways in which people are guilty of George Orwell’s complaints by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Readers and viewers of the speech could have interpreted that false limb in a number of ways; some would have taken on racist stances in that those small towns have many majorities. Others may have assumed that small townspeople had better work ethic or were more productive than larger cities.

She used a noun (America) in the place of a more descriptive word so that she could avoid taking responsibility for her utterancesions. Orwell (13) explains that politicians spoil the English language because they are insincere.

He affirms that when one’s intended and stated aims are different then one is likely to cling to these long and ambiguous terms.

Palin’s intentions may have been racial so she use the false limb in order to avoid revealing them. Indeed, she revealed the fact that politics is an aspect that is full of maneuvers and evasions when contentions and disagreements abound (Nunberg, 5).

The third mistake that Orwell identifies in his writing is the use of dying metaphors. Writers sometimes use words that do not stir up readers in any way; a possible sign that they do not care about the information they are conveying.

Some of them may not fully understand the meaning of those metaphors while others may have confused meanings by twisting the metaphor around. In these circumstances, a writer may pervert it. Orwell (12) gives the example of the phrase ‘hammer and anvil’.

He explains that certain writers may give the implication that the anvil was worse off than the hammer yet this is not true. Orwell believes that if these writers simply thought through their utterances then this scenario would not arise.

A case of such distortions occurred during the October campaign when a reporter was writing about Obama’s half aunt. The title of the report was “The November Surprise?”.

He revealed that the then Presidential candidate’s aunt was illegal. The immigration department denied her asylum so she had been using public housing illegally.

The writer believed that the information had been leaked to the public by someone in the Republican campaign since it is illegal to reveal information about someone’s legal status when the case was still unresolved.

Furthermore, Benen (6) believed that this information had the capacity to influence presidential election hence his title “November surprise”. He even cliamed that when one voted for Obama then one would expect more of the same in the subsequent four years; an indication that the author himself hoped the public would be influenced by that new revelation.

However, if one examines the context and use of this phrase then one would realize that the author has actually perverted the metaphor. In the American political scene, people use the term October surprise to describe news events that have the ability to modify outcomes in elections in the coming month.

October was the month chosen because this is the month before November when national elections take place. It started in 1972 when presidential candidate Richard Nixon announced, just twelve days prior to the national election, that peace was at hand in Vietnam (Kissinger, 13).

This came at a perfect time because Nixon had not delivered on his promise to put an end to the war during his ending four year term in office. His popularity (which was already high) increased tremendously in those two weeks and eventually contributed to his victory in the election.

The surprising news took place on 26 October and became a phrase associated with last minute news prior to the election.

When Benen (6) talked about Obama’s aunt, he was referring to surprising news that had the capacity to affect election outcomes. Although, these revelations sprung up in the month of November, the writer was not obligated to change the phrase ‘October surprise’ to ‘November surprise’.

The public is already aware of the meaning behind the term October surprise. Any last minute event that can influence presidential outcomes is understood as such.

Even if the revelation occurred just one day into the month of November, it would still have the same effect as one that occurred in the previous month and people would have understood it. He therefore distorted the metaphor because he wanted to capture every precise detail of the new information in his phrase. What matters is the principle; not the details.

Conclusion As Orwell suggested, most politicians and political writers pervert language in order to hide their insincerity, their ignorance or their laziness. The three scenarios discussed in the essay reflect these underlying vices and are symptoms of a bigger problem in American politics.

In the first scenario, presidential candidate was guilty of laziness because he did not think of the right phrase to use. His VP candidate was guilty of insencirity because she meant one thing and said another.

Lastly, the Washington post author was ignorant because he did not think about the real meaning of the original phrase so he coined another one in order to make up for those differences as he went along.

Works Cited Benen, Steve. “November surprise?” November, 1, 2008. Washington Monthly. Web.

Diakides, Tasha. Mccain: Western Pa. ‘most patriotic’ part of the country. October 21, 2008. CNN. Web.

Eilperin, Juliet. “To avoid being depressed, Palin skimps on campaign news.” October 17, 2008. Huffington post. Web.

Kissinger, Henry. Ending the Vietnam War: A history of America’s involvement in Extrication from the Vietnam War. NY: Simon Schuster, 2003. Print.

Orwell, George. Politics and the English language. NY: Horizon Publishers, 1946. Print.

Nunberg, Geoffrey. “If it’s ‘Orwellian’, it’s probably not”. June 25, 3003. New York Times. Web.

[supanova_question]

Summer Work Programs and Internships Research Paper best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents The benefits to the company

The benefits to the students

Conclusion

References

During summer and other vacations, students are expected to attend some internships and summer jobs preferable those that are in line with the courses they are studying in school. When in these vocational jobs, the students and the companies benefit from the short team contracts (Sides

[supanova_question]

Social Psychology Concepts Essay essay help online

Introduction In social psychology, scholars aim at analysing social situations as per the prevailing socio-cultural environments and influences. Everything which is said and done by people is deemed to have a meaning which may have either a literal or a qualitative interpretation.

This means that a single discourse like masculinity or femininity may be surrounded by several socio-cultural explanations or interpretations which may vary from one culture to the other.

In social psychology, the concepts of interpretative repertoire, subject position and ideological dilemma are used concurrently in sense making of a particular discourse. The concepts are more or less interrelated in that they may be applicable in a single discourse or account of a person about an event, or a reaction or a person(s) to a certain internal or external stimulus.

Discussion The concept of interpretative repertoire is used by social psychologists to refer to the coherent ways of explaining or talking about people, events and or practices in the real world. According to Margret, Stephanie and Simon, in the article titled “discourse analysis”, they describe interpretative repertoire as the “the building blocks of conversation’ (Wetherell, Taylor,

[supanova_question]

Connection between Child Maltreatment and Youth Violence Research Paper essay help: essay help

Abstract Background: The developmental relationships between child maltreatment, youth violence, and intimate partner violence (IPV) are well documented. However, very few studies document the relationship between child abuse/maltreatment and youth violence as separate entities. In the present study, the relationship between child maltreatment and youth violence is examined in the presence of other modifying socio-economic factors.

Method: Using a quasi-experimental design, the present study will examine the conduct/behavior of 14,000 participants drawn from different parts of the United States. Further, the researchers will collect data from three different waves of measurements using three various forms of questionnaires. Subsequently, the data will be analyzed using the STATA SE (Version 9) software application to evaluate the impact of different kinds of child violence on the development and perpetration of youth violence in later stages of lifespan development.

Results: Relative to non-victims, the results of the present study are expected to show a direct link between child maltreatment and youth violence in the presence of other modifying socio-economic factors. Furthermore, it is expected that the percentage probability that abused victims will perpetrate youth violence in the future is expected to be higher than that recorded in previous studies. Conversely, gender differences are also expected in the way males and females respond to different forms of child maltreatment in perpetrating youth violence in later stages of lifespan development.

Conclusion: From the study findings, it will be apparent that there is a direct link between child maltreatment and youth violence in the presence of other modifying socio-economic factors.

Introduction

[supanova_question]

Qualitative Research: Rigour Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Definition of research rigour depends on the frame a particular research is based on. While undertaking case of critical research, researchers should maintain their focus on the objectives of the research being carried out. Rigorous research is excellent compared to other types of study; however, it is important to establish the motive behind each study.

Rigour is mostly constructed between a person carrying out research and another one reading it. In simple terms, it means that a rigorous research is one that suits the reader. In such cases, it is the readers who ascertain the criteria for classifying research works. This paper looks into different types of rigour, including theoretical, methodological, procedural, interpretative and evaluative rigours and explains how they can be achieved.

Theoretical rigour refers to congruence surrounded by epistemological and theoretical frameworks, and the methods used to conduct various researches. To achieve rigour, it is important that a researcher establishes a theoretical position in the management of a project. It is inappropriate to apply interpretative content to the objectivity or epistemology when conducting research.

To achieve harmony in research, various aspects of the study should harmonize with each other. To achieve the desired theoretical rigour, it is important that the theoretical framework, also referred to as the phenomenology, is drawn from a touch of symbolic interaction and hermeneutics perceptions of research. To achieve a good sense of rigour, the research should follow traditional chains of epistemology methods.

Methodological rigour is a combination of various methods. When several types of rigour are combined, a methodological triangulation is formed. Methodological rigour mostly depends on personal choice, which acts as a guide for scholars as they undertake research.

In order to achieve a method that best suits research conditions, a semi-structured method of viewing research methods should be employed. Methodological rigour utilizes explicit samples and employs an inclusion methodological approach to the sampling procedures. In qualitative research, sampling should be systematic, purposive and conclusive; it should be conducted in a manner that comprehensively covers all the research topics.

Interpretative rigour describes the reliability of research and represents interpreters’ comments concerning a particular study. This form of rigour is mostly associated with credibility. Interpretative research does not aim at making a credible account of the phenomena used; instead, it focuses on the interpretations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Triangulation is one way of creating interpretive rigour; it helps improve personal interpretation of the research. For researchers to ensure their research is reliable, they should analyze data and employ triangulation in their interpretations and conclusions. Interpretational rigour can also be attained using different sources to support all the interpretations that are made.

Triangulation of interpretations also improves interpretative rigour in research. Interpretative rigour compares information obtained from interview notes, journals and reflections, to that given by informants. Contradicting information is also important as it provides supplementary information to researcher and forms a basis for further research.

Evaluative rigour attempts to identify and name some of the challenges expected in research. Ethically challenging situations, in research, are some of the prime indicators of evaluative rigour. This implies that evaluation rigour can be attained through evaluation of the procedures, to be used to deal with individual challenges in a study. Evaluative rigour informs participants on the steps and strategies to be followed to come up with competent research procedures.

In conclusion, it is evident that all elements of research are intertwined. Similarly, all types of rigour are related to each another; when one of them fails, then the whole research process gets compromised. It is not easy to differentiate theoretical rigour from methodological rigour, since their elements are interconnected. Evaluative and interpretative rigours are technically related, in that they measure the efficiency of research.

[supanova_question]

Wal-Mart Learning and Growth Perspective Essay best essay help

Importance of learning and growth The balanced scorecard is a strategic planning and management system that is used by businesses, governments, and others organizations to align business activities to the vision and strategy of the organization, improve internal and external communications, and monitor organization performance against strategic goals. It can be discussed under the following;

Mission – A manager is expected to know how well their product is running, and whether the organization’s products and services meet the customers demand. The mission of any organization has to be designed by those who understand the process well and have ideas since a mission should be a unique one which cannot be easily copied by the outsiders.

For any organization to achieve its missions, it must align the organizational functions with its objectives by centering on the staff and their roles in attaining the company’s objectives (Gumbus

[supanova_question]

Statistics for the Behavioral cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Parental involvement in their children education Introduction

Researchers have carried out various researches regarding parental involvement in education of their children, with many reports implying that increased levels of parental participation in the child’s education can improve the student’s academic achievements.

Generally, children are mainly educated by their parents and teachers throughout their lives. Parents play a very important role in education, by partnering with teachers and students to enhance running of the education systems effectively. In order to assist the parents to become aware of the effectiveness of their partnering in education, teachers should involve dialogue with the parents early enough to discuss about the parents’ hopes and aspirations for their child.

Their understanding of the child needs and their suggestions about the ways that the teachers can help allow the teachers to be able to highlight their limitations and invite parents to participate in their child’s education in definite ways (Nieto, 1996). For the child to perform well academically, it requires substantial support from parents.

Parents involvement in education of a child takes several ways including “good parenting, provision of a secure and stable environment, intellectual stimulation, parent-child discussion, good models of constructive social and educational values and high aspiration relating to personal fulfillment and participation in the school events, work and governance” (Desforges

[supanova_question]

Art Gallery’s Weak Points and Merits Essay essay help online free

Table of Contents Introduction

Lack of written explanations

Omission of artists’ names

Presentation

Timeliness

Quality of works

Presentation of different cultures

Conclusion

Recommendation

Introduction An gallery refers to a collection of artistic works that have been compiled for various reasons. Most of the works that are contained in an art gallery is done by bare hands.

However, modern work galleries contain artistic works that are done through computerized and other mechanized techniques. This paper looks at one collection with an aim of appraising its strong points and criticizing its weak points.

Lack of written explanations There is a common saying that a single picture speaks a thousand words. This means that the message that is sent through a picture is valuable than many words. However, it is note worth that that understanding of people is not equal.

This is due to the differences that occur in the personalities. Some people will need a little words so as to understand the picture. The picture that are collected in the gallery have very little explanations which locks out a portion of people who could have benefited from the information that is contained in the picture(s).

More over, lack of explanations leaves the pictures with a lot of ambiguity. To explain this I state that different symbols and pictures are used differently at different contexts. The symbol of sun is used by some persons to denote life while other use it to denote sunrise.

Though both of the above mentioned usages are connected and interrelated, they mean a totally different thing. The collections leave the audience and prospect users wit open interpretations some of which may be misguiding.

Omission of artists’ names It is common for any artistic work to have the name of the artist written either at t5he footnote or at a visible position. However, the names of the artists in the gallery are not omitted for most of the pictures. This scenario brings about lack of recognition of the copyright of the artist towards his or her work.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Also, it is common to have various pieces of art quoted in scholarly articles. In quoting such an item, the person quoting it is required to mention the name of the artist so ads not to contravene the laws of copyright.

Where such is not available, the users can use the data contained without being mat by sustaining evidence against such law bending should it occur.

Presentation There are different ways of presenting the artistic work. In choosing the mode of presentation to use the owner or the person in possession of the artistic work is faced by various reasons. One is the availability of the storage and presentation media.

Also considered is the ability of retrieving sections of that data directly without having to pass through other unwanted works. Apart from this cost of that presentation mode is another factor of consideration.

The mode of data presentation that has been used to present data in the above gallery can be faulted. The method is comparable to adobe and PowerPoint presentations which are more flexible.

In the above two modes of presentation, the user of data contained in a gallery is obliged to scroll through unwanted materials if he or she has targeted a certain data.

Timeliness Judging from the themes that are presented by the pieces of works in the gallery, the works can withstand various time based changes. These changes can only have a new meaning on the pictures.

We will write a custom Essay on Art Gallery’s Weak Points and Merits specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Even though leaving of writings is condemned in other sections of this paper, they work towards the benefits of the gallery to beat the challenge of time. The feature of timeliness is further enhanced by the fact that the galley is available in soft copy. This implies that the information can be stored and used by later generations.

Quality of works One of the commendable things about the gallery is the quality of the pieces of art collected. The selection of colors that have been used in any of ten works and also the pictures that are presented in works are spectacular. This explains the experience and time consumed in coming up with such collections.

The other feature that stands out in the gallery is message presentation. Not withstanding the point that is raised in other sections of this paper, the massage that is presented by each picture can be explained by even an uninterested observer. This is with the exception of the group mentioned which needs words so as top understand the pictures.

Moreover, the arrangement of the pieces of art is well chosen. Most of the pictures that follow one another have relating themes. This brings about smooth flow and integration. Even though the last picture and the first picture present themes which are so different, the motion that is created from one picture to another makes it hard for the audience to realize.

Presentation of different cultures This is another area that gives credit to the gallery. In mist of other collections, most of the works can be directly linked to a certain tradition or even religion and in some instances both.

However, the pictures that are presented in this gallery are mostly multi cultured in nature. Even those which can be traced to a certain tradition they are not over reliant on the tradition but rather contain spots of other traditions.

Conclusion The gallery presents commendable works in general. The weak points that are mentioned in this paper are minimal compared to the merits that are accredited to the gallery. The gallery is that recommended for use by persons of many cultural backgrounds and by persons with different disciplines.

Recommendation It is recommended that the pieces of works that are presented in this gallery be accompanied by some wordings for explanations. This will work for the benefit of persons who have been mentioned in the paper as possessing low understanding capacity.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Art Gallery’s Weak Points and Merits by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Also, it is recommended that the gallery be presented in more retrieval flexible means. As mentioned in this paper, PowerPoint presentation as well as adobe storage is more flexible.

[supanova_question]

How might the Telecommunication Industry in Australia affect the Rollout of National Broadband Network in Australia in 2011? Essay best essay help

Introduction The telecommunication industry in Australia is experiencing a massive and rapid economic boom with various reports showing a great value of performance orientation by its respondents in the industry. The industry is mainly made up of businesses that provide telecommunication services to the public either by cable, wire or radio.

The major activities of the telecommunication industry in Australia include internet services, operation of radio relay stations, telephone services, operation of television relay stations, teleprinter and telex services, network communication services, cable and communication channel services, and satellite communication services.

The industry is fundamentally event driven with diminutive execution of planning in areas other than finance or marketing.

The lack of planning is evident in contemporary Future Orientation with the conveyed desire for future orientation, but the introduction of intensive competition has recently promoted more product planning and the general business planning in the market.

However, elements such as size, novelty, and politics of the present-day industry environment has contributed in depicting planning less effective than otherwise expected.

The interference by such factors in the telecommunication industry has protected the free-to-air TV networks, and at the same time contributed to Australia’s holdup in rolling out high-speed internet access through the National Broadband Network initiative.

The ever changing market and technology has brought in a real forecast in the capitalization and elevation of Future Orientation, and this brings in the likelihood of Australia following the paradigm of America and other European countries in developing strategic mechanisms of capturing the market’s vast potential.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The growth and immense potential in this industry saw the planned roll out of the National Broadband Network (NBN) project, which is meant to take advantage of the existing economic and social opportunities in the digital sector.

While delivering an affordable, high-speed broadband to every corner of the Australian society, the project is projected to drive the country’s economy for decades to come by migrating from copper to the fibre optic network

When the Australian government went ahead with the privatization of Telstra, which is the country’s largest telecommunications company, there were major concerns on the contradictory role of the government as regulator and owner of the telecommunication giant.

Major concerns also remain in Telstra’s potential capability of abusing its monopoly power to impediment regulatory outcomes through belligerent use of its litigation. Delaying in making a satisfactory public bid for access to its network and inflating the prices of its wholesale services such as fixed and mobile network are some of Telstra’s alleged abuses.

In order to level the competitive telecommunication field, the Australian government instructed Telstra to separate its retail and wholesale arms for the NBN project. Telstra vehemently opposed this idea and the draft legislation that would separate its structures within its telecommunication network.

Regulatory and judicial proceedings still mar Telstra with numerous disputes with its competitors over access to its network rights. Despite this, various stakeholders have since entered the scene with ardent interest.

The NBN initiative is projected to create a network that will handle an assortment of data that is increasingly complicated, therefore amalgamating the media and the information technology industries with telecommunications.

We will write a custom Essay on How might the Telecommunication Industry in Australia affect the Rollout of National Broadband Network in Australia in 2011? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Media The media and communications industries has undergone through changes in its general corporate organization with mounting competition between media segments on the maximum gain and use of content being produced (Stuart Cunningham, Graeme Turner 4).

This means taking advantage of the capability to present and modify the same content on numerous platforms of delivery and distribution. By restricting concentration of ownership in broadcasting sectors, the ownership and control of media is regulated across the media.

Foxtel which has a substantial majority in the pay-TV market is half-owned by Telstra and the roll-out of the NBN project is seen to have rules and regulations that limit the number of providers, while shielding the incumbents against entry by neglecting diversity In Australia, all free-to-air television Programmes have a strict domestic content requirements through the Australian Broadcasting Services Amendment Act that require 10 percent of programme budgeting on new Australian drama programs (Ron Kirk 27).

Although traditional media has occasionally been warned on the radical changes they face with the development in the digital media arena, they have basically been absent from the debate surrounding the NBN project.

However, the National Broadband Network will generate new changes and options that will see media players taking leadership roles in search of trans-sector opportunities the NBN has to offer. They can possibly copy their archaic models onto the NBN brand via the wholesale services of a telco since they have a strong brand with millions of users.

Although it is not defined, foreign nationals seeking proposals that relates to portfolio shareholdings into the media industry are subjected to a ‘national interest test’ since foreign investment in the mass media is limited (Chang and Thorson 16).

Media stakeholders should therefore gear up to with mechanisms that will help them profit from their audiences with the convergence of media and internet-based technologies through high-speed broadband even as they continue to enjoy protection from outside competition. (Butcher 127).

Despite this projection, most media companies are still looking and grounded on their core competencies rather than stirring towards media innovation.

Not sure if you can write a paper on How might the Telecommunication Industry in Australia affect the Rollout of National Broadband Network in Australia in 2011? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Advantages of Public owned Telecommunications towards NBN Rollout.

The NBN initiative will produce and promote a prevalent network that is competent in handling both broadband and narrowband requirements with equal adept in managing interactive and broadcasting services.

One feature of this project is that it involves and embraces the elaboration of neo-liberal views and ideas of economic regulation.

In this view, public ownership of telecommunication infrastructure and services is seen as a central point for national pride and sovereignty with a common feeling of owning a piece of a vital national infrastructure (Fairbrother 52).

Public views and ideas would initially be ‘measured at heart’ for the NBN project and this would douse any thought of manipulation by ‘outside’ parties, and also bring public calm with general accountability to the project.

Public ownership would not cultivate into the current climate of crisis brought about by the free market that would dictate the wages and conditions of each and every Australian. Public ownership of the NBN roll-out would basically promote a unified and coherent platform for the whole initiative.

Disadvantages of Public owned Telecommunications towards NBN Roll-out.

Since there is never a conclusive concept from the general public, such ownership would only promulgate indecisions and slothfulness into the implementation and completion of the NBN initiative.

According to the 2010 report by the Business Council of Australia, ‘’ the public ownership of the NBN initiative would elevate investor uncertainty with various companies rescheduling or withholding investments, and would only impede new technologies from getting into the market with the country’s general output falling behind ( 4) ‘’.

Such a scenario would only create ambiguity over NBN’s future operations.

Advantages of Private owned Telecommunication Infrastructures towards NBN Rollout.

International communication through telecommunications is rapidly becoming the backbone of trade, productivity, and the general business activities which are the linchpins of a growing, healthy economy (Mody, Bauer and Straubhaar 53).

Privatization in the telecommunication industry is seen as a catalyst to development with a significant input. In this view, the streamlining of the telecommunications industry in Australia has made it impossible to find public-owned telecommunication carriers due to the concept of deregulation and privatization.

This model is highly important because it will redefine the NBN initiative into from the typical public good, to a more global-oriented project that is competitive both domestically and internationally with a customer-driven service.

The Telecommunications industry is quite complex in technology and operations, and the only way that consumers can be better served is if more providers are included in the field. Consumers will be offered more competing products, prices, and services in order to meet the ever more diverse demands.

Such private owned companies are also capable of responding quite better to consumer demands than the public-owned corporations that may not act imperatively (Cunningham 151).

Sometimes such projects do halt due to lack of funds that can be brought about by underestimation or even the changing tides in commodity prices, and the telecommunication companies which are private-owned can quickly accumulate for these funds.

This means that the NBN initiative will flourish under long-term macroeconomic relief, and also can carry on and meet deadlines rather than wait for the tedious process associated with the public owned companies.

Generally through private ownership, the NBN project will see a proficient financing and management with the inclusion of professionals who bring real sustainable efficiencies to the whole project.

Privatization is therefore the more efficient solution to the sorry nature of most state-owned of telecommunication infrastructures with its limit on resources and the changing technological know-how.

Disadvantages of Private owned Telecommunication Infrastructures towards NBN Roll-out.

Private ownership of telecommunication systems in Australia will only bring distrust to the fore since it’s a product of an intrinsic capitalistic motive, and will also spread the adage that any control of information leads to the control of both political and economic procedures and the NBN project has not fallen short of such perception.

Since telecommunications is an important industry that connects every sector of the Australian society, it might be used by a single entity or group of companies to create an oligarchy of economical information which can snatch power from the government.

Such a scenario would reduce the government to a mere puppet, while these private entities continue to violate their power in the NBN initiative and act in their own interest neglecting Australian’s welfare (Chhokar, Brodbeck and House 320-331). This will greatly hinder the roll-out of the NBN project since Australia is a society which has a fair history of distrust in private ownership of infrastructure.

Private ownership of the NBN roll-out would not put public interest into consideration and the individual private companies would only be interested in generating shareholder’s profits at customer’s expense.

Privatization would also encourage manipulation and cover-ups of various inconsistencies associated with the NBN initiative since such organizational setups detest public scrutiny.

Privatization will allow foreign competitors enter the telecommunication market indiscriminately and would endeavor to servicing only wealthy businesses and individuals who can afford their expensive services.

In this event, the NBN initiative would therefore leave its core policy of universal service unsettled. It’s hypothetical for privatization to take place without liberalization since such profit-driven enterprises do operate as a monopoly in its selfish achievements that can prove untenable for the government to contain(Leahy and Michael O’Brien 2-5).

Analysis Australia is tremendously relying on the NBN initiative to face out its obsolete copper telecommunications network. The pendulum of opinions surrounding the NBN roll-out is due to its importance for the country’s economy, future development, and international competitiveness.

The apparent stratification in the Australian telecommunication industry is quite higher than desirable and is derivative of the existing socio-political level of attitudes.

The rapid restructuring in the industry is significantly affecting collectivism and power expanses, especially with the differing view between those who do not have the slightest clue of the impending changes and those that are knowledgeable of what is to come with the changes.

Although there are calls for either private or public investment in the telecommunications industry, it’s unfortunate that the processes have represented a vicious circle of events that is detrimental to both the economic and political systems.

Conclusion The emerging picture from the NBN initiative and the general Australian telecommunications industry is the consistent socio-political values that underpin the economical importance of this project to the country at large.

If telecommunication laws are well designed implemented, it would reduce the general fear and uncertainty that accompany the dreary investment in the telecommunication sector. At the same time, Telstra and its competitors should learn in ways they can corporate and be diplomatic about their differences rather than the self-sacrificing we are now witnessing.

Even as the telecommunications industry undergoes through the intense process of change that seems endless, there is no doubt of the massive and infinite benefits that the NBN initiative will bring for generations to come.

Works Cited Butcher, John. Australia under Construction: Nation-building Past, Present and Future. Canberra: ANU E Press, 2008. Print.

Chang and Andrew, Thorson. A Legal Guide to Doing Business in Asia-Pacific. Chicago: American Bar Association, 2011. Print.

Chhokar, Brodbeck and Robert House. Culture and leadership, across the world: The GLOBE Book of In-Depth Studies of 25 Societies. New York: Routledge, 2007. Print.

Cunningham and Graeme Turner. The Media and Communications in Australia. Crows Nest, NSW: Allen

[supanova_question]

What is the Family? Definition Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Objective

Critical Analysis

Conclusion

Reference List

Introduction In the human perspective, a family is a group of persons connected by kinship, compassion, or sharing of residence. In a number of societies, the family is the basic unit for the socialization of children. A basic family unit is made up of a father, mother, and children, and is known as a nuclear family, however, this unit can be extended to include other relations to be known as an extended family.

The concept of the family has undergone a transformation and in today’s society, many people define the family structure as an arbitrary cultural set-up, a statement could be partially true. In ancient times, the family was a closely-knit, patriarchal clan consisting of a man, his wife or wives, and several children!

This has changed to include a monogamous parent taking care of the children. Besides, certain concepts of the family have broken with tradition within specific communities while some have been implanted through migration to thrive or else disappear in the new communities and societies.

Current debates and interest concerning the family have forced individuals to reassess themselves in a society driven by change and uncertainty. Because of its intricate nature, sociologists have not succeeded in coming with a universal definition of what family is and how is constructed. Rather, the definition is subject to individual interpretation and depends on the value a person attaches to being a member of a communal social group.

Objective The aim of the paper is to give a concise definition of family, and the context of family structures such as the traditional family; single parent family, blended family and cohabiting relationship families. The paper also examines the influences that have progressively shaped the concept of family from the past to the present day.

Critical Analysis A family is generally defined as a group of individuals who are linked by kinship or adoption, and who have a common residence. (Germov and Poole, 2011, 132). Kinship ties are connections or associations that link individuals through genealogy lines or marriage.

However, a few writers disagree with this concept. For instance, George Murdock, an American anthropologist, defines family as a social group that lives together, support each other economically, and raise children (Germov and Poole, 2011, 128).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the mid 20th century, sociologists defined family as a man living together with his wife and children, joined by blood, marriage or adoption. The couple had sex, procreated, and cared for the children jointly, besides bringing resources such as money and food together. The family members also guarded and supported each other.

Again, some writers have given a different perspective. Some asserted that previous definitions of the concept of the family should be altered as they are founded on ‘monolithic’ models that exhibit partiality towards a specific kind of family typified by gender discrimination and legal attachment, instead of gender fairness and patterns of care or emotional response.

Besides, modern reproductive methods have changed family associations and the definition of terms such as ‘mother’ and ‘father’ gas considerably changed. For instance, women past their menopausal age can now have children through surrogate mothers. Consequently, an increasing number of studies are focusing on what really defines a family. This perspective overlooks the gender inclination of the couple and the legitimacy of the relationship, and centers rather on the patterns of caring and affection.

The concept of the family has been conventionally related to the traditional family setup, which can be defined as a relationship in the children live with both the biological parents with the father often at work while the mother stays at home (Germov

[supanova_question]

Classics of Moral and Political Theory Essay essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Immanuel Kant’s Ideas: Grounding for the Metaphysics of Morals

Mill: Utilitarianism

Friedrich Nietzsche

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction The foremost thrust of morality erudition over the precedent years has exposed a propensity to an astonishing extent, to shift towards a distinct path. The superseding intention of philosophy has been to convey the sphere of ethics under the control of the coherent self.

Founded on philosophers’ notion of the individual as a self-directed representative and a freethinking conventional viewpoint, philosophers assert that every individual exist single-handedly as the maker of his or her principles and rationale.

It naturally follows that every person is prima facie gratis to consider his or her own reasoning with any measure of worth or disvalue he or she perceives fit. Such a cogent ethics, which people may conceivably easily label self-teleology, is apprehensive mostly to the prescribed necessities of truth telling and promise keeping (Roger and Colleen 138).

In this moral system, the prime depressing responsibility towards others is to abstain from intruding to their freedom whereas the critical constructive responsibility is to respect deals that have been liberally settled.

In ethics, this advancement interprets the rapport among individuals in contractual expressions and in performance, centers on a harmful program of avoidance of immoral infringement by some people upon other’s sovereignty.

This essay examines ethical significance of truth telling or promise keeping by focusing on the ideas of three thinkers. It compares the bases of their reasoning and reviews their knowledge in an attempt to identify whether they can apply in the contemporary society. Truth telling and promise keeping is something intrinsic in an individual. It is also through socialization that people acquire knowledge needed in promise keeping and truth telling.

Immanuel Kant’s Ideas: Grounding for the Metaphysics of Morals Kant’s ideas are breaking point in the modern metaphysics. He was aiming at appreciating science, review the role of metaphysics as well to place morality within the precincts of science. He developed the theory referred to as moral theory, which over time has been influencing the western philosophers in their works.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The theory examines the difficulties of science, philosophy, ethics and religion in the contemporary world. Immanuel Kant suggested that moral laws and their important variations from each realistic cognition in an empirical subject rest entirely on its pure part. The laws give human beings a priori rule because they are rational beings.

The laws have the capacity of acquiring the power of judgment that is tailored by practices. Different people apply the laws differently as these laws are capable of influencing human behavior. He therefore suggested that metaphysics of morals are unavoidable by individuals because thrives of speculation pertaining to the origin of practical values are in charge of shaping our behaviors and not only motives but morals that are responsible for each kind of corruption.

What is perceived to be ethically correct conforms to moral law, but is never enough since it must be performed for the sake of ethical law. Orthodoxy is simply incredibly reliant and vague since the non-moral argument may perhaps now and then fabricate events that are inconsistent with the law. The ethical law in its transparency and authenticity can be sought nowhere except in a wholesome attitude.

Kant argues that there is an odd thing in the suggestion of the total worth of a simple will in which no report is taken of some valuable outcome. In the face of the entire accords acknowledged even from normal rationale, there must augment the notion that such thoughts may perhaps have its concealed root that is purely a number of pretentious beliefs and that individuals may have misinterpreted the rationale behind the principle of temperament in conveying to reason the prevalence of the will.

He further argues that in the ordinary establishment of structured being, no organ is to be initiated for some end except if it is the most fit and the best tailored for that end. The theorist established that the more an educated rationale dedicates itself to the endeavor of benefiting from life and contentment, the further do individuals move away from accurate gratification (Morgan 400). This is particularly so in the case of those who are the highly qualified in the utilization of rationale because after scheming for all rewards they draw from, they hitherto discover that they have in reality just obtained additional dilemmas to their skulls than they have added to cheerfulness.

Consequently, they appear to resent, rather than loathe the more general run of individuals who are nearer to the leadership of simple ordinary intuition and who do not permit their rationale much pressure on their conduct (Morgan 402). By this argument, Kant’s ideas suggest that truth telling is a duty, just like any other responsibility in life.

Mill: Utilitarianism This theorist starts by claiming that it is feasible for persons to turn out to be unresponsive to their own records and projections particularly when one had no ethical or human concern in societal things whereby persons only search for satisfaction of interest.

We will write a custom Essay on Classics of Moral and Political Theory specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There is no basis for the environment of things such as a sum of rational traditions adequate to offer an intelligent curiosity in things such as consideration should not be intrinsic to anyone natured in an enlightened realm. However, there is less natural requisite that some human beings should be egotistical, devoid of each sentiment or concern but those which hub in depressed personality.

Legitimate clandestine friendliness and a truthful attention in the public excellence are achievable. In a globe that there is so much curiosity and enjoyment, everybody who has reasonable quantity of moral and intellectual rudiments is competent enough to co-exist. This may be described as imaginable. Unless such an individual through terrible laws or subjection to the will of others is deprived of the right to exercise the resource of happiness within his reaches, he will not survive (Morgan 1002).

Mill further argues that it is in a defective condition of the world’s provision that any person can superlatively serve the happiness of others by complete forfeit of his own. As long as the earth is in that defective position, the willingness to build such surrender is the uppermost asset that can be established in individuals.

Not everything except perception can elevate an individual beyond the likelihood of existence by making him believe and allow fate and fortune do their nastiest. They have no influence to control an individual who when once experienced, is liberated from intemperance of nervousness pertaining to the tribulations of life. The contentment that generates utilitarian customary of what is true in behavior is not the representative’s own cheerfulness but that of everyone apprehensive. As between his or her pleasure and that of others, utilitarianism calls for an individual to be as sternly objective as a neutral and compassionate outsider.

Friedrich Nietzsche The real origin of the notion good is sought and set in the mistaken position by the theory. Good does not originate from those whom integrity is given but rather from the superior such as the dignified, influential, senior level and high-minded people. Wrong is related to all bottom, short psyches, widespread and offensive.

Individuals first took for themselves the freedom to generate ideals, to invent names for standards and not at all mind anything for convenience. The perspective of efficacy is as overseas and unfortunate as likely particularly in connection to a so hot and an outburst of maximum level arrangement and grade distinctive worth verdicts. From this, the word good does not automatically connect itself to un-egoistic measures, as is the fallacy of those genealogists of ethics (Morgan 1147).

Conclusion From the three theorists, it can be concluded that the morality of telling the truth and keeping promises is not homogenous. The scholars do not uniformly underscore it. While Kant seem to be arguing that truth and promise-keeping is a duty that should be faithfully observed, Mill views it as s functional unit of the society.

Mill observes that people should learn to be telling truth and always keep promises if they are to be good citizens. Nietzsche on his part postulated that truth and keeping promises is not an easy thing in the society. He observes that the whole problem lies with people’s perceptions. The majority views it as being foreign and can only function well in places that were crafted.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Classics of Moral and Political Theory by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Morgan, Michael. Classics of Moral and Political Theory, 4 Ed. Indianaplis: Hacket Publishing Company, 2005.

Roger, Sider and Colleen Clements. Patients’ ethical obligation for their health, Journal of medical ethics, 10, 1984: 138-142

[supanova_question]

SWOT Analysis of Wal-Mart Stores Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Background

SWOT Analysis

Strengths

Weaknesses

Opportunities

Threats

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction In strategic management and planning examination of the internal and external factors is very important. These factors are categories in the SWOT analysis, which involves the analysis of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats.

The strengths and the weaknesses are the internal factors while the opportunities and threats from the internal factors. Through SWOT analysis a strategy can be developed and used in the marketing of the firm (Bohm 2). It can also be used in avoiding any weaknesses thus enabling it benefit from any opportunities in the future regardless of expected threats.

According to Boham (2) SWOT analysis is responsible for the offering of vital information that enables evaluation of the capabilities and resources of a firm against competitive background it operates from. This is used in strategy formulation as well as enhancing competition in the market. The paper gives a SWOT analysis of Wal-Mart stores, one of the leading retail stores in the world.

Background Wal-Mart is the leading retail store in the United States of America. It has several stores in the North America region that it solely owns and operates. It has its headquarters in Bentonville; Arkansas becoming the largest company that privately employs people (Blair 262).

It has 8,500 stores in 15 different countries. It operates under fifty five different store names although in the USA it operates on its own. In Mexico it operates as Walmex, in India as best price, in UK as ASDA, under its name in Puerto Rico, and as Seiyu in Japan. In Brazil, Argentina, Canada, UK and Puerto Rico it fully owns the operations.

Outside North America the investments had mixed results (Blair 262). It pulled out from Germany when its operations were rendered unsuccessful while in china the operations have been successful. During the 2010 financial year the company recorded $258 billion that translates to total sales of 63.8%. The competitors of Wal-Mart stores are many in the respective countries where it has the different stores

SWOT Analysis According to Kneer (2) when the Wal-Mart stores was founded in 1962 by Sam Walton the core values of the company were “respect for individual, service to the customers and striving for excellence”. All these core values have the objective of satisfying customers and believing that customers are important to the company.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Over the years the company has been operation with profits even in times of economic crisis because of its belief in customer satisfaction. The following is the SWOT analysis of the Wal-Mart stores where each are broken down and discussed in detail. They comprise the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats which are the internal and external factors respectively.

Strengths These forms the resources of a company as well as capabilities applied in the market so as to develop the market competitive advantage. Wal-Mart stores phenomenal success has been as a result of the following strengths. It has dominated the American retail market (Kneer 2) because of its brand that is powerful.

The sale of huge merchandise in US and a “market share of more than 30% of health and beauty aids” demonstrate dominance of Wal-Mart (Pahl and Richter 21). It provides a variety of goods under one store making it convenient to many American families (Pahl and Richter 21).

The services offered by the company are worth the value of the money the consumers pay. The branding which is strong is based on a pricing strategy where prices are low with the aim of attracting and retaining a huge customer base. Kneer (2) observes that through the use of advanced technology the company is able to offer low prices because it has the strength to reduce operational cost.

Through the automated distribution links the chain store is able to control its expenses ensuring that low price offer is maintained. Deliveries in the Wal-Mart stores are faster because the technological system is interlinked thus ensuring time saving and efficiency (Kneer 2).The technological advancement and embracement has enable the company regulate the procurement and logistics department reducing any form of goods theft.

This is because the system can observe and monitor the movement of goods in and outside the stores. This has reduced the expenses of unnecessary losses. Over the years the company has over grown experiencing global expansion (Pahl and Richter 21). For example it has stores in the UK, Brazil, Argentina, and Puerto Rico as well as in china. Wal-Mart believes in human management and their development. This can be explained by the training it offers to its employees and having faith in them. This has boosted the performance of the employees making it a world class retail store.

Weaknesses These are viewed as the company’s problems that are internally manifested. Being the largest retail store in the world and in several countries it is faced with the weakness of controlling all the chains and branches. This is because technology has failures and cannot be 100% effective.

We will write a custom Research Paper on SWOT Analysis of Wal-Mart Stores specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The IT might not be always efficient and because its management is technologically driven and controlled, the slightest failure may cause problems in service provision. Wal-Mart sells variety of products under one roof making is likeable, but it may lack flexibility that some of the competitors operate using (Pahl and Richter 22).

Lack of focus can be seen as a weakness that is embraced by the Wal-Mart chain stores. Although Wal-Mart has stores in many countries it is not globally recognized. According to Kneer (3) competitors of the Wal-Mart may take the advantage of globalization and go internationally thus giving the company a global challenge. Its presence in few countries is the biggest weakness the company has.

Wal-Mart has the capacity of manufacturing goods, of which this can be seen as strength. However when the huge manufacturing investment hinders quick response to changes availed by environmental strategy can be seen as a weakness. This is because competitors can use this to their advantage affecting the Wal-Mart operations in the short run. Pahl and Richter (24) note that Wal-Mart dominance has negative effects in its operations.

For example, the supercenters that are to be opened will be closely located, this would allow internal completion that it impossible for some to gain enough balance costs. The issue of lowering prices to chase competitors saw a failure of 25% of the Wal-Mart stores in delivering the core values to its consumers (Pahl and Richter 22).

Opportunities These are the environmental external factors that a company may experience allowing them to grow as they make profits. According to Kneer (2) Wal-Mart has the opportunity of forming strategic alliances through merges with global retailers.

For example it can focus on the ready markets of Europe, India and china which have not been fully utilized (Pahl and Richter 22). Other than forming mergers or alliances there is possibility of opening stores in the emerging world economies like India and china which have large population hence large consumer base. These are opportunities that can see Wal-Mart expand its capital base as well as profits and growth.

This can exploit new markets through diversification by opening super centers, and malls. Opening of new stores gives Wal-Mart the opportunity to create employment thus reducing inflation because dependence ration is reduced. This changes the lives of many citizens who may not be necessarily Americans.

With the embrace of technology, Wal-Mart can take advantage of internet shopping that can reach a large populations clientele. Pahl and Richter (22) note that Wal-Mart has the potential of retaining its customers through low pricing. This creates customers loyalty which is important in development of a retail store like Wal-Mart.

Not sure if you can write a paper on SWOT Analysis of Wal-Mart Stores by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Threats These are caused by the unexpected or foreseen change in the external environmental factors which are threatening to the firms operations and productivity. Wal-Mart is the number one retail store meaning that it is seen as the target by competitors (Kneer, 2), who can be globally or locally.

Competition reduces the market share and any slightest mistake in customer satisfaction may be the start of a downfall. The retail store also faces the threat of price competition from other operators in the retail industry. This is because all the retail may decide to operate under a low price that the Wal-Mart’s and according to factors that determine demand price is one.

When the prices are low the demand increases and vice versa. The retail store faces the threat of being targeted by political enemies. This is being a globally recognized store political problems exposure are high (Pahl and Richter 24). The political woes and economic inflation and tax wars are huge threat to Wal-Mart.

This may affect the operations of the store hence failing in some countries. In low regions outsourcing is applied this reduces the cost of production. This according to Kneer (3) has led to price competition causing price deflation which is a threat to the operations of Wal-Mart.

It faces threat of innovation that other retailers may adopt before it does. Currently strategic planning and management are based on the idea of globalization and technological prowess. However Wal-Mart still operates under the old and outdated strategies that are not applicable in the 21st century.

This is a huge threat to the operations and future expansions of Wal-Mart. Pahl and Richter (24) note that Wal-Mart lack transitional strategy which makes it hard to adapt in locally based markets, have economies of scale, improve knowledge flow and locate its operations in locations that optimal. It faces the challenge of growing and establishing stores in foreign countries (Pahl and Richter 24). This was what led to fall of its stores in Germany.

Conclusion SWOT analysis deals with the external and internal environmental factors responsible for strategic planning. They also help in marketing and knowing the competiveness and capability of a company. The SWOT analysis of Wal-Mart stores is well explained in depth where different environment factors both internal and external have been examined. Although it has great and much strength the weaknesses and threats are also great.

Works Cited Böhm, Anja. The Swot Analysis. München: GRIN Verlag GmbH, 2009. Print

Blair, John D. Strategic Thinking and Entrepreneurial Action in the Health Care Industry. Amsterdam: Elsevier JAI, 2007. Print.

Kneer, Christian. The Wal-Mart Success Story. München: GRIN Verlag GmbH, 2009. Print

Pahl, Nadine, and Anne Richter. Swot Analysis – Idea, Methodology and a Practical Approach. München: GRIN Verlag GmbH, 2009. Internet resource.

[supanova_question]

Technological Generations of Mobile Communications Essay online essay help: online essay help

Introduction The distinct life of the mobile communications has taken different phases. This can be traced from the 1G to the most rest 4G. G, 2G, 3G and 4G are a wireless phone or a cellular phone standard way of classification based on generations/ cellular phone evolution. This paper is a critical comparison of all these technological generations with an aim of tracking the trend that is followed in the developments.

Grandpa and Grandma 1G Grandpa and Grandma 1G was the very first generation of wireless technology that originated around 1980’s. The cellular phones of this time were big in size (handbag phones) and used a high power voltage. Communication in the first generation cellular phones was enhanced by use of analog radio waves/ signals; use of radio antennas (a radio transmitter on one end and receiver on the other end.

Analogue technology could only accommodate voice communication the passing of analogue signals. While this was the best technological developments at the time, it had a couple of limitations. The first generation wireless technology covered a relatively small area. Communication was only possible between parties of the same nation/within a nation’s boundary’s/ within the grounds of a particular nation (Fendelman).

This first generation wireless technology supports only one way communication at a time. For instance the intended recipient has to be calm till the sender finishes talking then he/she can begin answering incase he/she speaks before then, his/her message won’t be delivered.

All the above services are possible through a technology that interprets voice calls called circuit switching -Circuit switching is easily distorted by a simple physical noise thus destroying the quality of a conversation. All these limitations lead the players in the industry to look for more advanced technology which could fill the loopholes in communication (News from Rohde and Schwarz, 2002).

2G – The second generation of the wireless digital technology 1G was later thrown out/replaced by 2G that came with greater and better technological benefits like the additional data services. At this level people could send text messages on top of the voice communication they initially had.

The radio signals were digital and the conversations digitally encrypted unlike the initial analog. This therefore allowed the mobile phone services to be passed over a wider area (great service penetration levels).The wireless digital network use brings more voice clarity to the conversation being carried out.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This enhanced intercontinental communications, more privacy in communication as well as storage of communication. The messages sent through this technology could easily be referred to later.

The second generation phones are however, costly compared to the first generation wireless cellular phones. Unlike the first wireless technology where communications were only possible within a nation, 2G ventures into a wide area in terms of service coverage area due to the additional roaming facility.

3G – The third wireless telephone / cellular phone generation The second generation is however overthrown by this third cellular phone evolution which uses a wide band width. This big band width in turn came with a more clear voice communication that is almost perfect (very minimal distractions and cases of eavesdropping- a situation where the signals sent are lost to the surrounding environment).

Communication in this case is possible through a technology packet switching; a situation where data is addressed like the IP addressing then sent over and on reaching its destination, its again recollects in the order sent then decoded/ interconnected to have the conversation (News from Rohde and Schwarz, 2002)..

3G wireless services are widely spread and now almost in all parts of the world. 3G has an added advantage of the global roaming facility which allows communication across the world. One can send text messages, video conference, and chat, download 3dimentional games, and talk to any one and anywhere in this world without distractions like they are having real conversation (News from Rohde and Schwarz , 2002).

3G uses a higher band width also a wide band voice channel compared to the 1G and 2G generations which greatly attributes to high voice clarity and people can talk without any disturbance or with very minimal distractions.

There is an additional multimedia facility brought about by this third generation cellular phones like very fast communication (conversations and text messaging), video conferencing (hold video meetings with people in different locations), internet (surfing/browsing/online chatting), mobile television (watch television’s favorite programs on phone), video calls (like Skye), multi media messaging service (MMS) (sharing of photos and music), etc are now available on 3G phones (Arshad, Farooq, Shah, 2010)

We will write a custom Essay on Technological Generations of Mobile Communications specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The 3G phones are costly compared to the first and second wireless cellular phone generation. Currently 3G is widely in use. Almost everyone is moving or has moved to 3G technology for its interesting features and high speed wireless service.

Despite the numerous advantages to using this kind of phone and very interesting features, 3G wireless telephones however have short battery life compared to the second and first generation phones. Thus the use of this technology is dependent on the proximity to power supply. In remote areas thus, persons are forced to use less advanced technologies to avoid frustrations.

However, some wireless technology users use both technologies concurrently (Arshad, Farooq, Shah, 2010). 3G technology is usually common for users who depend on the wireless communication in internetworking. Most of the service providers carry out promotional advertisements encouraging users to use the technology based on its speed and coverage.

4G – The fourth generation wireless telephones / cellular phone service also known as a complete 3G replacement. 4G operates more like 3G much as it is a step up from 3G. It appears to operate in a hopeful state, like providing its clients with very speedy wireless services. Being the new born baby this fourth generation wireless technology is availed in limited places/areas.

It’s not widely spread and only in use in very few regions like Japan. 4G is anticipated and designed to deliver very high speed internet and generally high wireless services. Also a high network capacity-allowing more people to operate/ access its resources simultaneously (Fendelman,).

They too have the multimedia added feature but with very clear voice and video output compared to the initial generations just like the normal television. The fourth generation cellular phones are damn expensive (high cost) compared to the previous generations. The costs mentioned here are the installation costs. However, the technological requires less maintenance costs.

Similarities All the above mentioned technologies are wireless technologies. They all are able to pass/enhance analog communication. They all can pass voice communications. The first and Second generation covers a relatively small area in terms of geographical boundaries. Each of the technological development has come with increased area coverage than the preceding development.

Both the first and Second generation use a narrow band width, while the third and fourth generation uses wide band width. Both 1G and 2G deal/ are good in voice calls and in the process need to utilize the maximum bandwidth provided (Ashiho, 2003)

Not sure if you can write a paper on Technological Generations of Mobile Communications by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion The technological development in the wireless communication has grown from one phase to another. As each phase is introduced, it leads to changes in other industries that depend on this technology for communication and other purposes. It is paramount to note that each of the above technologies has its own specifications.

Thus, there is always a need for any firm to have a technician who shall introduce the members of the institutions on how to operate the different technological developments. The ability of a firm to use the most modern technology is for its advantage as this leads to less maintenance costs. The only additional costs in the generational growth are the initial installation costs (Ashiho, 2003).

The developments that have been discussed in this paper have been enhanced by various firms and individuals. The need for the improvements has always rendered the players in the wireless communication busy with efforts of improving each of the development.

While the current technology is viewed by many as perfect, it is expected that a need will arise for the provision of services that it does not offer. Thus, it is arguable to conclude that the development in the wireless communication cannot be optimum.

References Arshad, j., Farooq, A., Shah, A., (2010) Evolution and Development Towards 4th Generation (4G) Mobile Communication Systems. Web.

Ashiho, L. S. (2003). Mobile Technology: Evolution from 1G to 4G. Web.

Fendelman, A. (n.d). Cell Phone Glossary: What is 1G vs. 2G vs. 2.5G vs. 3G vs. 4G? Web.

News from Rohde and Schwarz (2002). Measuring the Acoustic Characteristics of 3G Mobile Phones. Web.

Peter, K. (n.d). Analysis and Comparison of 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G and 5G Telecom Services. Web.

[supanova_question]

The Great Wall of China Descriptive Essay custom essay help

Introduction The Great Wall of China is a long continuous wall which was erected with the sole intention of securing the Chinese border in the northern border against intruders (Man 103). The Great Wall consists of several walls which were built over a lengthy period of time.

The construction is claimed to have began during the dynasty of Emperor Qin Shi Huangi who ruled the country in the early 200 BC to the 16th century during the Ming dynasty.

The essay will take the form of an informative speech whose intention is to further shed light on who built the Great Wall of China, when it was built, the reason behind building it and how wide and long the wall is as well as how it has been built.

The Chinese were among the first countries to experience civilization in the world. During the civilization period, they acquired the art of building houses and other structures and this helped greatly during the construction of the Great Wall.

As early as 8th century BC, various states such as Wei, Qin, Yan, Qi, and Zhao constructed extensive walls in an attempt to defend their territorial borders from their warring neighbors (Yamashita and Lindesay 53).

However, all these efforts were better noticed during the reign of the Qin dynasty that after conquering the states which had been opposing him, he embarked on the building of the great wall so as to connect and enclose all the states that now belonged to him and protect them from external intruders.

During the Ming Dynasty, after the Oirats had defeated the Ming army in 1449 (in what was famously referred to as the Battle of Tumu), the Great Wall idea was revived.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Great Wall proved quite useful to the Ming Dynasty, especially towards the end of its reign because it ensured that the empire remained protected against possible invasion by the Manchu (this was around 1600).

At this time, the wall had a total length of 5,000 kilometers, starting at the Gansu Province in Linyao all the way to the Liaoning Province (Man 105). As we talk today, the great wall is estimated to stretch 4,163 miles (about 6,700 kilometers).

It starts in the Gansu Province at the Jiayuguan Pass and stretches all the way to the Hebei Province in the Shanhaiguan Pass. The wall runs through the large plains in the northern border of the country. Although people have come up with several discussions as to how the wall came to be, it is widely believed that it was the efforts emperor Qin that the wall was extensively built.

The construction formation of the Great Wall also differed at different historical periods. For example during the Qin dynasty the pass gates were not constructed using stone and the wall lacked any fortresses.

However, during the construction of the Han Greta Waal that passes through the Gobi Region, the main fortification was moats (Roland and Jan 67). A beacon tower was also constructed at intervals of 1.25 kilometers along these moats. The beacon towers were used during the time of war.

When one column was lit, this was a sign that the advancing troops were less than 500.When two columns were lit, it meant that the advancing troops were less than 3,000. By using the columns of smoke, the defenders were always aware on the magnitude of what to expect.

Laborers who took part in the construction of the wall included the common people, soldiers, and criminals (Waldron 18). Different construction materials found use during the constructions process of the wall, over the centuries. Compacted earth was used in the construction of the original Great Wall.

We will write a custom Essay on The Great Wall of China specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Local stones were then used to surround the compacted earth. In a bid to ensure that the construction costs of the wall remained down, there was extensive use of local construction materials. In the later years, bricks were used to construct the Ming wall.

Where the Great Wall passed through the Rocky Mountains, builders made use of the stones found on these mountains. However, they were forced to use rammed earth in the planes, while juniper tamarisk and sanded reeds found use in the desert.

Scientists have now revealed that the remaining section of the Great Wall in the Gansu Province, consist of several layers of rammed earth (Waldron 18).

Between 202 BC and 220AD, during the Han Dynasty period, the most popular construction materials were crude stones and earth while between 1368 and 1644, during the Ming Dynasty, bricks had substituted stone and earth as the construction material of choice, thanks to their light weight and size; it was easier to make and carry them.

From statistical records, it is estimated that some 500,000 common people and 300,000 soldiers took part in the construction process of the initial Great Wall during the reign of Emperor Qin. Over 1,000 individuals are believed to have lost their lives in the process of constructing the Great Wall during the Din Dynasty.

The construction of another section of the great wall under the Northern Qi Dynasty took place in 555 A. D., and the entire section consisted of 450-kilometre. It started from Nankou, all the way to Shanxi, passing through Datong and Beijing.

During this time, the labor force is estimated to have been approximately 1.8 million people (Roland and Jan 71). The construction and living conditions were also extremely poor during this time and as a result, high number of workers lost their lives.

Works Cited Man, John. The Great Wall. London: Bantam Press, 2008. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Great Wall of China by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Roland, Michaud and Jan, Michel. The Great Wall of China. New York: Abbeville Press, 2001. Print.

Waldron, Arthur. The Great Wall of China: From History to Myth. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990. Print.

Yamashita, Michael and Lindesay, William. The Great Wall – From Beginning to End.

New York: Sterling, 2007. Print.

[supanova_question]

Critical Issues in Philippine Relations Essay college application essay help: college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The 1896 to 1898 revolutions in the Philippines

Filipinos’ fight for independence

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Negretos, Filipinos, who settled in Philippines approximately thirty thousand years ago, are the contemporary inhabitants of the land. Portuguese explorer, Ferdinand Magellan, led the first Europeans who were in Spanish expedition to visit the Philippines in 1951(Bellwood 91).

Their visit to the Philippines opened the door for more Europeans, mainly Spanish, to go to there. The Spanish were the first Europeans to settle in the Philippines. However, the colonization of the Filipinos by the Spanish did not start until1564 when an expedition led by Miguel Lopez de Legaspi arrived at the Philippines.

It was the settlement and colonization of the Spanish in the land of the Filipinos that led them to interact with other nations on different basis until the Filipinos attained their independence on 5 July 1945.

While awaiting trial for treason, Jose P. Laurel said, “All of us were collaborationists, none of us were traitors” (Ileto

[supanova_question]

Applying Problem Solving Research Paper cheap essay help

Introduction Students get to solve various problems in class, which range from Mathematics to social issues. These problems help students to develop and apply problem solving techniques, which are essential in promoting their critical analysis of their environment along with its complexities.

Problem solving abilities are therefore very important in developing intellectuals for enrichment of the society. It transforms student learning techniques into participative rather than passive recipients when it comes to creation of understanding.

Students develop capacity to Apply problem solving skills whenever faced with unexpected occurrences or situations in a timely manner. Real world problems are usually different from class problems, this call on students to recollect and transform their problem solving skills into solution for real world problems.

This paper will explore two real world problems and provide persuasive as well as scientific thinking solutions to them (Harris, 2002, p. 1).

Problem solving techniques are those skills used to solve life problems. They refer to an individual’s ability to reason both inductively and deductively, as well as be able to apply logic which can help that individual to infer problems, analyze and think critically.

These problems may require solutions arising from different elements such as persuasive thinking as well as scientific thinking, among others. Most problem solving processes involve the following stages; problem identification, analysis, generation of potential solutions, testing of solutions and evaluating the outcome.

In order to ensure that these methods are well applied, one needs to critically analyze the problem encountered. The following is an illustration of problems and their solutions (Harris, 2002, p. 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Problem 1 Real world problems are numerous and people face them each day as they require instant solutions. In this part, we shall study a problem whose solution is based on persuasive thinking. For instance, environmental pollution has been an issue that demands solution.

Every green movement tries to make known to us the need for saving our environmental. This is a problem we encounter in every part of the world, with people disposing wastes anyhow. It is believed that human activities contribute more environmental pollution than other causes such as animal and plant wastes, among others.

These agents of pollution are many, ranging from fossil fuels that release greenhouse gases, which have been faulted for the depletion of the ozone layer.

Other agents include pollution of lake and rivers, deforestation, and charcoal burning, among others. It is also estimated by the Natural Resources defense council that global warming is set to increase by over 1o Celsius even before the completion of 21st century.

This problem poses threat to our lives and the lives of our children. It therefor requires solution and an immediate one to help reduce its risks (Harris, 2002, p. 1).

Solution: Persuasive Thinking

In the situation above, the world is faced by an imminent disaster in global warming, because of increased environmental pollution. For persuasive thinking, one aspect that has to be defined is the problem, its causes, possible solutions, advantages and disadvantages as well as the choice or path taken.

The problem in this case is pollution of the environment; environment is continually getting worse with great effects already felt all over the world. The effects include unpredictable weather, Global warming, shortened life expectancy, famine, drought and increased spread of diseases, among others.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Applying Problem Solving specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Its advantages include, making work easier for man in terms of transport, Machinery, and many more. When these effects are compared, we find that, the disadvantages are numerous and adverse to the survival of life, which includes the human race on earth. In essence, it has to be mitigated.

The next step is finding possible solutions, which include stopping the release of greenhouse gases, afforestation and conservation of our environment. Since human activities cannot stop as their lives also depend on it, the other possible solutions include investing on alternative energy sources.

Therefore solution to this problem out of persuasive thinking would be to conserve our environment. It starts with us and without action our survival is threatened (Poole, 2006, p. 1).

Problem 2 This part will study a problem whose solution is based on scientific thinking. For instance, a young couple that do not want children and yet they also never want to use protection.

Their reason for not wanting children is that they are still young and unstable financially to support one, however, in the future when they are stable they’ll need. So the problem is preventing unwanted pregnancy in a couple, and they require a scientific thinking to solve it (Harris, 2002, p. 1).

Solution: Scientific Thinking

In the problem above, the issues are identified as ways of preventing unwanted pregnancies within a marriage setting. The first step involves understanding the problem and then gathering information and research on the same. For instance, a research from, women on waves, provides several researched solution to this problem.

These include, Total abstinence (100% protection), which is impossible for married couple, and use of contraceptives. The latter option is contraceptives, in which there are several methods with different rates of protection.

These include use of diaphragm-80% (type and estimated percentage effectiveness), Emergency contraceptives-75%, surgical sterilization-99%, Intrauterine device-99%, implant-99%, injection-99%, oral contraceptives-95%, female condom-79% and male condom-86%.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Applying Problem Solving by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More These are methods that have been researched and proved medically, using scientific techniques. Since they need a child in the future, sterilization is out of question, they can then use oral contraceptives, implant or injection. And since oral contraceptives have been proved to have some side effects, then implant would be wise for the couple (Women on Waves, 2011, p. 1).

Summary Problem solving techniques or skills are very essential in aiding individuals to provide quick solutions to their everyday needs. These need critical thinking, inference and analysis which can only be mastered by intellectuals and critical think-tanks, Persuasive thinking involves the use of critical thinking to bring out logic on a problem.

The logic inferred should be used to persuade others to follow that idea. It also involves persistence, and this convinces people that you have faith and knowledge of the idea. Individuals pursuing persuasive thinking must provide the advantages and disadvantages of their solutions before deciding on it.

It is also imperative for that individual to provide concise and conclusive evidences on the advantages as well as the disadvantages of the chosen idea (Poole, 2006, p. 1).

In scientific thinking, we must have a thorough knowledge of the problem, study it, gather information related to it, analyze, explore possible solutions, and use credible sources along with researched ideas to decide on the best solution.

Since the couple do not want to use condoms, and they also require children in the future, implant would be their best option as it will be removed when they are ready (Women on Waves, 2011, p. 1).

Conclusion Every problem needs a solution, people face different problems in the world, and in most cases this requires transformation of learned skills into applicable problem solving skills. Most employers are after graduates who can solve real problems as fast as possible, and this can only happen with critical thinkers.

The two methods of problem solving are different although persuasive thinking may sometimes borrow ideas from scientific thinking to prove ideas (Harris, 2002, p. 1).

Reference List Harris, R. (2002). Problem Solving techniques. Virtual Salt. Retrieved from: https://www.virtualsalt.com/crebook4.htm

Poole, L.,

[supanova_question]